# On the History of Unified Field Theories. Part II. (ca. 1930–ca. 1965)

## Abstract

The present review intends to provide an overall picture of the research concerning classical unified field theory, worldwide, in the decades between the mid-1930 and mid-1960. Main themes are the conceptual and methodical development of the field, the interaction among the scientists working in it, their opinions and interpretations. Next to the most prominent players, A. Einstein and E. Schrödinger, V. Hlavatý and the French groups around A. Lichnerowicz, M.-A. Tonnelat, and Y. Thiry are presented. It is shown that they have given contributions of comparable importance. The review also includes a few sections on the fringes of the central topic like Born-Infeld electromagnetic theory or scalar-tensor theory. Some comments on the structure and organization of research-groups are also made.

### Keywords

Unified field theory Differential geometry History of science## 1 Introduction

The dream of unifying all fundamental interactions in a single theory by one common representation still captures the mind of many a theoretical physicist. In the following, I will focus on the development of classical unified field theory (UFT) in the period from the mid-1930s to the mid-1960s. One of the intentions then was to join the gravitational to the electromagnetic field, and, hopefully, to other fields (mesonic, …) in “a single hyperfield, whose basis would be equivalent to that of the geometrical structure for the universe” ([376], p. 3). Einstein referred to his corresponding theories alternatively as the “generalized theory of gravitation”, “(relativistic) theory of the non-symmetric (or asymmetric) field”, and of “the theory of the total field”. Schrödinger spoke of “unitary field theory”; this name was taken up later by Bergmann [24] or Takasu [598]. In Mme. Tonnelat’s group, the name “théorie du champ unifié d’Einstein” (or d’Einstein-Schrödinger), or just “théorie unitaire (du champ)(d’Einstein)” was in use; Hlavatý called it “(Einstein) Unified (Field) Theory of Relativity”. In other papers we read of “Einstein’s Generalized Theory of Gravitation”, “Einstein’s equations of unified field”, “theory of the non-symmetric field”, “einheitliche Feldtheorie” etc. However, we should not forget that other types of unitary field theory were investigated during the period studied, among them Kaluza-Klein theory and its generalizations. In France, one of these ran under the name of “Jordan-Thiry” theory, cf. Sections 3.1.2 and 11.1.

Most important centers for research on unified field theory in the 1930s until the early 1950s were those around Albert Einstein in Princeton and Erwin Schrödinger in Dublin. Paris became a focus of UFT in the late 1940s up to the late 1960s, with a large group of students around both Mme. M.-A. Tonnelat in theoretical physics, and the mathematician A. Lichnerowicz. In comparison with the work of Einstein and Schrödinger, the contributions to UFT of the Paris groups have been neglected up to now by historians of physics although they helped to clarify consequences of the theory. These groups had a share both in the derivation of exact mathematical results and in contributing arguments for the eventual demise of UFT. The mathematician V. Hlavatý from Indiana University, Bloomington (USA), with one or two students, enriched the mathematically-oriented part of the UFT-community with his systematical studies in the 1950s. We will encounter many further researchers worldwide, especially sizeable groups in Italy, and in countries like Canada, England, India, and Japan. The time period is chosen such that Einstein’s move from Berlin to Princeton approximately defines its beginning while its end falls into the 1960s which saw a revival of interest in general relativity theory [192], and the dying off of some still existing interest into classical unified field theory. Up to the 1940s, some hope was justified that the gravitational interaction might play an important role in the unification of the fundamental fields. With the growth of quantum field theory and developments in elementary particle physics, gravity became crowded out, however.

*field*quantization by Jordan, Heisenberg, Klein, Pauli, and Wigner in 1927/28. Expert histories of quantum electrodynamics and its beginning have been presented

^{1}by S. Schweber [562], O. Darrigol [109], and A. Pais [470]. Around the time when Einstein left Berlin, Heisenberg and others set up theories of the strong nuclear force. Fermi had introduced a theory of weak interactions in connection with beta-decay. Since 1932/33, besides electron, photon, and proton, three new particles, namely the neutron, positron and neutrino had come into play with the last two already having been found, empirically. Anyone doubting the existence of the neutron, had to give in after nuclear fission had been discovered and nuclear reactors been built. At the 1933 Solvay conference, L. de Broglie had proposed a neutrino theory of light, i.e., with the photon as a composite particle made up by two neutrinos [111, 112], and others like P. Jordan or G. Wentzel had followed suit [314, 315, 687]. For a while, this became a much debated subject in theoretical physics. Another great topic, experimentally, was the complicated physics of “cosmic rays” containing at least another new particle with a mass about 200 times that of the electron. It was called alternatively “heavy electron”, “mesot(r)on”, and “meson” and became mixed up with the particle mediating the nuclear force the name of which was “U-quantum”, or “Yukon” after Yukawa’s suggestion in 1934/35 concerning nuclear interactions. For the history cf. [63]. When the dust had settled around 1947, the “mesotron” became the muon and the pions were considered to be the carriers of the nuclear force (strong interaction). Since 1937, the muon had been identified in cosmic rays [455, 593]. The charged pion which decays into a muon and a (anti-)neutrino via the weak interaction was detected in 1947, the uncharged one in 1950. In the 1940s, quantum electrodynamics was given a new kick by Feynman, Schwinger and Tomonaga. Up to the mid fifties, nuclear theory had evolved, the strong and weak nuclear forces were accepted with the neutrino observed only in 1957, after Einstein’s death. Thus, the situation had greatly changed during the two decades since Einstein had started to get involved in unified field theory: in the 1920s only two fundamental interactions had been known, both long-range: the electromagnetic and the gravitational. Before 1926, neither non-relativistic quantum theory, nor relativistic quantum electrodynamics had been developed. In 1928, with Dirac’s equation, “spin” had appeared as a new property of elementary particles. After a brief theoretical venture into spinors and the Dirac equation (cf. Section 7.3 of Part I and Section 4.1), against all of the evidence concerning new particles with half-integer spin and new fundamental interactions obtained in the meantime, Einstein continued to develop the idea of unifying only the electromagnetic and gravitational fields via pure

*geometry*, cf. Section 7 below. His path was followed in much of the research done in classical UFT. Occasionally, as in Schrödinger’s and Tonnelat’s work, meson fields, treated as classical fields, were also included in the interpretation of geometric objects within the theory. The state of affairs was reflected, in 1950, in a note in the

*Scientific American*describing Einstein’s motivation for UFT as:

“to relate the physical phenomena in the submicroscopic world of the atom to those in the macroscopic world of universal space-time, to find a common principle explaining both electromagnetic forces and gravitational force […]. In this inquiry Einstein has pursued a lonely course; most physicists have taken the apparently more promising road of quantum theory.” ([564], p. 26)

In fact, the majority of the theoretical physicists working in field theory considered UFT of the Einstein-Schrödinger type as inadequate. Due to Einstein’s earlier achievements, his fame and, possibly, due to his, Schrödinger’s and de Broglie’s reserve toward the statistical interpretation of quantum mechanics, classical or semi-classical approaches to field theory were favoured in their scientific research environments in theoretical physics. Convinced by the stature of these men, a rather small number of theoretical physicists devoted their scientific careers to classical unified field theory. Others wrote their PhD theses in the field and then quickly left it. A few mathematicians became attracted by the geometrical structures underlying the field (cf. [677], p. 30).

*classical*groundwork for an eventual alternative to quantum field theory or, as he expressed it himself, as “‘the classical analogue’ of the true laws of Nature” ([551], p. 50).

^{2}Einstein in particular followed his way towards UFT unwaveringly in spite of failing success. Shortly before his death, he even reinterpreted his general relativity, the central concept of which had been the gravitational and inertial potentials encased in the (pseudo-)Riemannian metric tensor, through the lens of unified field theory:

“[…] the essential achievement of general relativity, namely to overcome ‘rigid’ space (i.e., the inertial frame), is only indirectly connected with the introduction of a Riemannian metric. The direct relevant conceptual element is the ‘displacement field’ (\(\Gamma _{ik}^l\)), which expresses the infinitesimal displacement of vectors. It is this which replaces the parallelism of spatially arbitrarily separated vectors fixed by the inertial frame (i.e., the equality of corresponding components) by an infinitesimal operation. This makes it possible to construct tensors by differentiation and hence to dispense with the introduction of ‘rigid’ space (the inertial frame). In the face of this, it seems to be of secondary importance in some sense that some particular Γ-field can be deduced from a Riemannian metric […].”

^{3}(A. Einstein, 4 April 1955, letter to M. Pantaleo, in ([473], pp. XV–XVI); English translation taken from Hehl and Obuchov 2007 [244].)

^{4}Einstein’s gaze rather seems to have been directed backward to Levi-Civita, Weyl’s paper of 1918 [688], and to Eddington.

^{5}The Institute for Advanced Study must have presented a somewhat peculiar scenery at the end of the 1940s and early 50s: among the senior faculty in the physics section as were Oppenheimer, Placzek and Pais, Einstein remained isolated. That a “postdoc” like Freeman Dyson had succeeded in understanding and further developing the different approaches to quantum electrodynamics by Schwinger and Feynman put forward in 1948, seemingly left no mark on Einstein. Instead, he could win the interest and help of another Princeton postdoc at the time, Bruria Kaufman, for his continued work in UFT [587]. We may interpret a remark of Pauli as justifying Einstein’s course:

“The quantization of fields turns out more and more to be a problem with thorns and horns, and by and by I get used to think that I will not live to see substantial progress for all these problems.” ([493], p. 519)

^{6}

In fact, for elementary particle theory, the 1950s and 1960s could be seen as “a time of frustration and confusion” ([686], p. 99). For weak interactions (four-fermion theory) renormalization did not work; for strong interactions no calculations at all were possible. W. Pauli was very skeptical toward the renormalization schemes developed: “[…] from my point of view, renormalization is a not yet understood palliative.” (Letter to Heisenberg 29 September 1953 [491], p. 268.)

“Einstein just has disappeared leaving us, in addition to many completed works, an enigmatic theory. The scientists look at it — like he himself did — with a mixture of distrust and hope, a theory which carries the imprint of a fundamental ambition of its creator.” (cf. Lichnerowicz, preface of [632], p. VII.)

^{7}

“In the literature there are many approaches to the problem of the unified field theory. Some of them strongly influenced the development of geometry, although none has received general recognition as a physical theory.” ([269], preface, p. X.)

The work done in the major “groups” lead by Einstein, Schrödinger, Lichnerowicz, Tonnelat, and Hlavatý was published, at least partially, in monographs (Einstein: [150], Appendix II; [156], Appendix II); (Schrödinger: [557], Chapter XII); (Lichnerowicz: [371]); (Hlavatý: [269]), and, particularly, (Tonnelat: [632, 641, 642]). To my knowledge, the only textbook including the Einstein-Schrödinger non-symmetric theory has been written in the late 1960s by D. K. Sen [572]. The last monograph on the subject seems to have been published in 1982 by A. H. Klotz [334]. There exist a number of helpful review articles covering various stages of UFT like Bertotti [26], Bergia [19], Borzeszkowsi & Treder [679], Cap [71], Hittmair [256], Kilmister and Stephenson [330, 331], Narlikar [453], Pinl [497], Rao [504], Sauer [528, 529], and Tonnelat ([645], Chapter 11), but no attempt at giving an overall picture beyond Goenner [228] seems to have surfaced. Vizgin’s book ends with Einstein’s research in the 1930s [678]. In 1957, V. Bargmann has given a clear four-page résumé of both the Einstein-Schrödinger and the Kaluza-Klein approaches to unified field theory [12].^{8} In van Dongen’s recent book, the epistemological and methodological positions of Einstein during his work on unified field theory are discussed [667].

The present review intends to provide a feeling for what went on in research concerning UFT at the time, worldwide. Its main themes are the conceptual and methodical development of the field, the interaction among the scientists working in it, and their opinions and interpretations. The review also includes a few sections on the fringes of the general approach. A weighty problem has been to embed the numerous technical details in a narrative readable to those historians of science lacking the mathematical tools which are required in many sections. In order to ease reading of chapters, separately, a minor number of repetitions was deemed helpful. Some sociological and philosophical questions coming up in connection with this review will be touched in Sections 18 and 19. These two chapters can be read also by those without any knowledge of the mathematical and physical background. Up to now, philosophers of science apparently have not written much on Einstein’s unified field theory, with the exception of remarks following from a non-technical comparison of the field with general relativity. Speculation about the motivation of the central figures are omitted here if they cannot be extracted from some source.

The main groups involved in research on classical unified field theory will be presented here more or less in chronological order. The longest account is given of Einstein-Schrödinger theory. In the presentation of researchers we also follow geographical and language aspects due to publications in France being mostly in French, in Italy mostly in Italian, in Japan and India in English.^{9}

We cannot embed the history of unified field theory into the external (political) history of the period considered; progress in UFT was both hindered by the second world war, Nazi- and communist regimes, and helped, after 1945, by an increasing cooperation among countries and the beginning globalization of communications.^{10}

Part II of the “History of Unified Field Theory” is written such that it can be read independently from Part I. Some links to the earlier part [229] in *Living Reviews in Relativity* are provided.

## 2 Mathematical Preliminaries

For the convenience of the reader, some of the mathematical formalism given in the first part of this review is repeated in a slightly extended form: It is complemented by further special material needed for an understanding of papers to be described.

### 2.1 Metrical structure

First, a definition of the *distance ds* between two infinitesimally close points on a D-dimensional differential manifold *M*_{D} is to be given, eventually corresponding to temporal and spatial distances in the external world. For *ds*, positivity, symmetry in the two points, and the validity of the triangle equation are needed. We assume *ds* to be homogeneous of degree one in the coordinate differentials *dx*^{i} connecting neighboring points. This condition is not very restrictive; it includes *Finsler geometry* [510, 199, 394, 4] to be briefly discussed in Section 17.2.

*ds*is linked to a non-degenerate bilinear form

*g*(

*X, Y*), called the

*first fundamental form*; the corresponding quadratic form defines a tensor field, the

*metrical tensor*, with

*D*

^{2}components

*g*

_{ij}such that

*x*

^{i}and

*x*

^{i}+

*dx*

^{i}, respectively

^{11}. Besides the norm of a vector \(\vert X \vert := \sqrt {{g_{ij}}{X^i}{X^j}}\), the “angle” between directions

*X, Y*can be defined by help of the metric:

*antisymmetric*part of the metrical’s tensor does not influence distances and norms but angles.

*g*being a

*symmetric*tensor field, i.e., with

*g*

_{ik}=

*g*

_{(ik)}with only

*D*(

*D*+ 1)/2 components; in this case the metric is called

*Riemannian*if its eigenvalues are positive (negative) definite and Lorentzian if its signature is ±(

*D*− 2)

^{12}. In this case, the norm is \(|X|: = \sqrt {|{g_{ij\,}}{X^i}{X^j}|}\). In space-time, i.e., for

*D*= 4, the Lorentzian signature is needed for the definition of the

*light cone*:

*g*

_{ij}

*dx*

^{i}

*dx*

^{j}= 0. The paths of light signals through the cone’s vertex are assumed to lie in this subspace. In unified field theory, the line element (“metric”)

*g*

_{ik}is an asymmetric tensor, in general. When of full rank, its inverse

*g*

^{ik}is defined through

^{13}

^{14}:

*h*

_{ik}and

*l*

^{ik}have the same rank; also,

*h*

_{ik}and

*l*

^{ik}have the same signature [27]. Equation (2) looks quite innocuous. When working with the decompositions (3), (4) however, eight tensors are floating around:

*h*

_{ik}and its inverse

*h*

^{ik}(indices not raised!);

*k*

_{ik}and its inverse

*k*

^{ik};

*l*

^{ik}≠

*h*

^{ik}and its inverse

*l*

_{ik}≠

*h*

_{ik}, and finally

*m*

^{ik}≠

*k*

^{ik}and its inverse

*m*

_{ik}.

*g*

^{jm}(4) and the definitions for the respective inverses

^{15}

*g*=: det(

*g*

_{ik}) ≠ 0,

*k*=: det(

*k*

_{ik}) ≠ 0,

*h*=: det(

*h*

_{ik}) ≠ 0. We also note:

*l*= det(

*l*

_{ij}). From (9) we see that unlike in general relativity even invariants of order zero (in the derivatives) do exist: \({k \over h}\), and

*h*

^{kl}

*h*

^{mn}

*k*

_{km}

*k*

_{ln}; for the 24 invariants of the metric of order 1 in space-time cf. [512, 513, 514].

*g*

_{ik}is that the raising and lowering of indices with

*g*

_{ik}now becomes more complicated. For vector components we must distinguish:

*g*

_{jk}, i.e., by

*h*

_{jk}and its inverse

*h*

^{ij}.

^{16}In fact, this is often seen in the literature; cf. [269, 297, 298]. Thus, three new tensors (one symmetric, two skew) show up:

*symmetric*tensor. There are two obvious simple choices for such a metric in UFT, i.e.,

*h*

_{ik}and

*l*

^{ik}. For them, in order to be Lorentz metrics,

*h*< 0 (

*l*:= det(

*l*

^{ij}) < 0) must hold. The light cones determined by

*h*

_{ik}and by

*l*

^{ik}are different, in general. For further choices for the metric cf. Section 9.7.

#### 2.1.1 Affine structure

*linear connection*(affine connection, affinity) L with

*D*

^{3}components \({L_{ij}}^k\); it is a geometrical object but

*not*a tensor field and its components change inhomogeneously under local coordinate transformations.

^{17}The connection is a device introduced for establishing a comparison of vectors in different points of the manifold. By its help, a tensorial derivative ∇, called

*covariant*derivative is constructed. For each vector field and each tangent vector it provides another unique vector field. On the components of vector fields X and linear forms

*ω*it is defined by

*f*, covariant and partial derivative coincide: \({\nabla _i}f = {{\partial f} \over {\partial {x_i}}} \equiv {\partial _i}f \equiv f{,_i}\). The

*antisymmetric*part of the connection, i.e.,

*torsion*; it is a tensor field. The trace of the torsion tensor \({S_i} =: \,{S_{il}}^l\) is called

*torsion vector*or vector torsion; it connects to the two traces of the linear connection \({L_i} =: {L_{il}}^l\); \({\tilde L_j} =: {L_{il}}^l\) as \({S_i} = 1/2({L_i} - {\tilde L_i})\). Torsion is not just one of the many tensor fields to be constructed: it has a very clear meaning as a

*deformation*of geometry. Two vectors transported parallelly along each other do not close up to form a parallelogram (cf. Eq. (22) below). The deficit is measured by torsion. The rotation \({\overset {+}{\nabla} _k}{\omega _i} - {\overset {+}{\nabla} _i}{\omega _k}\) of a 1-form now depends on torsion \({S_{ki}}^r\):

*symmetric*this does

*not*make any difference because of

Both derivatives are used in versions of unified field theory by Einstein and others.^{18}

A manifold provided with only a linear (affine) connection L is called *affine space*. From the point of view of group theory, the *affine* group (linear inhomogeneous coordinate transformations) plays a special rôle: with regard to it the connection transforms as a *tensor*; cf. Section 2.1.5 of Part I.

^{19}

^{20}

*z*= 1.

^{21}For the concept of gauge weight cf. (491) of Section 13.2.

*parallelly transported*along a parametrized curve λ(

*u*) with tangent vector X iff for its components \(Y_{\Vert k}^i{X^k}(u) = 0\) holds along the curve. A curve is called an

*autoparallel*if its tangent vector is parallelly transported along it in each point:

^{22}

*σ*= 0 may be reached. Some authors use a parameter-invariant condition for auto-parallels:

*X*

^{l}

*X*

^{i}

_{∥k}

*X*

^{k}(

*u*) −

*X*

^{i}

*X*

^{l}

_{∥k}

*X*

^{k}(

*u*) = 0; cf. [284].

*projective structure*on

*M*

_{D}[691], [690]. The particular set of connections

In Section 2.2.3, we shall find the set of transformations \({L_{jk}}^j \to {L_{ik}}^j + \delta _i^j{{\partial \omega} \over {\partial {x^k}}}\) playing a role in versions of Einstein’s unified field theory.

*T*to it or to its symmetrized part:

*T*or \(\tilde T\) we can regain all connections used in work on unified field theories. One case is given by Schrödinger’s “star”-connection:

*S*

_{i}= 0. The star connection thus shares the vanishing of the torsion vector with a symmetric connection. Further examples will be encountered in later sections; cf. (382) of Section 10.3.3.

#### 2.1.2 Metric compatibility, non-metricity

*symmetric*connection the condition for metric compatibility reads:

^{23}is given by:

*non-symmetric*connection the following equation was introduced by Einstein (and J. M. Thomas) (note the position of the indices!)

^{24}

*two*connections: \(L_{ij}^ + {}^k =: {L_{(ij)}}^k + {S_{ij}}^k = {L_{ij}}^k\) and \({{\bar L}_{ij}}^k =: {L_{(ij)}}^k - {S_{ij}}^k = {L_{ij}}^k\).

^{25}We will name (30) “compatibility equation” although it has lost its geometrical meaning within Riemannian geometry.

^{26}In terms of the covariant derivative with regard to the symmetric part of the connection, (30) reduces to

*h*

_{ij}. After splitting the metric into its irreducible parts, we obtain

^{27}

*L*by the metric and its first partial derivatives. (cf. Section 10.2.3.)

*ĝ*

^{ik}can be made to vanish:

From (30) or (33), the connection *L* may in principle be determined as a functional of the metric tensor, its first derivatives, and of torsion.^{28} After multiplication with *ν*_{s}, (33) can be rewritten as \(\overset{-}{\nabla}_{i}{\overset{\rightarrow}{\nu}}^{k}= g^{ks}\underset{-}{\tilde{\nabla}_{i}}\nu_{s}\), where \(\tilde \nabla\) is formed with the Hermitian conjugate connection (cf. Section 2.2.2) [396].^{29}

*Remark*:

Although used often in research on UFT, the ±-notation is clumsy and ambiguous. We apply the ±-differentiation to (2), and obtain: \({({g_{mi}}\,{g^{mj}})_{\underset {\pm} {\vert\vert}l}} = {g_{\underset + m \underset - i}}_{\vert\vert l}\,{g^{mj}} + {g_{mi\,}}\,{g^{\overset m + \overset j -}}_{{\vert\vert}l} = {(\delta _i^j)_{\underset \pm {\vert\vert}l}}\). While the l.h.s. of the last equation is well defined and must vanish by definition, the r.h.s. is ambiguous and does not vanish: in both cases \(\delta _{\underset - i}^{\overset j +} = - {S_{ij}}^j \ne 0,\,\,\delta _{\underset {+}{i}}^{\overset{j}{-}}{}_{\Vert l} =S_{il}^j \ne 0\). Einstein had noted this when pointing out that only \(\delta _{\underset + i}^{\overset j +}{}_{\Vert l}=0=\delta _{\underset - i}^{\overset j -}{}_{\Vert l}\) but \(\delta _{\underset + i}^{\overset j +}{}_{\Vert l}\neq 0,\, \, \delta _{\underset - i}^{\overset j -}{}_{\Vert l}\neq 0\) ([147], p. 580). Already in 1926, J. M. Thomas had seen the ambiguity of \({({A_{i{B_i}}})_{\Vert l}}\) and defined a procedure for keeping valid the product rule for derivatives [607]. Obviously, \({\overset 0 \nabla _k}\delta _i^j = 0\).

*g*

_{ik∥l}; 0 =

*g*

_{ik∥l}to Eq. (30). In the presence of a symmetric metric

*h*

_{ij}, in place of Eqs. (25), (26) a decomposition

^{30}Hély’s additional condition leads to a totally antisymmetric \(u_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}\).

*η*

^{ijkl}is the totally antisymmetric tensor density containing the entries 0, ±1 according to whether two indices are equal, or all indices forming an even or odd permutation. For certain derivatives and connections, the object can be covariantly constant [473, 484]:

### 2.2 Symmetries

#### 2.2.1 Transformation with regard to a Lie group

*C*

^{∞}-generator \(X = {\xi ^a}{\partial \over {\partial {x^a}}}\) of a Lie algebra (corresponding, locally, to a Lie-group)

*ξ*is named a

*Killing vector*; its components generate the infinitesimal symmetry transformation: \({x^i} \to {x^{i\prime}} = {x^i} + {\xi ^i}\). Equation (43) may be expressed in a different form:

#### 2.2.2 Hermitian symmetry

^{31}Hermitian “conjugate” metric and connection are introduced for a complex metric and connection by

*real*tensors

*h*

_{ik},

*k*

_{ik}, \(L_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}\), \(S_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}\), i.e., of

*g*

_{ik}=

*h*

_{ik}+

*i k*

_{ik}, \(L_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k} = \Gamma _{ij}^{\,\,\,k} + i\,S_{ij}^{\,\,\,k}\) obviously \({\tilde g_{ik}} = {\overset - g _{ik}}, \, \tilde L_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k} = \overset - L _{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}\) holds, if the symmetry of

*h*

_{ik}and the skew-symmetry of

*k*

_{ik}are taken into account. For a real linear form \({\omega _i}:\,({\overset + \nabla _k}{\omega _i}){}^ \sim = {\overset - \nabla _i}\omega k\).

*Hermitian symmetry*then means that for both, metric and connection, \({\tilde g_{ik}} = {g_{ik}}, \, \tilde L_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}: = L_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,\,k}\) is valid. For the determinant

*g*of a metric with Hermitian symmetry, the relation \(g = \overset - g\) holds.

*Ã*

_{ij}is called the (Hermitian)

*conjugate*tensor. A tensor possesses Hermitian symmetry if

*Ã*

_{…ik…}(

*g*

_{rs}) =

*A*

_{…ik…}(

*g*

_{rs}). Einstein calls a tensor

*anti-Hermitian*if

*real*fields,

*transposition symmetry*replaces Hermitian symmetry.

*Ã*

_{ij}=

*A*

_{ji}.

#### 2.2.3 λ-transformation

_{i}is a real 1-form field. They were named

*projective*by Schouten ([537], p. 287). In later versions of his UFT, Einstein introduced a “symmetry”-transformation called λ-transformation [156]:

*U*. For an application cf. Section 9.3.1. After gauge-(Yang-Mills-) theory had become fashionable, λ-transformations with λ

_{i}=

*∂*

_{i}λ were also interpreted as gauge-transformations [702, 23]. According to him the parts of the connection irreducible with regard to diffeomorphisms are “mixed” by (52), apparently because both will then contain the 1-form λ

_{i}. Under (52) the torsion vector transforms like \(\prime{S_k} = {S_k} - {3 \over 2}{\lambda _i}\), i.e., it can be made to vanish by a proper choice of λ.

The compatibility equation (30) is not conserved under λ-transformations because of \({g_{\underset + i \,\underset - k \Vert l}} \to {g_{\underset + i \,\underset - k \Vert l}} - 2{g_{i(k}}{\lambda _{l)}}\). The same holds for the projective transformations (51), cf. ([430], p. 84). No generally accepted physical interpretation of the λ-transformations is known.

### 2.3 Affine geometry

We will speak of *affine geometry* in particular if only an affine connection exists on the 4-manifold, not a metric. Thus the concept of curvature is defined.

#### 2.3.1 Curvature

*homothetic*curvature

^{32}:

*j*| does not take part.

*i, j*leads to:

*symmetric*connection (cf. Section 2.1.3.1 of Part I, Eq. (38)):

*symmetric*connection, an additional identity named after O. Veblen holds:

For a complete decomposition of the curvature tensor (53) into irreducible parts with regard to the permutation group further objects are needed, as e.g., \({\epsilon ^{ajkl}}\underset + K _{jkl}^b = 2{\epsilon ^{ajkl}}{\partial _{\left[ k \right.}}{S_{\left. l \right]}}_j^b\); cf. [348].

#### 2.3.2 A list of “Ricci”-tensors

^{33}The following collection contains a few examples of the objects used as a Ricci-tensor in variational principles/field equations of UFT besides \({\underset + K _{ik}}\) and \({\underset - K _{ik}}\) of the previous section.

^{34}They all differ in terms built from torsion. Among them are:

One of the puzzles remaining in Einstein’s research on UFT is his optimism in the search for a preferred Ricci-tensor although he had known, already in 1931, that presence of torsion makes the problem ambiguous, at best. At that time, he had found a totality of four possible field equations within his teleparallelism theory [176]. As the preceding list shows, now a 6-parameter object could be formed. The additional symmetries without physical support suggested by Einstein did not help. Possibly, he was too much influenced by the quasi-uniqueness of his field equations for the gravitational field.

#### 2.3.3 Curvature and scalar densities

From the expressions (73) to (81) we can form scalar densities of the type: \({\hat g^{ik}}\overset {\rm{Her}} {{{\underset - K}_{ik}}}\) to \({\hat g^{ik}}{U_{ik}}\) etc. As the preceding formulas show, it would be sufficient to just pick \({\hat g^{ik}}{\underset 0 K_{ik}}\) and add scalar densities built from homothetic curvature, torsion and its first derivatives in order to form a most general Lagrangian. As will be discussed in Section 19.1.1, this would draw criticism to the extent that such a theory does not qualify as a unified field theory in a stronger sense.

#### 2.3.4 Curvature and λ-transformation

^{35}

_{k}on the r.h.s. For the contracted curvatures a λ-transformation leads to (cf. also [430]):

_{i}=

*∂*

_{i}λ, the curvature tensors and their traces are invariant with regard to the λ-transformations of Eq. (52). Occasionally, \(\prime\Gamma _{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k} = \Gamma _{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k} + ({\partial _i}\lambda)\delta _j^{\,\,k}\) is interpreted as a gravitational gauge transformation.

### 2.4 Differential forms

*θ*

^{â}(

*â*= 1, …, 4) by \({\theta ^{\hat a}}: = h_l^{\hat a}d{x^l}\). The reciprocal basis in tangent space is given by \({e_{\hat j}} = h_{\hat j}^l{\partial \over {\partial {x^l}}}\). Thus, \({\theta ^{\hat a}}({e_{\hat j}}) = \delta _{\hat j}^{\hat a}\). An antisymmetric, distributive and associative product, the external or “wedge” (Λ)-product is defined for differential forms. Likewise, an external derivative

*d*can be introduced.

^{36}The metric (e.g., of space-time) is given by \({\eta _{\hat i\hat k}}{\theta ^{\hat i}} \otimes {\theta ^{\hat k}}\), or \({g_{lm}} = {\eta _{\hat i\hat k}}h_l^{\hat i}h_m^{\hat k}\). The covariant derivative of a tangent vector with bein-components \({X^{\hat k}}\) is defined via Cartan’s first structure equations,

^{î}is the torsion-2-form, \({\Theta ^{\hat i}} = - {S_{\hat l\hat m}}^{\hat i}{\theta ^{\hat l}}\wedge{\theta ^{\hat m}}\). We have \({\omega _{\hat i\hat k}} = - {\omega _{\hat k\hat i}}\). The link to the components \(L_{[ij]}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,k}\) of the affine connection is given by \(\omega _{\hat k}^{\hat i} = h_l^{\hat i}h_{\hat k}^m{L_{\hat rm}}^l\theta \hat r\)

^{37}. The covariant derivative of a tangent vector with bein-components \({X^{\hat k}}\) then is

^{38}

### 2.5 Classification of geometries

A differentiable manifold with an affine structure is called *affine* geometry. If both, a (possibly non-symmetric) “metric” and an affine structure, are present we name the geometry “mixed”. A subcase, i.e., *metric-affine* geometry demands for a *symmetric* metric. When interpreted just as a gravitational theory, it sometimes is called MAG. A further subdivision derives from the non-metricity tensor being zero or ≠ 0. Riemann-Cartan geometry is the special case of metric-affine geometry with vanishing non-metricity tensor and non-vanishing torsion. Weyl’s geometry had non-vanishing non-metricity tensor but vanishing torsion. In Sections 2.1.3 and 4.1.1 of Part I, these geometries were described in greater detail.

#### 2.5.1 Generalized Riemann-Cartan geometry

^{39}[240]:

*h*

^{kl}is the inverse of

*h*

_{kl}=

*g*

_{(kl)}. As described in Section 6.2 of Part I, its physical content is dubious. As the torsion tensor does not vanish, in general, i.e.,

#### 2.5.2 Mixed geometry

*l*

^{jk}and

*m*

^{jk}come from the decomposition into irreducible parts of the inverse of the non-symmetric metric

*g*

_{jk}. Both parts on the r.h.s. could be taken as a Lagrangian, separately. The inverse

*h*

^{jk}of the symmetric part, i.e., of

*g*

_{(jk)}=

*h*

_{jk}could be used as well to build a scalar: \({h^{jk}}{\underset + K_{(jk)}}\). Mixed geometry is the one richest in geometrical objects to be constructed from the asymmetric metric and the asymmetric connection. What at first may have appeared as an advantage, turned out to become an ‘embarras de richesses’: defining relations among geometric objects and physical observables abound; cf. Section 9.7.

Whenever a symmetric tensor appears which is independent of the connection and of full rank, it can play the role of a metric. The geometry then may be considered to be a *Riemannian* geometry with additional geometric objects: torsion tensor, non-metricity tensor, skew-symmetric part of the “metric” etc. These might be related to physical observables. Therefore, it is moot to believe that two theories are different solely on the basis of the criterion that they can be interpreted either in a background of Riemannian or mixed geometry. However, by a reduction of the more general geometries to a mere Riemannian one plus some additional geometric objects the very spirit of UFT as understood by Einstein would become deformed; UFT explicitly looks for *fundamental* geometric objects representing the various physical fields to be described.

#### 2.5.3 Conformal geometry

*g*

_{ij}(

*x*

^{m}) a whole equivalence class

*γ*

_{ij}(

*x*

^{l}) =

*ρ*

^{2}(

*x*

^{n})

*g*

_{ij}(

*x*

^{m}) with a function

*ρ*(

*x*

^{n}) obtains. Geometrical objects of interest are those invariant with regard to the transformation:

*g*

_{ij}(

*x*

^{m}) →

*ḡ*

_{ij}=

*ρ*

^{2}(

*x*

^{n})

*g*

_{ij}(

*x*

^{m}). One such object is Weyl’s conformal curvature tensor:

*n*is the dimension of the manifold (

*n*= 4: space-time). \(C_{jkl}^i\) is trace-free. For

*n*> 3, \(C_{jkl}^i = 0\) is a necessary and sufficient condition that the space is conformally flat, i.e.,

*γ*

_{ij}(

*x*

^{l}) =

*ρ*

^{2}(

*x*

^{n})

*η*

_{ij}(

*x*

^{m}) ([191], p. 92).

If *ξ*^{k} is a Killing vector field for *g*_{ij}, then *ξ*^{k} is a *conformal* Killing vector field for *ḡ*_{ij}; cf. Eq. (45) in Section 2.1.2.

A particular sub-case of conformal geometry is “similarity geometry”, for which the restricted group of transformations acts *g*_{ij} (*x*^{m}) → *γ*_{ij} (*x*^{l}) = *k*^{2}*g*_{ij} (*x*^{m}), with a constant *k*, cf. Section 3.1.

### 2.6 Number fields

In Section 2.3 of Part I, the possibility of choosing number fields different from the real numbers for the field variables was stated. Such field variables then would act in a manifold with real coordinates. A more deeply going change is the move to an underlying manifold with coordinates taken from another number field, e.g., complex spaces. The complex number field was most often used in connection with unified field theory in both roles. cf. A. Einstein, (complex space, Section 7.2), J. Moffat, (complex field on real space, Section 13) and A. Crumeyrolle, (hypercomplex manifold, Section 11.2.2).

*z*=

*x*+

*ϵy, x, y*real and consider the algebra with two elements

*I*,

*ϵ*, where

*I*is the unit element and

*ϵ*

^{2}=

*I. z*is called a hypercomplex number. A function

*f*(

*z*) =

*P*(

*x, y*) +

*ϵQ*(

*x, y*) will be differentiable in

*z*if

## 3 Interlude: Meanderings — UFT in the late 1930s and the 1940s

Prior to a discussion of the main research groups concerned with Einstein-Schrödinger theories, some approaches using the ideas of Kaluza and Klein for a unified field theory, or aspiring to bind together quantum theory and gravitation are discussed.

### 3.1 Projective and conformal relativity theory

*x*

^{1}, …

*x*

^{4}are coordinates of space-time,

*x*

^{0}is an additional parameter (a gauge variable) and

*N*a constant named “index”.

^{40}

*x*

^{0}transforms as

*x*′

^{0}=

*x*

^{0}+ log

*ρ*(

*x*

^{α}). The auxiliary 5-dimensional space appearing has no physical significance. A projective symmetric metric

*G*

_{αβ}of index 2

*N*was given by

*G*

_{αβ}= Φ

^{2}

_{γαβ}where Φ is an arbitrary projective scalar of index

*N*. In addition, a third symmetric tensor

*g*

_{αβ}=

*γ*

_{αβ}−

*ϕ*

_{α}

*ϕ*

_{β}, the gravitational metric, appeared. Here,

*ϕ*

_{α}:=

*γ*

_{α0}is a projective vector. Likewise, the Levi-Civita connections \(\Pi _{\alpha \beta}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,\delta}\), \(\Gamma _{\alpha \beta}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,\delta}\) with \(\Pi _{\alpha \beta}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\delta}({G_{\sigma \tau}}) = \Gamma _{\alpha \beta}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\delta}({\gamma _{\sigma \tau}}) + N(\delta _\alpha ^\delta {\Phi _\beta} + \delta _\beta ^\delta {\Phi _\alpha} - {\gamma _{\alpha \beta}}{\Phi ^\delta})\) with \({\Phi _\alpha} = {1 \over N}{{\partial \,{\rm{log}}\,\Phi} \over {\partial {x^\alpha}}}\) and Φ

^{δ}=

*γ*

^{δσ}Φ

_{σ}were used. For arbitrary index

*N*, the field equations were derived from the curvature scalar

*P*calculated from the connection \(\Pi _{\alpha \beta}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,\delta}({G_{\sigma \tau}})\). One equation could be written in the form of a wave equation:

*R*is the curvature scalar calculated from

*g*

_{ij}. Veblen & Hoffmann concluded that: “The use of projective tensors and projective geometry in relativity theory therefore seems to make it possible to bring wave mechanics into the relativity scheme” ([671], abstract). How Planck’s constant might be brought in, is left in the dark.

During the 1940s, meson physics became fashionable. Of course, the overwhelming amount of this research happened in connection with nuclear and elementary particle theory, outside of UFT, but sometimes also in classical field theory. Cf. the papers by F. J. Belinfante on the meson field, in which he used the undor-formalism^{41} [16, 15]. In his doctoral thesis of 1941, “Projective theory of meson fields and electromagnetic properties of atomic nuclei” suggested by L. Rosenfeld, Abraham Pais in Utrecht kept away from UFT and calculated the projective energy momentum tensor of an arbitrary field. Although citing the paper of Veblen and Hoffmann, in projective theory he followed the formalism of Pauli; in his application to the Dirac spinor-field, he used Belinfantes undors [466]. After this paper, he examined which of Kemmer’s five types of meson fields were “in accordance with the requirements of projective relativity” ([467], p. 268).

*θ*

_{α}was defined by Hoffmann via:

*θ*

_{α}=

*ϕ*

_{α}− Φ

_{α}with

*ϕ*

_{α}=

*γ*

_{0α}and Φ

_{α}given above. Its space-time components

*θ*

_{j}form an affine vector from which the vector meson field tensor \({\theta _{ij}} = {1 \over 2}({{\partial {\theta _i}} \over {\partial {x^j}}} - {{\partial {\theta _j}} \over {\partial {x^i}}})\) follows. The theory again contained three Riemannian curvature tensors (scalars). By skipping all calculations, we arrive at the affine form of Hoffmann’s field equations

*N*

^{2}

*g*

^{ij}, these are the classical (i.e. unquantized) field equations for a vector meson and gravitational field in the general theory of relativity” ([278], p. 464). We could name them as well “Einstein-meson” equations in analogy to “Einstein-Maxwell” equations: no unification of both field had been reached. Also, no scalar meson field and the electromagnetic field were present in the theory.

*similarity geometry*[279].

^{42}It turned out that a 6-dimensional auxiliary space was needed. We shall denote the coordinates in this

*R*

^{6}by

*A, B*= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. The components of a similarity tensor are \(S_{\sigma \ldots \tau}^{\alpha \ldots \beta} = {\rm{exp((}}p - q)N{x^0})f_{\sigma \ldots \tau}^{\alpha \ldots \beta}({x^\alpha})\), where

*p, q*are the number of covariant and contravariant coordinate indices while

*N*again is named the index of the tensor. In place of the transformations in projective geometry, now

*S*

_{AB}in

*R*

^{6}was given the role of metric; the assumptions

*S*

_{05}= 0, and \({{{S_{55}}} \over {{S_{00}}}}\) independent of

*x*

^{α}reduced the number of free functions. The definitions \({S_{AB}}: = {{{S_{AB}}} \over {{S_{00}}}}\) and

*γ*

_{AB}:=

*s*

_{AB}−

*s*

_{A5}

*s*

_{B5}/

*s*

_{55},

*γ*

_{05}= 0,

*γ*

_{00}= 1 led back to the former vector meson field via

*γ*

_{j0}and to a vector in

*R*

^{6}\({\psi _A}: = {{{s_{A5}}} \over {\sqrt {{s_{55}}}}}\) with

*ψ*

_{0}= 0,

*ψ*

_{5}independent of

*x*

^{α}and containing the electromagnetic 4-vector

*ψ*

_{j}. To abreviate the story, Hoffmann’s final field equations in space-time were:

#### 3.1.1 Geometrical approach

^{43}who in physics re-applied projective geometry (cf. Section 2.1.3.3 of Part I) by showing that the transformation group

*G*

_{5}of the 4-potential

*A*

_{k}in electrodynamics, composed of the gauge transformations

*X*

^{0},

*X*

^{1}, …,

*X*

^{4}[316]:

*α*on the r.h.s.).

^{44}Equivalently, the new coordinates

*X′*

^{α}are homogeneous functions of degree 1 of the old

*X*

^{α}and transform like a vector:

*x*

^{i}of space-time, alternatively we may write

*x*

^{i}=

*f*

^{i}(

*X*

_{0}, …,

*X*

^{4}) or \({{\partial {x^i}} \over {\partial {x^\rho}}}{X^\rho} = 0\). Jordan defined projector-components \(P_{{\alpha _1}, \ldots, {\alpha _m}}^{{\beta _1}, \ldots, {\beta _n}}\) to transform under (106) like tensor-components \(T_{{\alpha _{1, \ldots,}}{\alpha _m}}^{{\beta _{1, \ldots,}}{\beta _n}}\) which are homogeneous functions of degree (

*n*−

*m*) in the

*X*

^{ρ}. Thus,

*X*

^{ρ}itself is a projector just as the Minkowski (Euclidean) metric

*g*

_{αβ}of

*V*

_{5}with the invariant:

*V*

_{5}. The formalism is described in papers and his book [317, 319, 320]; a detailed presentation is given by G. Ludwig [384]. More generally, if

*V*

_{5}is provided with a non-flat metric

*g*

_{rs}, the curvature scalar plays a prominent role in the derivation of the field equations within projective relativity. Ludwig also introduced arbitrary matter fields. At first, his Lagrangian for a scalar matter field

*ψ*within projective geometry was [383]

*ψ*was replaced by

*J*([384], p. 57):

*U*(

*J*),

*V(J*),

*W*(

*J*) are arbitrary functions. As can be seen from (110), the 5-dimensional curvature scalar used by Jordan and by Thiry (cf. the next Section 3.1.2) follows as the subcase

*U*(

*J*) =

*J*

^{−1/2},

*W*(

*J*) =

*V*(

*J*) = 0 of the general expression (111). Ludwig, at the time of writing the preface to his book, e.g., in May 1951, seemingly did not know of Thiry’s paper of 1948 [604] nor of his PhD thesis published also in 1951: in his bibliography Thiry’s name and paper are missing.

^{45}He felt deceived:

“The deception consists in the belief that by the projective form, i.e., the homogeneous coordinates, the shortcomings of Kaluza’s formulation have been repaired, and that one has achieved something beyond Kaluza. At the time, in 1933, I did not know explicitly the transition from Kaluza to the projective form (as in [20]); it is too simple and banal to the effect that the factual contents of both equivalent formulations could be somehow different.” (letter of W. P. to P. Jordan, [490], p. 735):

^{46}

#### 3.1.2 Physical approach: Scalar-tensor theory

^{47}Cosmological considerations related to the origin of stars seem to have played the major role for the building of a theory by P. Jordan in which the gravitational constant \(\kappa = {{8\pi G} \over {{c^2}}}\) is thought to be varying in (cosmological) time and thus replaced by a scalar function [316]

^{48}. The theory nicely fit with Dirac’s “large number hypothesis” [122, 123]. The fifteenth field variable in Kaluza’s theory was identified by Jordan with this function, or in projective relativity, with the scalar:

*J*:=

*g*

_{αβ}

*X*

^{α}

*X*

^{β}by setting \(J = {{2\kappa} \over {{c^2}}}(\alpha, \beta = 0,1, \ldots 4)\) (

*α*,

*β*= 0, 1, …, 4) [321]. In space-time, the field equations for the gravitational field

*g*

_{ij}, the electromagnetic 4-potential

*A*

_{k}=

*g*

_{4k}, and the

*g*

_{44}-variable

*κ*were derived by Jordan and Müller

^{49}to be:

*G*

_{ik}. P. G. Bergmann, in a paper submitted in August 1946 but published only in January of 1948, reported that work on a theory with a fifteenth field variable had been going on in Princeton:

“Professor Einstein and the present author had worked on that same idea several years earlier, but had finally rejected it and not published the abortive event” ([21], p. 255).

*five*dimensions [318]. In this paper, Jordan also made a general comment on attempts within unitary field theory of the Einstein-Schrödinger-type to embed corpuscular matter into classical field theory (cf. chapter 6 with Section 6.1.1 below):

“The problem of the structure of matter can only be attacked as a problem

in quantum mechanics; nevertheless, investigations of the singularities of solutions of the field equations retainconsiderableimportance in this framework. […] thewave functionsof matter must be taken into account. Whether this program can be carried through, and to which extent, in the sense of an extension of geometry (to which Schrödinger’s ideas related to the meson field seem to provide an important beginning) is such a widespread question […]”.^{50}([318], p. 205).

*η*= 1. One of those responding to this book was M. Fierz in Basel [195]. Before publication, he had corresponded with W. Pauli, sent him first versions of the paper and eventually received Pauli’s placet; cf. the letter of Pauli to Fierz of 2 June 1956 in [492], p. 578. In the second edition of his book, Jordan also commented on a difficulty of his theory pointed out by W. Pauli: instead of

*g*

_{ik}equally well

*ϕ*(

*x*)

*g*

_{ik}with arbitrary function

*ϕ*could serve as a metric.

^{51}This conformal invariance of the theory is preserved in the case that an electromagnetic field forms the matter tensor. A problem for the interpretation of mathematical objects as physical variables results: by a suitable choice of the conformal factor

*ϕ*, a “constant” gravitational coupling function could be reached, again. In his paper, M. Fierz suggested to either couple Jordan’s gravitational theory to point particles or to a (quantum-) Klein-Gordon field in order to remove the difficulty. Fierz also claimed that Jordan had overlooked a physical effect. According to him, a dielectricity “constant” of the vacuum could be introduced \({\epsilon _0} = {\kappa ^{1 + {1 \over \eta}}} = {J^{1 + \eta}}\) from looking at Jordan’s field equations. His Lagrangian corresponded to \(\kappa (R - \varsigma {{\kappa {,_r}{\kappa ^{,r}}} \over {{\kappa ^2}}}) - {{{\epsilon _0}} \over {{c^2}}}{F_{rs}}{F^{rs}}\) with

*J*

^{η}=

*κ*. On the other hand, in the MKSA system of physical units, the fine-structure constant is \(\alpha = {{{e^2}} \over {\hbar c{\epsilon _0}}}\). Thus, the fine-structure constant would depend on

*κ*.

“Assumed that

κbe variable in cosmic spaces, then this variability must show up in the redshift of light radiated from distant stars.” ([195], p. 134)^{52}

Because this had not been observed, Fierz concluded that *κ* = −1. Both, Pauli and Fierz gave a low rating to Jordan’s theory^{53}

*before*P. Jordan, and without alluding to Kaluza or Pauli’s projective formulation.

^{54}Also, in 1949, Scherrer had suggested a more general Lagrangian [532]:

*ψ*is considered to be a scalar matter field. He had advised a student, K. Fink, to work on the Lagrangian \({\mathcal L} = (R + 2\omega {g^{rs}}{{\partial \psi} \over {\partial {x^r}}}{{\partial \psi} \over {\partial {x^s}}})\sqrt {- g}\) [198]. The ensuing field equations correspond to those following from Jordan’s Lagrangian if his parameter

*η*= 0 ([319] p. 140). Exact solutions in the static, spherically symmetric case and for a homogeneous and isotropic cosmological model were published in 1951 almost simultaneously by Fink (

*η*= 0) and Heckmann, Jordan & Fricke (

*η*= 1) [243].

*Helvetica Physica Acta*but apparently sent him only a reprint of a preliminary short note [534]. Pauli was loath to get involved and asked the editor of this journal, the very same M. Fierz, what the most appropriate answer to Scherrer could be. He also commented:

“Because according to my opinion all “unified field theories” are based on dubious ideas — in particular it is a typically suspect idea of the great masters Einstein and Schrödinger to add up the symmetric and antisymmetric parts of a tensor — I have to pose the question […].” (W. Pauli to M. Fierz, 15 Dec. 1953) ([491], p. 390–391)

^{55}

Scherrer’s paper eventually was published in *Zeitschrift für Physik* [535]. In fact, he proposed a unified field theory based on linear forms, not on a quadratic form such as it is used in general relativity or Einstein-Schrödinger UFT. His notation for differential forms and tangent vectors living in two reference systems is non-standard. As his most important achievement he regarded “the absolutely invariant and at the same time locally exact conservation laws.” In his correspondence with Fierz, Pauli expressed his lack of understanding: “What he means with this, I do not know, because all generally relativistic field theories abound with energy laws” ([491], p. 403). H. T. Flint wrote a comment in which he claimed to have shown that Scherrer’s theory is kin to Einstein’s teleparallelism theory [213]. For studies of Kaluza’s theory in Paris (Jordan-Thiry theory) cf. Section 11.1.

### 3.2 Continued studies of Kaluza-Klein theory in Princeton, and elsewhere

^{56}, within a calculus using 5-component tensorial objects in space-time, had studied Kaluza’s approach to a unification of gravitation and electromagnetism in a formal 5-dimensional space with Lorentz-signature. A decade later, Einstein returned to this topic in collaboration with his assistant Peter Bergmann [167, 166]. The last two chapters of Bergmann’s book on relativity theory are devoted to Kaluza’s theory and its generalization ([20]. Einstein wrote a foreword, in which he did not comment on “Kaluza’s unified field theory” as the theory is listed in the book’s index. He admitted that general relativity “[…] has contributed little to atomic physics and our understanding of quantum phenomena.” He hoped, however, that some of its features as were “general covariance of the laws of nature and their nonlinearity” could contribute to “overcome the difficulties encountered at present in the theory of atomic and nuclear processes” ([20] p. V). Two years before Bergmann’s book appeared, Einstein already had made up his mind against the five-dimensional approach:

“The striving for most possible simplicity of the foundations of the theory has prompted several attempts at joining the gravitational field and the electromagnetic field from a unitary, formal point of view. Here, in particular, the five-dimensional theory of Kaluza and Klein must be mentioned. Yet, after careful consideration of this possibility, I think it more proper to accept the mentioned lack of inner unity, because it seems to me that the embodiment of the hypotheses underlying the five-dimensional theory contains no less arbitrariness than the original theory.”

^{57}

Nonetheless, in their new approach, Einstein and Bergmann claimed to ascribe “physical reality to the fifth dimension whereas in Kaluza’s theory this fifth dimension was introduced only in order to obtain new components of the metric tensor representing the electromagnetic field” ([167], p. 683). Using ideas of O. Klein, this five-dimensional space was seen by them essentially as a four-dimensional one with a small periodical strip or a tube in the additional spacelike dimension affixed. The 4-dimensional metric then is periodic in the additional coordinate *x*^{4}.^{58} With the fifth dimension being compact, this lessened the need for a physical interpretation of its empirical meaning. Now, the authors partially removed Kaluza’s ‘cylinder condition’ *g*_{αβ,4} = 0 (cf. Section 4.2 of Part I, Eq. (109)): they set *g*_{ik,4} = 0, but assumed (*g*_{i4,4} = 0 and *g*_{44} = 1: the electrodynamic 4-potential remains independent of *x*^{4}. Due to the restriction of the covariance group (cf. Section 4.2, Part I, Eq. (112)), in space-time many more possibilities for setting up a variational principle than the curvature scalar of 5-dimensional space exist: besides the 4-dimensional curvature scalar *R*, Einstein & Bergmann list three further quadratic invariants: *A*_{rs}*A*^{rs}, *g*^{rs}_{,4}*g*_{rs,4}, (*g*^{rs}*g*_{rs,4})^{2} where *A*_{rs}:= *∂*_{s}*A*_{r} − *∂*_{r}*A*_{s}. The ensuing field equations for the fourteen variables *g*_{ik} and *A*_{k} contain two new free parameters besides the gravitational and cosmological constants. Scalar-tensor theory is excluded due to the restrictions introduced by the authors. Except for the addition of some new technical concepts (p-tensors, p-differentiation) and the inclusion of projective geometry, Bergmann’s treatment of Kaluza’s idea in his book did not advance the field.

The mathematicians K. Yano and G. Vranceanu showed that Einstein’s and Bergmann’s generalization may be treated as part of the non-holonomic UFT proposed by them [713, 681]. Vranceanu considered space-time to be a “non-holonomic” totally geodesic hypersurface in a 5-dimensional space *V*^{5}, i.e., the hypersurface cannot be generated by the set of tangent spaces in each point. Besides the metric of space-time *ds*^{2} = *g*_{ab}*dx*^{a}*dx*^{b}, (*a*, *b* = 1, 2, 3, 4), a non-integrable differential form *ds*^{5} = *dx*^{5} − *ϕ*_{a}*dx*^{a} defining the hypersurface was introduced together with the additional assumption \({\partial \over {\partial {x^5}}}{\phi _a} = 0\). The path of a particle with charge *e*, mass *m*_{0} and 5-vector *v*^{A}, (*A* = 1, …, 5) was chosen to be a geodesic tangent to the non-holonomic hypersurface. Thus \(d{\upsilon ^5}\overset i = 0\), and Vranceanu then took \({\upsilon ^5} = {e \over {{m_0}}}\). The electromagnetic field was defined as *F*_{ab} = ½(*ϕ*_{b,a} − *ϕ*_{a,b}). Both Einstein’s and Maxwell’s equations followed, separately, with the energy-momentum tensor of matter as possible source of the gravitational field equations: “One can also assume that the energy tensor *T*_{ab} be the sum of two tensors one of which is due to the electromagnetic field […]”. ([681], p. 525).^{59} His interpretation of the null geodesics which turn out to be independent of the electromagnetic field is in the spirit of the time: “This amounts to suppose for light, or as well for the photon, that its charge be null and its mass *m*_{0} be different from zero, a fact which is in accord with the hypothesis of Louis de Broglie (Une nouvelle conception de la lumière; Hermann, Paris 1934).” ([681], p. 524)^{60} More than a decade later, K. Yano and M. Ohgane generalized the non-holonomic UFT to arbitray dimension: *n*-dimensional space is a non-holonomic hypersurface of (*n* + 1)-dimensional Riemannian space. It is shown that the theory “[…] seems to contain all the geometries appearing in the five-dimensional unified field theories proposed in the past and to suggest a natural generalization of the six-dimensional unified field theories proposed by B. Hoffmann, J. Podolanski, and one of the present authors” ([714], pp. 318, 325–326). They listed the theories by Kaluza-Klein, Veblen-Hoffmann, Einstein-Mayer, Schouten-Dantzig, Vranceanu and Yano; cf. also Sections 3.1 and 11.2.1.

B. Hoffmann derived the geodesic equations of a magnetic monopole in the framework of a 6-dimensional theory [277]; cf. Section 11.2.1. The one who really made progress, although unintentionally and unnoticed at the time, was O. Klein who extended Abelian gauge theory for a particular non-Abelian group, which almost corresponds to SU(2) gauge theory [333]. For a detailed discussion of Klein’s contribution cf. [237].

“I still work as passionately even though most of my intellectual children, in a very young age, end in the graveyard of disappointed hopes”. ([560], p. 552)

^{61}

“After twenty years of vain searching, this year now I have found a promising field theory which is a quite natural sequel to the relativistic gravitational theory. It is in line with Kaluza’s idea about the essence of the electromagnetic field.” ([163], p. 321)

^{62}

### 3.3 Non-local fields

#### 3.3.1 Bi-vectors; generalized teleparallel geometry

In 1943, Einstein had come to the conclusion that the failure of “finding a unified theory of the physical field by some generalization of the relativistic theory of gravitation” seemed to require “a decisive modification of the fundamental concepts” ([165], p. 1). He wanted to keep the four-dimensional space-time continuum and the diffeomorphism group as the covariance group, but wished to replace the Riemannian metric by a generalized concept. Together with the assistant at the Institute for Advanced Studies, Valentine Bargmann^{63}, he set out to develop a new scheme involving “bi-vector fields”. Unlike the concept of a bi-vector used by Schouten in 1924 ([537], p. 17) and ever since in the literature, i.e., for the name of a special antisymmetric tensor, in the definition by Einstein and Bargmann the concept meant a tensor depending on the coordinates of *two* points in space-time, an object which would be called “bi-local” or “non-local”, nowadays. The two points, alternatively, could be imagined to lie in the same manifold (“single space”), or in two different spaces (“double space”). In the latter case, the coordinate transformations for each point are independent.

*first order*derivatives like the tensorial quantity: \({\gamma _{\underset 1 i \underset 2 j \underset 2 k}}: = {g_{\underset 1 i \underset 2 j,\underset 2 k}} - {g_{\underset 1 i \underset 2 k, \underset 2 j}}\). In order to cut down on this wealth, a new operation called “rimming” was introduced which correlated a new “bi-vector” \({\overset * g_{\underset \alpha i \underset \beta k}}\) with \({g_{\underset \alpha i \underset \beta k}}\) by multiplying it from left and right by tensors of full rank \({\omega _{\underset \alpha i}}^{\overset \kappa \alpha}\), \({\omega _{\underset \beta i}}^{\overset \kappa \beta}\) where each is taken from one of the two manifolds (now Greek indices refer to the two different points)

^{64}:

*g*were considered as different representations of the same field. The rimming of a contravariant “bi-vector” was done similarly by multiplying from the left with \(\prime{\sigma _{\underset \beta i}}^{\overset \kappa \beta}\) and from the right with tensors \({\sigma _{\underset \alpha i}}^{\overset \kappa \alpha}\). In order that (118), (119) remain invariant under rimming, the relations \(_\alpha ^\sigma = _\alpha ^{{\omega ^{- 1}}},{\,\prime}_\alpha ^\sigma = {{(\prime}\underset \alpha \omega)^{- 1}},\), must hold. A comparison of (120) and (121) shows that a coordinate transformation can be combined with a rimming operation “in such a way that the bi-vector components remain invariant — i.e., behave like scalars under the resultant transformation” ([165], p. 4).

*δ*

_{ik}such that the corresponding space-time is flat. The trace on (i,j) in (122) leads to a scalar equation:

*α*,

*β*) coincide. By a suitable rimming operation \({g_{\underset \alpha i \underset \alpha k}}={\eta _{ik}}\) was reached where

*η*

_{ik}is the matrix diag (1, −1, −1, −1). The rimming operations were performed with representations of the Lorentz group. Also, mixed bi-vectors \({g^{\overset i \alpha}}_{\underset \beta k} = {\eta ^{il}}{g_{\underset \alpha l \underset \beta k}}\) were introduced and a tensorial three-point equation had to be satisfied:

*α*and

*β*.

^{65}Two conditions are to be fulfilled: the displacement of a vector from

*α*to

*β*and back does not change it, and “the scalar product of a covariant and a contravariant vector is invariant with respect to the affine connection”. This led to

*distant*affine connection” was Schrödinger in Dublin. In his paper, he set out to

“[…] show how the new geometrical structure emerges, by generalization, from the one that was at the basis of Einstein’s ‘Distant Parallelism’ (Fernparallelismus), and consisted in the natural union of an integrable (but in general non-symmetric) infinitesimal affine connection and a (in general not flat) Riemannian metric” ([550], p. 143).

*a*,

*b*, … for the number of the leg, and Greek space-time indices such that \({h_{\nu a}}\,h_b^\nu = {\delta _{ab}}\). By comparing the parallel displacement of a 4-vector \(\delta {A^\nu} = - \Delta _{\rho \sigma}^{\,\,\nu}\;{A^\rho}\,d{x^\sigma}\) with \({A^{\overset i \beta}} = {g^{\overset i \beta}}_{\underset \alpha k}{A^{\overset k \alpha}}\) he arrived at his interpretation of \({g^{\overset i \beta}}_{\underset \alpha k}\) as a connection. As the relation between the affine connection — which he called “infinitesimal connection” — and the bi-vector connection, named “distant connection”, he took:

*α*via →

*β*→

*γ*back to the starting point

*α*. This is analogous to parallel transfer around a triangle formed by the points

*α*,

*β*,

*γ*; the change of a vector thus transported along the closed circuit is proportional to the curvature tensor, if it is skew symmetric also in the first pair of indices ([399], pp. 224–225). This analogy was carried on further; a formula corresponding to (59) of Section 2.3.1 was derived, with the symmetric affine connection replaced by the Christoffel symbols and torsion by contorsion, i.e., by

*S*

_{kli}+

*S*

_{lik}+

*S*

_{kil}. Both cases in (128) were treated and tentative field equations including a cosmological constant written down. The paper ended with the sentence: “Are these equations likely to give an appropriate description of physical fields?” As is known now, the answer to this question should have been “no”. Thus, in this context, Schrödinger’s papers also did not bring progress for UFT; nevertheless, they helped to make Einstein’s papers more readable. The subject was also taken up by a Romanian mathematician, M. Haimovici (1906–1973), who instead introduced a space of point-couples, introduced axioms for defining a connection there, and established a relation to work by E. Cartan [239].

#### 3.3.2 From Born’s principle of reciprocity to Yukawa’s non-local field theory

Much earlier, Max Born had followed a different if not entirely unrelated conceptual course: in 1938, he had introduced a “principle of reciprocity”: “[…] each general law on the *x*-space has an ‘inverse image’ in the *p*-space, in the first instance the laws of relativity” ([38], p. 327). In this note in Nature, Born added a Lorentzian metric *g*_{ab} (*p*) *dp*^{a}*dp*^{b} in momentum space satisfying as well the corresponding Einstein field equations (cf. Section 4.2). Infeld in Princeton wanted to get some further information about this principle of reciprocity from Born, who was afraid that his idea be seized by the “terribly clever people over there”. However, in his letter to Einstein of 11 April 1938, he described his joint work with Klaus Fuchs: to derive a “super-mechanics” with an 8-dimensional metric in phase space. A new fundamental (“natural”) constant appeared leading to both an absolute length and an absolute momentum ([168], pp. 182–184). In a way, Born’s formalism came near to Einstein’s “double space” in his bi-vector theory.

*x*

_{μ}alone, but may depend on

*p*

_{μ}also. […] The generalized field can include not only the electromagnetic field and various types of meson fields but also the so-called pair-fields such as the meson pair field and the electron-neutrino field” ([716], p. 211–212). It seems that he saw his non-local field theory as introducing new degrees of freedom and leading a step away from the point-particle concept: a possibility for avoiding infinite self-energies. During his stay at the Princeton Institute for Advanced Study (PIAS) in 1948/49, Yukawa must have learned about Born’s reciprocity principle and work around it [45, 46, 47], refered to it (cf. [718]) and embarked on his quantum-theory of non-local fields. In general, his theory now corresponded to the “single space” of Einstein and Bargmann: operators

*U*(

*X*

_{μ},

*r*

_{μ}) depended on “two sets of real variables” (in the same space) [719, 720, 721]. According to Yukawa: “

*X*

_{μ}coincide with the ordinary coordinates

*x*

_{μ}in the limit of local field, so that the dependence on

*X*

_{μ}describes the asymptotic behavior and the dependence on

*r*

_{μ}characterizes the internal structure or inertial motion” ([722], p. 3). At this time, both Yukawa and Einstein lived in Princeton and got to know each other. It can reasonably be doubted, though, that they took note of each other’s scientific work except superficially. In 1947, Yukawa possibly had not the least inkling of the Einstein-Bargmann paper of 1944. Of course, Bargmann in Princeton then could have told him. In the special issue of

*Review of Modern Physics*for Einstein’s 70th birthday in 1949, Max Born in Edinburgh dedicated an article about his reciprocity principle to Einstein:

“The theory of elementary particles which I propose in the following pages is based on the current conceptions of quantum mechanics and differs widely from the ideas which Einstein himself has developed in regard to this problem. […] It can be interpreted as a rational generalization of his (“special”) theory of relativity.” ([40], p. 463)

“Probably we need a broader background (such as the five-dimensional space or the quantized phase space) for field theory in order to cope with these problems, although it is premature to say anything definite in this connection.” ([717], p.479)

The laws of nature are invariant not only with regard to the relativistic transformations but also with regard to the substitutions

x^{α}→p_{α},p_{α}→ −x^{α}[…]. All amounts to replace your fundamental invariantx^{α}x_{α}=Rby the symmetrical quantityS=R+PwhereP=p^{α}p_{α}.Sis an operator, the integer eigenvalues of which are the distances […].” ([168], p. 242.)^{66}

This story shows that a very loose kinship existed between the Einstein-Bargmann “bi-vector” method and Yukawa’s non-local field theory with Born’s reciprocity theory in the middle. Although some of those involved were in direct personal contact, no concrete evidence for a conscious transfer of ideas could be established.

## 4 Unified Field Theory and Quantum Mechanics

“The classical field theory of Einstein — electromagnetic and gravitational together — give us a satisfactory explanation of all large-scale physical phenomena. […] But they fail completely to describe the behavior of individual atoms and particles. To understand the small-scale side of physics, physicists had to invent quantum mechanics and the idea of the quantum field.” ([137], p. 60)

Nevertheless, there were other physicists like Einstein for whom no divide between classical and quantum field existed, in principle.

### 4.1 The impact of Schrödinger’s and Dirac’s equations

^{67}whom we briefly met in Section 7.1 of Part I, was one of those who wanted to incorporate quantum theory into a relativistic field theory for gravitation and electrodynamics. In Flint’s imagination, the content of quantum mechanics was greatly condensed: it already would have been reproduced by the generation of a suitable relativistic wave equation for the wave function

*ψ*as a geometric object in an appropriate geometry. This might be taken as an unfortunate consequence of the successes of Schrödinger’s wave theory. In the first paper of a series of three, Flint started with a 5-dimensional curved space with metric

*γ*

_{ij}, (

*i, j*= 0, 1, …, 4) and an asymmetric connection:

*ψ*was brought in through vector torsion:

*γ*

_{ij;l}= 0. In the next step, the Ricci-scalar of the 5-dimensional space is calculated. Due to (134), it contained the 5-dimensional wave operator. Up to here, an ensuing theory for the scalar field

*ψ*could be imagined; so far nothing points to quantum mechanics nor to particles. By using de Broglie’s idea that the paths of massive and massless particles be given by geodesics in 5-dimensional space and O. Klein’s relation between the 5th component of momentum and electric charge, Flint was led to equate the curvature scalar to a constant containing charge, mass and Planck’s constant:

*G*the Newtonian gravitational constant. The linear one-particle wave equation thus obtained contains torsion, curvature, the electromagnetic field

*F*

_{ab}, (

*a, b*= 0, 1, …, 3) and a classical spin tensor

*A*

^{lm}. It is:

*R*is the 4-dimensional curvature scalar,

*H*=

*F*

_{ab}

*F*

^{ab}, and

*ϕ*

_{a}the electromagnetic 4-potential. The particle carries charge

*e*and mass

*m*. While Flint stated that “[…] the generalized curvature, is determined by the mass and charge of the particle situated at the point where the curvature is measured” ([204], p. 420), the meaning of (136) by no means is as trivial as claimed. A solution

*ψ*determines part of torsion (cf. (134), but torsion is needed to solve (136); we could write

*R*=

*R*(

*ψ*), \(\Gamma _{r\;s}^{\;\;\;l} = \Gamma _{r\;s}^{\;\;\;l}(\psi)\). Hence, (136) is a highly complicated equation.

*α*

_{i}:

*γ*

_{ij}. Both formulations, with and without matrices were said “to be in harmony”. In this second paper, Dirac’s equation is given the expression

*α*

^{s}Π

_{s}

*ψ*= 0 with \({\rm{I}}{{\rm{I}}_j} = {p_j} + {e \over c}{\phi _j}\), \({p_j} = {\hbar \over i}{\partial \over {\partial {x^j}}}\),

*ϕ*

_{5}= 0. \({\partial \over {\partial {x^5}}}\) is replaced by \({{imc} \over \hbar}\). In place of (134) now

^{68}Dirac’s equation then is generalized to \({\alpha ^r}{{\partial \psi} \over {\partial {x^r}}} + {i \over \hbar}{\rm{I}}{{\rm{I}}_s}{\alpha ^s}\psi = 0\). The resulting wave equation of second order contains terms which could not be given a physical interpretation by Flint.

*dσ*=

*α*

_{j}

*dx*

^{j}Fock and Ivanenko had presented six years before without referring to them [215].

*ψ*now is taken to be a column (

*ψ*

_{1},

*ψ*

_{2}, …,

*ψ*

_{5})

^{t}and the matrix length of a vector

*A*

^{k}defined to be

*L*:=

*A*

^{r}

*α*

_{r}

*ψ*such that

*L*

^{2}= (

*ψ*ψ*)

*γ*

^{rs}

*A*

_{r}

*A*

_{s}with

*ψ**being the conjugate to

*ψ*. Flint seemed undecided about how to interpret

*ψ*ψ*. On the one hand, he said that “[…]

*ψ*ψ*has been interpreted as the density of matter” ([206], p. 439), on the other he apparently had taken note of the Kopenhagen interpretation of quantum mechanics (without sharing it) when writing:

“In connection with the equation of the electron path we have the suggestion that

ψ*ψrespond to the certainty of finding the electron on the track” ([206], same page).

His conclusion, i.e., that quantum phenomena correspond to geometrical conceptions, and that the complete geometrical scheme includes quantum theory, gravitation, and electromagnetism could not hide that all he had achieved was to build a set of classical relativistic wave equations decorated with an *ħ*. In a further paper of 1938, in the same spirit, Flint arrived at a geometrical “quantum law” built after the vanishing of the curvature scalar from which he obtained the Dirac equation in an external electrical field [207].

During the second world war, Flint refined his research without changing his basic assumption [208, 209, 210], i.e., “that the fundamental equation of the quantum theory, which is the quantum equation for an electron in a gravitational and electromagnetic field, can be developed by an appeal to simple geometric ideas.” His applications to “field theories of the electron, positron and meson” [211] and to “nuclear field theories” [212] follow the same line. No progress, either for the understanding of quantum mechanics nor for the construction of a unified field theory, can be discovered. Flint’s work was not helped by contributions of others [6, 3]. After World War II, Flint continued his ideas with a collaborator [214]; in the meantime he had observed that Mimura also had introduced matrix length in 1935. As in a previous paper, he used the method by which Weyl had derived his first gauge theory combining gravitation and electromagnetism. Strangely enough, Weyl’s later main success, the re-direction of his idea of gauging to quantum mechanics was not mentioned by Flint although he was up to show that “equations of the form of Dirac’s equation can be regarded as gauge-equations” ([214], p. 260). Under parallel transport, the matrix length *L* of a vector *A*_{k} is assumed to change by *dL* = Θ*R*_{r}*α*^{s}*A*_{s}*ψ dx*^{r}, where *R*_{r} is an operator (a matrix) corresponding to the 5-vector *ϕ*_{k}. Flint still was deeply entrenched in classical notions when approaching the explanation of the electron’s rest mass: it should contain contributions from the electromagnetic and mesonic fields. The mathematician _{J}. A. Schouten conjectured that “[t]he investigations of H. T. Flint are perhaps in some way connected with conformal meson theory […]” ([539], p. 424).

That Flint was isolated from the physics mainstream may be concluded also from the fact that his papers are not cited in a standard presentation of relativistic wave-equations [84]. We dwelled on his research in order to illuminate the time lag in the absorption of new physics results among groups doing research, simultaneously. In this theme, we could have included the “tensor rear guard” (Fisher, Temple, etc.) who believed to be able to get around spinors.

### 4.2 Other approaches

*g*

_{ij}(

*x*

^{l}) in configuration and

*γ*

^{ij}(

*p*

^{n}) in momentum space [39]. As field equations in momentum space he postulated the Einstein field equations for a correspondingly calculated Ricci-tensor (as a function of momenta)

*P*

^{kl}(

*p*

^{r}):

*κ′*remained undetermined. Born was silent on the matter tensor. His applications of the formalism turned toward quantum electrodynamics, black body radiation and the kinetic theory of gases (of atoms). By choosing, in momentum space, the analogue to the Friedman cosmological solution with space sections of constant curvature, an upper limit

*b*for momentum ensued. The number of quantum states in volume elements

*V*of configuration space and in a volume element of momentum space turned out to be \(g{{{\pi ^2}V} \over {{h^3}}}b\) and had many consequences e.g., for Planck’s and Coulomb’s laws and for nuclear structure. The parameter b determined all deviations from previous laws: the Coulomb law for two particles became \({{{e_1}{e_2}} \over {r_{12}^2}}f(2{{{r_{12}}} \over \hbar}b)\) with the function \(f(x) = \int\nolimits_0^x {{J_0}(y)} \;dy\) and the Bessel function

*J*

_{0}; the Planck law for the energy density of black body radiation \(u(\nu, T) = {{8\pi h} \over {{c^3}}} - {{{\nu ^3}} \over {(\exp ({{h\nu} \over {kT}} - 1)(1 - {{(\nu \tau)}^2})}}\) with \(\tau = {h \over {bc}}\). Born fixed

*b*such that the classical electron radius \({r_0} = {\hbar \over b} = {{{e^2}} \over {m{c^2}}}\). The paper’s main result was a geometric foundation for the assumption of an upper limit for momentum — not a unification of quantum mechanics with anything else. Perhaps, Born had recycled an idea from his paper with Infeld, in which they had introduced an upper limit for the electrical field (cf. Section 5).

### 4.3 Wave geometry

A group of theoreticians at the Physical Institute of Hiroshima University in Japan in the second half of the 1930s intensively developed a program for a unified field theory of a new type with the intention of combining gravitation and quantum theory. Members of the group were Yositaka Mimura, Tôyomon Hosokawa, Kakutarô Morinaga, Takasi Sibata, Toranosuke Iwatsuki, Hyôitirô Takeno, and also Kyosi Sakuma, M. Urabe, K. Itimaru. The research came to a deadly halt when the first atom bomb detonated over Hiroshima, with the hypo-center of the explosion lying 1.5 km away from the Research Institute for Theoretical Physics.^{69} After the second world war, some progress was made by the survivors. The theory became simplified and was summarized in two reports of the 1960s [427, 428].

In an introductory paper by Mimura, the new approach was termed “wave geometry” [425]. His intention was to abandon the then accepted assumption that space-geometry underlying microscopic phenomena (like in elementary particle physics), be the same as used for macroscopic physics. Schrödinger had argued in this sense and was cited by Mimura [541]. Einstein’s original hope that space-time must not exist in the absence of matter, unfulfilled by general relativity, became revived on the level of “microscopic physics”: “[…] the microscopic space exists only when an elementary particle exists. In this sense, where there is no elementary particle, no ‘geometry’ exists” ([425], p. 101). Also “[…] according to our new theory, geometry in microscopic space differs radically from that of macroscopic […]” ([425], p. 106).^{70} “wave geometry” must not be considered as one specific theory but rather as the attempt for a theory expressing the claimed equivalence of geometry and physics.

*ψ*, a 4-component (Dirac) spinor; “distance” in microscopic space became defined as an eigenvalue of a linear distance operator. In order to find this operator, by following Dirac, a principle of linearization was applied:

*a*= 1, 2, 3, 4), and \(\overset 0 {{\gamma _i}}\) denoting the Dirac matrices. If

_{i}is an as yet undetermined 4-vector with matrix entries. It was expected that (144) describe the gravitational, electromagnetic and the matter field “in unified form not discriminating macroscopic and microscopic phenomena” ([427], p. 11). In 1929, (140) had also been suggested by Fock and Ivanenko [215], a paper mentioned briefly in Section 7.2 of Part I. As we have seen, at around the same year 1935, H. T. Flint had set up a similar unified theory as Mimura [206]. The theory of Mimura and Takeno was to be applied to the universe, to local irregularities (galaxies) in the universe and to the atom. Only the Einstein cosmos and de Sitter space-time were allowed as cosmological metrics. For the atom, a solution in a space-time with metric \(d{s^2} = {R^2}({(d{x^1})^2} + {\sin ^2}{x^1}{(d{x^2})^2}) + {{{R^2}} \over {{{({x^3})}^2}}}({(d{x^3})^2} + {(d{x^0})^2})\) was obtained and a wave function “which can be identified with the Dirac level of the hydrogen atom if the arbitrary functions and constants in the equation are chosen suitably” ([427], p. 66). With a particular choice of Σ

_{i}, (cf. [428], Eq. 4.15 on p. 4) the fundamental equation for

*ψ*was then determined to be the matrix equation:

*L*

_{i}are arbitrary vectors. In [428], a second fundamental equation was added:

*μ*. For complete integrability of (145), the Riemannian curvature tensor \(K_{klm}^i\) must vanish. Equation (145) reduces to

*∂*

_{i}

*ψ*= 0,

*g*

_{ij}=

*η*

_{ij}with the solution

*ψ*

_{a}= const., (

*a*= 0, 1, …, 3). This being too restrictive, (145) was weakened to (

*∂*

_{i}− Γ

_{i})

*ψ*= 0 for either

*ψ*

_{0}=

*ψ*

_{3}= 0 or

*ψ*

_{1}=

*ψ*

_{2}= 0 with the integrability conditions \({{\sqrt g} \over 2}{\epsilon _{lmrs}}K_{ij}^{\;\;\;rs} = \pm {K_{ijlm}}\), respectively. T. Sibata gave a solution of this equation expressing self-duality for weak fields [576]. He also set out to show that Born-Infeld theory follows from his approach to wave geometry in the case of vacuum electrodynamics [577]. In this paper, the condition of complete integrability for his version of (144) read as \({g \over 4}{\epsilon _{lmrs}}{\epsilon _{ijpq}}{K^{pqrs}} = \pm {K_{ijlm}}\).

In 1938, T. Hosokawa even had extended wave geometry to Finsler geometry and applied to Milne’s cosmological principle [287].

With its results obtained until 1945, wave geometry could not compete with quantum field theory. After the war, the vague hope was expressed that in a “supermicroscopic” space-time, elementary particle theory could be developed and that “the problem of internal space’ of elementary particles may be interwoven with some ‘hidden’ relations to the structure of *space-time*.” ([428], p. 41.) Clearly, the algebra of *γ*-matrices which is all what is behind the distance operator, was an insufficient substitute for the algebra of non-commuting observables in quantum field theory.

## 5 Born-Infeld Theory

*r*

_{0}could be described; its electric potential remained finite for \({r \over {{r_0}}} \ll 1\) [36]. The Lagrangian for the new electrodynamics was \(L = {1 \over {{a^2}}}\sqrt {1 + {a^2}({H^2} - {E^2})}\) with the constant a of dimension \({{r_0^2} \over e}\), where

*e*is the elementary electric charge and

*r*

_{0}the electron radius. In the limit

*a*→ 0 the Lagrangian of Maxwell’s theory reappeared: \({1 \over {{a^2}}} + {1 \over 2}({H^2} - {E^2})\). In the paper with Infeld, the Lagrangian is generalized in order to include the gravitational field:

*g*

_{(ij)}is the (Riemannian) metric and

*f*

_{ij}=

*f*

_{[ij ]}the electromagnetic field tensor;

*g*

_{ij}=

*g*

_{(ij)}+

*f*

_{ij}, formally is an asymmetric metric. The Lagrangian (147) can be expressed by the two invariants of Maxwell’s theory \(F\;: = {1 \over 2}{f_{mr}}{f_{ns}}{g^{mn}}{g^{rs}}\) and \(G\;: = {1 \over 4}{\epsilon ^{mnrs}}{f_{mn}}{f_{rs}} = = {f^{*rs}}{f_{rs}}\) as

*b*and named the “absolute field”. As was well known, many asymmetric energy-momentum tensors for the electromagnetic field could be formulated. Years later, St. Mavridès took up this problem and derived identities for the symmetric Minkowski tensor, the fields and inductions, independent of whether the relations between fields and inductions were linear or more general [410]. Xinh Nguyen Xua then showed that with the relations (150), all the various energy-momentum tensors can be derived from one such

*symmetric*tensor [711]. Born & Infeld chose

*r*

_{0}could be calculated numerically via \(2{{{e^2}} \over {{r_0}}}(\int\nolimits_0^\infty {(1 - {\textstyle{{{x^2}} \over {\sqrt {1 + {x^4}}}}})}\) to take the value \({r_0} = 1,2361{{{e^2}} \over {{m_0}{c^2}}}\) and thus b could also be determined. According to Born and Infeld: “The new field theory can be considered as a revival of the old idea of the electromagnetic origin of mass” Also, the existence of an absolute field as a “natural unit for all field components and the upper limit for a purely electric field” ([42], p. 451) had been assumed.

*g*

_{(ij)}+

*f*

_{ij}was concerned. Instead, in his letter of 21 December 1933 to Max Born ([488], p. 241), he suggested to take as a Lagrangian density \({\mathcal L} = \sqrt {- g} F(P)\) with Kaluza’s curvature scalar in 5 dimensions \(P = R + {k \over {2{c^2}}}{f_{rs}}{f^{rs}}\). “In particular, it is possible to set \(F(P) = \sqrt {1 + {1 \over {{\rm{const}}{\rm{.}}}}P}\), and therefore your electrodynamics is compatible with the projective view on the electromagnetic and gravitational field.”

^{71}But for Born, electrodynamics was in the focus. Three months after Pauli’s criticism, he wrote to Einstein in connection with his paper with Infeld:

“Possibly, you will not agree, because I do not include gravitation. This is a rather basic point, where I have a different view as you in your papers on unitary field theory. Hopefully, I soon will be able to finalize my idea on gravitation” ([168], p. 167).

^{72}

Around the same time as Pauli, B. Hoffmann who had left Princeton for the University of Rochester, had had the same idea. It was couched in the language of projective theory on which he had worked with O. Veblen (cf. Section 6.3.2 of Part I) and on his own [275].^{73} He suggested the Lagrangian \({\mathcal L} = (\sqrt {1 + B} - 1)\sqrt {- \gamma}\) where *γ*_{ij} is the 5-dimensional projective metric and *B* the projective curvature scalar. Due to *B* = *R* − *g*^{pr}*g*^{qs}*f*_{rq}*f*_{ps}, his Lagrangian corresponds to Kaluza’s. Born & Infeld had remarked that in order to include gravitation in their theory, only Einstein’s Lagrangian must be added to (148). Hoffmann now tried to obtain a static spherically symmetric solution for both theories with a non-vanishing electromagnetic field. In the augmented Born-Infeld Lagrangian, the Minkowski metric could be used as a special case. According to Hoffmann this was no longer possible for his Lagrangian because “the electromagnetic field exerts a gravitational influence” ([275], p. 364). As he could not find a solution to his complicated field equations, the “degree of modification of the electrostatic potential by its own gravitational field” could not be determined.

^{74}But Pauli had not changed his opinion; in connection with the scattering of light by light, he answered Heisenberg curtly: “I do not care about Born’s theory” ([488], p. 372). Ten years later, in his letter to Einstein of 10 October 1944 Born assessed his theory with some reservation ([168], p. 212):

“[…] I always had a lot of understanding for your good Jewish physics, and much amusement with it; however, I myself have produced it only once: the non-linear electrodynamics, and this is no particular success […].”

^{75}

Nevertheless, it had some influence on UFT; cf. Sections 6.1.3, 9.7, and 10.3.4.

Born and Infeld unsuccessfully tried to quantize their non-linear theory of the electromagnetic field by using the commutation rules of Heisenberg and Pauli for the field strenghts [43, 44]. They noticed that the theory could be presented differently according to whether the pairs \(\vec E,\;\vec B\), or \(\vec D, \vec H; \;\vec D, \vec B; \;\vec E, \vec H\) were chosen as independent variables. The authors took \(\vec D,\;\vec B\) in order to avoid “formal difficulties”. However, a perturbative approach by canonical quantization of either the field or the vector potential could not succeed because the interaction term in the Hamiltonian included higher powers of derivative terms.^{76}

*b*was set equal to one. Schrödinger showed that his formulation was “entirely equivalent to Born’s theory” and did not provide any further physical insight. Thus, Schrödinger’s paper gave a witty

*formal*comment on the Born-Infeld theory. Ironically, it had been financed by Imperial Chemical Industries, Limited.

S. Kichenassamy^{77} studied the subcase of an electromagnetic null field with matter tensor: *T*_{ij} = *A*^{2}*k*_{i}*k*_{j}, *k*_{i}*k*^{i} = 0 and showed that in this case the Born-Infeld theory leads to the same results as Maxwell’s electrodynamics [328, 340].

## 6 Affine Geometry: Schrödinger as an Ardent Player

### 6.1 A unitary theory of physical fields

^{78}started to think about UFT, he had in mind a theory which eventually would give a unitary description of the gravitational, electromagnetic and

*mesonic*field. Mesons formed a fashionable subject of research at the time; they were thought to mediate nuclear interactions. They constituted the only other field of integral spin then known besides the gravitational and electromagnetic fields. Schrödinger had written about their matrix representations [546]. In his new paper, he deemed it “probable that the fields of the Dirac-type can also be accounted for. […] It is pretty obvious that they must result from the self-dual and self-antidual constituents into which the anti-symmetric part of

*R*

_{kl}can be split.” ([545], p. 44, 57.) This is quickly constrained by another remark: “I do not mean that the new affine connection will be needed to account for the well-known Dirac fields”. ([545], p. 58.) He followed the tradition of H. Weyl and A. Eddington who had made the concept of affine connection play an essential role in their geometries — beside the metric or without any. He laid out his theory in close contact with Einstein’s papers of 1923 on affine geometry (cf. Section 4.3.2 of Part I) and the nonlinear electrodynamics of M. Born & L. Infeld [42] (cf. Section 5). On 10 May 1943, M. Born reported to Einstein about Schrödinger’s work: “[…] He has taken up an old paper of yours, from 1923, and filled it with new life, developing a unified field theory for gravitation, electrodynamics and mesons, which seems promising to me. […]” ([168], p. 194.) Einstein’s answer, on 2 June 1943, was less than excited:

“Schrödinger was as kind as to write to me himself about his work. At the time I was quite enthusiastic about this way of thinking. Its weakness lies in the fact that its construction from the point of view of affine space is rather artificial and forced. Also, the link between skew symmetric curvature and the electromagnetic states of space leads to a linear relation between electrical fields and charge densities. […]” ([168], p. 196.).

^{79}

As I suppose, the “At the time” refers to 1923. With “skew symmetric curvature”, the antisymmetric part of the Ricci-tensor is meant. Schrödinger believed that Einstein had left affine theory because of “aesthetic displeasure” resulting from a mistake in his interpretation of the theory.

#### 6.1.1 Symmetric affine connection

In his first papers on affine geometry, Schrödinger kept to a symmetric connection.^{80} There is thus no need to distinguish between \(\overset + \nabla\) and \(\overset - \nabla\) in this context. Within purely affine theory there are fewer ways to form tensor densities than in metric-affine or mixed geometry. By contraction of the curvature tensor, second-rank tensors *K*_{ij} and *V*_{ij} are available (cf. Section 2.3.1) from which tensor densities of weight −1 (scalar densities) (cf. Section 2.1.5 of Part I) like \(\sqrt {\det ({K_{ij}})}\) or \(\sqrt {\det ({V_{ij}})}\) can be built. Such scalar densities are needed in order to set up a variational principle.

^{81}

*K*

_{ij}(Γ) is the Ricci-tensor introduced in (55) or (56) due to Γ being

*symmetric*. Enthusiastically, he started at the point at which Einstein had given up and defined the symmetric and skew-symmetric quantities:

*ĝ*

^{ik}a (symmetric) metric tensor

*g*

_{ik}is introduced by the usual relations:

*g*= det(

*g*

_{lm}).

^{82}This expression is similar but unequal to the connection in Weyl’s theory (cf. Section 4.1.1 of Part I, Eq. (100)). The intention is to express \(\Gamma _{ij}^{\;\;k}\) as a functional of the components of

*K*

_{ik}, insert the expression into (56) (for

*L*= Γ), and finally solve for

*K*

_{ik}. What functions here as a metric tensor, is only an

*auxiliary*quantity and depends on the connection (cf. (154), (157)).

*ĝ*

^{ik}, \({\hat g^{ik}},{\hat f^{ik}}\) by:

*G*

_{ik}and Ricci scalar

*G*are formed from the auxiliary metric

*g*

_{ik}; the same holds for the tensor

*T*

_{ik}:= −(

*γ*

_{ik}− ½

*g*

_{ik}

*g*

^{rs}

*γ*

_{rs}). Of course, in the end,

*g*

_{ik}and all quantities formed from it will have to be expresses by the affine connection Γ.

*ϕ*_{ik}corresponds to the electromagnetic field tensor (\({\bf{\vec E}},\;{\bf{\vec B}}\)),\({\hat f^{ik}}\) corresponds to its conjugate field quantity (\(- {\bf{\vec D}},\;{\bf{\vec H}}\)),

*j*^{k}corresponds to the electric 4-current density,*T*_{ik}corresponds to the “field-energy-tensor of the electromagnetic field”.

We note from (163) that the electric current density is the negative of the electromagnetic 4-potential. The meson field is not yet included in the theory.

*α*(his Eq. (4,1) on p. 51). According to Schrödinger:

“\({\mathcal L}\) is essentially Born’s Lagrangian, with

ϕ_{kl}in place of his (\({\bf{\vec B}},\;{\bf{\vec E}}\)) \([ \ldots ]\;{\hat f^{ik}}\) agrees in form with Born’s contravariant tensor-density (\({\bf{\vec H}},\; - {\bf{\vec D}}\)) […].” ([545], p. 52.)

^{83}cf. Section 5. At the end of the paper, Schrödinger speculated about taking into account a cosmological constant, and about including a meson field of spin 1 described by a symmetrical rank 2 tensor

*ψ*

_{ik}in a more complicated Lagrangian

^{84}:

*g*

_{ik},

*A*

_{k},

*ϕ*

_{ik},

*j*

_{k}by multiplying them with constants having physical dimensions. This is to be kept in mind when his papers in which applications were discussed, are compared with this basic publication.

#### 6.1.2 Application: Geomagnetic field

^{85}[419] in which they investigated a possible (shielding) influence of the earth’s altered magnetic field on cosmic rays (as in the aurora).

*M*and angular momentum

*L*of large bodies like the Earth, the Sun, and the stars:

*G*Newton’s gravitational constant,

*c*the velocity of light in vacuum, and

*β*a numerical constant near \({1 \over 4}\) [28]. The charge of the bodies was unimportant; the hypothetical effect seemed to depend only on their rotation. Blackett’s idea raised some interest among experimental physicists and workers in UFT eager to get a testable result. One of them, the Portuguese theoretical physicist Antonio Gião, derived a formula generalizing (172) from his own unified field theory [225, 226]:

*e*,

*m*

_{0}are charge and rest mass of the electron,

*ξ*a constant, and

*χ*the “average curvature of space-time”.

Blackett conjectured “that a satisfactory explanation of (172) will not be found except within the structure of a unified field theory” [28]. M. J. Nye is vague on this point: “What he had in mind was something like Einstein asymmetry or inequality in positive and negative charges.” ([460], p. 105.) Schrödinger seconded Blackett; however, he pointed out that it was “not a very simple thing” to explain the magnetic field generated by a rotating body by his affine theory. “At least a general comprehension of the structure of matter” was a necessary prerequisite ([554], p. 216). The theoretical physicist A. Papapetrou who had worked with Schrödinger joined Blackett in Manchester between 1948 and 1952. We may assume that the experimental physicist Blackett knew of Schrödinger’s papers on the earth’s magnetism within the framework of UFT and wished to use Papapetrou’s expertise in the field. The conceptional link between Blackett’s idea and UFT is that in this theory the gravitational field is expected to generate an electromagnetic field whereas, in general relativity, the electromagnetic field had been a source of the gravitational field.

“As concerns Blackett’s new material on the magnetism of the earth and stars, I have the following difficulty: In case it is an effect of acceleration the dependency of the angular velocity must be different; in the case of an effect resulting from velocity, a translatory movement ought to also generate a magnetic field. Special relativity then requires that the matter at rest possesses an electric field as well. […] I do not know how to escape from this dilemma.”

^{86}([489], p. 543)

Three weeks earlier, in a letter to Leon Rosenfeld, he had added that he “found it very strange that Blackett wrote articles on this problem without even mentioning this simple and important old conclusion.” ([489], p. 539) This time, Pauli was not as convincing as usual: Blackett had been aware of the conclusions and discussed them amply in his early paper ([28], p. 664).

*ω*. A. Papapetrou claimed that Blackett’s postulate “could be reconciled with the relativistic invariance requirements of Maxwell’s equations” and showed this in a publication containing Eq. (174), if only forcedly so: he needed a bi-metric gravitational theory to prove it [476]. In the end, the empirical data taken from the earth did not support Blackett’s hypothesis and thus also were not backing UFT in its various forms; cf. ([19], p. 295).

#### 6.1.3 Application: Point charge

*Born’s constant*by him, where

*e*is the elementary charge and \({r_0}: = {{{e^2}} \over {{m_0}{c^2}}}{2 \over 3}\int\nolimits_0^\infty {{{dx} \over {\sqrt {1 + {x^4}}}}}\) the electron radius (mass

*m*

_{0}of the electron). The second is the reciprocal length introduced in a previous publication \(f: = {{b\;\sqrt {2G}} \over {{c^2}}}\) with Newton’s gravitational constant

*G*and the velocity of light

*c*. Interestingly, the affine connection has been removed from the field equations; they are written as generalized Einstein-Maxwell equations as in Born-Infeld theory

^{87}(cf. Section 5):

*ϕ**

^{ik}= 0 and thus

*I*

_{2}=

*ϕ**

^{ik}

*ϕ*

_{ik}= 0.

*x*= 0 to

*x*→ ∞, where it tends to zero. Like the Schwarzschild solution, (178) with (179) has a singularity of the Ricci scalar at

*x*= 0 =

*r*. For

*r*→ ∞ the Schwarzschild (external) solution is reached. According to Schrödinger, “[…] we have here, for the first time, the model of a point source whose gravitational field is accounted for by its electric field energy.

*The singularity itself contributes nothing”*([548], p. 232).

Two weeks later, Schrödinger put out another paper in which he wrote down 16 “conservation identities” following from the fact that his Lagrangian is a scalar density and depends only on the 16 components of the Ricci tensor. He also compared his generalization of general relativity with Weyl’s theory gauging the metric (cf. [689]), and also with Eddington’s purely affine theory ([140], chapter 7, part 2). From (158) it is clear that Schrödinger’s theory is not gauge-invariant.^{88} He ascribed this weakness to the missing of a third fundamental field in the theory, the meson field. According to Schrödinger the absence of the meson field was due to his restraint to a symmetric connection. Eddington’s theory with his general affine connection would house all the structures necessary to include the third field. It should take fifteen months until Schrödinger decided that he had achieved the union of all three fields.

#### 6.1.4 Semi-symmetric connection

^{89}In his first attempt, Schrödinger restricted torsion to non-vanishing vector torsion by assuming:

*Y*= Y

_{i}

*dx*

^{i}. Perhaps this is the reason why he speaks of “weakly asymmetric affinity” without giving a precise definition. Schouten called this type of connection “semi-symmetric” (cf. Section 5 of Part I, Eq. (132)). Obviously, vector torsion

*S*

_{i}= −3

*Y*

_{i}. The two contractions of the curvature tensor \({\underset - K ^i}_{jkl}\), i.e., \({\underset - K _{ik}}\) and \({\underset - V _{ik}}\). are brought into the form [cf. (63)]:

*K*

_{ik})

_{Γ}being the Ricci-tensor formed with the symmetrized connection, and

*P*

_{ik}and

*M*

^{ik}. A (symmetric) metric tensor

*g*

_{ik}. is introduced as in (157). Variation of the Lagrangian with respect to

*P*

_{ik}and

*M*

^{ik}leads to field equations now containing terms from homothetic curvature:

In this paper, Schrödinger *changed* the relation between mathematical objects and physical observables:

The variables \((j, \phi, \hat f)\) related to the Ricci tensor correspond to the *meson* field; whereas \((Y,M,\hat m)\) related to torsion describe the *electromagnetic* field.

“Now the gravitational field and the mesonic field are actually, to all appearance, universally and jointly produced in the same places, viz. in the heavy nuclear particles. They have at any rate their principal seat in common, while there is absolutely no parallelism between electric charge and mass” ([549], p. 282).

In addition, Schrödinger referred to Einstein’s remark concerning the possibility of exchanging the roles of the electromagnetic fields \({\bf{\vec E}}\) by \({\bf{\vec H}}\) and \(- {\bf{\vec D}}\) by \(- {\bf{\vec B}}\) ([142], p. 418). “Now a preliminary examination of the wholly non-symmetrical case gives me the impression that the exchange of roles will very probably be imperative, […]” ([549], p. 282).

*g*

_{ik}→

*λg*

_{ik}in combination with

_{ik}, but changes

*γ*

_{ik}and destroys the vanishing of the divergence \({\hat j^s}_{,s}\). Schrödinger thought it to be “imperative to distinguish between the

*potential j*

_{k}. and the current-and-charge

*j*

_{k}the two coinciding only in the original gauge.” ([549], p. 284.) He also claimed that only the gravitational and mesonic fields had an influence on the auto-parallels (cf. Section 2.1.1, Eq. (22)).

*Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy*, a journal only very few people would have had a chance to read, particularly during World War II, although Ireland had stayed neutral. Schrödinger apparently believed that, by then, he had made enough progress in comparison with Eddington’s and Einstein’s publications.

^{90}Hence, he wrote a summary in

*Nature*for the wider physics community [547]. At the start, he very nicely laid out the conceptual and mathematical foundations of affine geometry and gave a brief historical account of its use within unified field theory. After supporting “the superiority of the affine point of view” he discussed the ambiguities in the relation between mathematical objects and physical observables. An argument most important to him came from the existence of

“a third field […], of equally fundamental standing with gravitation and electromagnetism: the

mesonicfield responsible for nuclear binding. Today no field-theory which does not embrace at least thistriadcan be deemed satisfactory at all.” ([549], p. 574.)^{91}

He believed to have reached “a fully satisfactory unified description of gravitation, electromagnetism and a 6-vectorial meson.”([547], p. 575.) Schrödinger claimed a further advantage of his approach from the fact that he needed no “special choice of the Lagrangian” in order to make the connection between geometry and physics, and for deriving the field equations.

As to quantum theory, Schrödinger included a disclaimer (in a footnote): “The present article does not touch on it and has therefore to ignore such features in the conventional description of physical fields as are concerned with their quantum character […].” ([549], p. 574.)

“My opinion is that you have the right to speculate, other people including myself have not. […] Honestly, when average people want to procure laws of nature by pure thinking, only rubbish can result. Perhaps Schrödinger can do it. I would love to know what you think about his affine field theories. I find all of it beautiful and full of wit; but whether it is true? […]” ([168], p. 212–213)

^{92}

## 7 Mixed Geometry: Einstein’s New Attempt

After his move to Princeton, Einstein followed quite a few interests different from his later work on UFT. In the second half of the 1930s he investigated equations of motion of point particles in the gravitational field in the framework of his general relativity theory (with N. Rosen L. Infeld, and B. Hoffmann), and the conceptual intricacies of quantum mechanics (with B. Podolsky and N. Rosen). As we have seen in Section 3.2, in 1938–1943 he had turned back to Kaluza’s 5-dimensional UFT (with P. G. Bergmann, V. Bargmann, and in one paper with W. Pauli) to which theory he had given his attention previously, in 1926–1928; cf. Section 6.3 of Part I. After joint work with V. Bargmann on bi-vector (bilocal) fields in 1944 (cf. Section 3.3.1), he took up afresh his ideas on mixed geometry of 1925. He then stayed within this geometrical approach to UFT until the end of his life.

In the period 1923–1933 Einstein had tried one geometry after the other for the construction of UFT, i.e., Eddington’s affine, Cartan’s tele-parallel, Kaluza’s 5 dimensional Riemannian geometry, and finally mixed geometry, a blend of affine geometry and Foerster’s (alias Bach’s) idea of using a metric with a skew-symmetric part. Unlike this, after the second world war he stuck to one and the same geometry with asymmetric fundamental tensor and asymmetric affine connection. The problems dealt with by him then were technical at first: what fundamental variables to chose, what “natural” field equations to take, and how to derive these in a satisfactory manner. Next, would the equations chosen be able to provide a set of solutions large enough for physics? Would they admit exact solutions without singularities? In physics, his central interest was directed towards the possibilities for the interpretation of geometrical objects as physical observables. During his life, he believed that the corpus of UFT had not yet become mature enough to allow for a comparison with experiment/observation. His epistemological credo lead him to distrust the probability interpretation of quantum theory as a secure foundation of fundamental physical theory; for him quantum mechanics amounted to no more than a useful “model”. His philosophical position may also have demotivated him to the extent that, already in the late 1930s, he had given up on learning the formalism of quantum field theory in order to be able to follow its further development.^{93} To see him acquire a working knowledge of quantum field theory as a beginner, after World War II, would have been asking too much in view of his age and state of health. That he did not take into account progress in nuclear and elementary particle physics reached in the two decades since he first had looked at mixed geometry, was a further factor isolating him from many of his well known colleagues in theoretical physics.

“But in my work I am more fanatical than ever, and really hope to have solved my old problem of the unity of the physical field. Somehow, however, it is like with an airship with which we can sail through the clouds but not clearly see how to land in reality, i.e on the earth.”

^{94}

Einstein’s first three papers on UFT via mixed geometry ([142, 147, 179]) all employ the metric *g* and the connection *L* as *independent* variables — with altogether 80 available components in local coordinates while just 6 + 10 of them are needed for a description of the gravitational and electromagnetic fields. (The number of the inherent “degrees of freedom” is a more complicated affair.) A strategy followed by Einstein and others seems to have been to remove the superfluous 64 variables in the affine connection by expressing them by the components of the metric, its first derivatives, and the torsion tensor. Since the matter variables were to be included in the geometry, at least in the approach to UFT by Einstein, enough geometrical objects would have to be found in order to represent matter, e.g., 4 components of the electric 4-current, 4 components of the magnetic 4-current, 5 components for an ideal fluid, more for the unspecified energy-momentum-tensor in total. In Einstein’s approach, the symmetric part of the metric, *h*_{ij}, is assumed to correspond to inertial and gravitational fields while the antisymmetric part *k*_{ij} houses the electromagnetic field. The matter variables then are related to derivatives of the metric and connection (cf. Section 10.3.1). The field equations would have to be derived from such a Lagrangian in such a way that general relativity and Maxwell’s equations be contained in UFT as *limiting* cases. Unlike the situation in general relativity, in metric-affine geometry a two-parameter set of possible Lagrangians *linear* in the curvature tensor (with the cosmological constant still to be added) does exist if homothetic curvature in (65), (66) of Section 2.3.1 is included. Nevertheless, Einstein used a Lagrangian corresponding (more or less) to the curvature scalar in Riemannian geometry \(\sqrt {- {\rm{det(}}{{\rm{g}}_{ik}}{\rm{)}}} \,{g^{lm}}{K_{lm}}(L)\) without further justification.^{95} Such field equations, the main alternatives of which came to be named *strong* and *weak*, were used to express the connection as a complicated functional of the metric and its derivatives and to determine the two parts, symmetric and skew-symmetric, of the metric. This was fully achieved not before the 1950s; cf. Section 10.1.

Interestingly, in his second paper of 1945 using mixed geometry, Einstein did not mention his first one of 1925. It seems unrealistic to assume that he had forgotten what he had done twenty years earlier. His papers had been published in the proceedings of the Prussian Academy of Science in Berlin. Possibly, he just did not want to refer to the Prussian Academy from which he had resigned in 1933, and then been thrown out. This is more convincing than anything else; he never ever mentioned his paper of 1925 in a publication after 1933 [312]. There is a small difference between Einstein’s first paper using mixed geometry [142] and his second [147]: He now introduced *complex-valued* fields on real space-time in order to apply what he termed “Hermitian symmetry”; cf. (46). After Pauli had observed that the theory could be developed without the independent variables being complex, in his next (third) paper Einstein used “Hermitian symmetry” in a generalized meaning, i.e., as transposition invariance [179]; cf. Section 2.2.2.

### 7.1 Formal and physical motivation

Once he had chosen geometrical structures, as in mixed geometry, Einstein needed principles for constraining his field equations. What he had called “the principle of general relativity”, i.e., the demand that all physical equations be covariant under arbitrary coordinate transformations (“general covariance”), became also one of the fundamentals of Einstein’s further generalization of general relativity. There, the principle of covariance and the demand for differential equations of 2nd order (in the derivatives) for the field variables had led to a unique Lagrangian \(({1 \over {2k}}R + \Lambda)\sqrt {- g}\), with the cosmological constant Λ being the only free parameter. In UFT, with mixed geometry describing space-time, the situation was less fortunate: From the curvature tensor, two independent scalar invariants could be formed. Moreover, if torsion was used as a separate constructive element offered by this particular geometry, the arbitrariness in the choice of a Lagrangian increased considerably. In principle, in place of the term with a single cosmological constant *g*_{ij} Λ, a further term with two constants could be added: *h*_{ij} Λ′ and *k*_{ij} Λ″.

“Substance, in your sense means the existence of timelike lines of a special kind. This is the translation of the concept of particle to the case of a continuum. […] the necessity of such translatibility, seems totally unreasonable as a theoretical demand. To realize the essential point of atomic thought on the level of a continuum theory, it is sufficient to have a field of high intensity in a spatially small region which, with respect to its “timelike” evolution, satisfies certain conservation laws […].” ([116], p. 95.)

^{96}

“[…] writers have occasionally noted the possibility that material particles might be considered as singularities of the field. This point of view, however, we cannot accept at all. For a singularity brings so much arbitrariness into the theory that it actually nullifies its laws.”

As we will see below, an idea tried by Einstein for the reduction of constructive possibilities, amounted to the introduction of additional symmetries like invariance with respect to Hermitian (transposition-) substitution, and later, *λ*-transformations; cf. Sections 2.2.2 and 2.2.3. Further comments on these transformations are given in Section 9.8.

Interestingly, the limiting subcase in which the symmetric part of the (asymmetric) metric is assumed to be Minkowskian and which would have lead to a generalization of Maxwell’s theory apparently has been studied rarely as an exact, if only heavily overdetermined theory; cf. however [450, 600, 502].

### 7.2 Einstein 1945

*complex valued*tensor field and a 4-dimensional

*complex*space as a new framework. About this, he reported to his friend M. Besso in August 1942 ([163], p. 367):

“What I now do will seem a bit crazy to you, and perhaps it is crazy. […] I consider a space the 4 coordinates

x^{1}, …x^{4}which are complex such that in fact it is an 8-dimensional space. To each coordinatex^{i}belongs its complex conjugatex^{ị}. […] In place of the Riemannian metric another one of the formg_{ik}obtains. We ask it to be real, i.e.,g_{ik}=ḡ_{ki}must hold (Hermitian metric). Theg_{ik}are analytical functions of thex^{i}, andx^{ị}. […]”^{97}

He then asked for field equations and for complex coordinate transformations. “The problem is that there exist several equations fulfilling these conditions. However, I found out that that this difficulty goes away if attacked correctly, and that one can proceed almost as with Riemann” ([163], p. 367–368).

During the 3 years until he published his next paper in the framework of mixed geometry, Einstein had changed his mind: he stuck to *real* space-time and only took the field variables to be complex [147]. He was not the first to dabble in such a mathematical structure. More than a decade before, advised by A. Eddington, Hsin P. Soh^{98}, during his stay at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, had published a paper on a theory of gravitation and electromagnetism within complex four-dimensional Riemannian geometry with real coordinates. The real part of the metric “[…] is associated with mass (gravitation) and the imaginary part with charge (electromagnetism)” ([581], p. 299).

^{99}

^{100}

*L*being a connection with Hermitian symmetry. Note that

*K*

_{ik}* is not Hermitian thus implying a non-Hermitian Lagrangian \({\mathcal H}\).

*ĝ*

^{ik}, \({L_{ik}}^l\). From \(\delta {\mathcal H} = - \hat U_m^{ik}\delta L_{ik}^m + {G_{ik}}\delta {\hat g^{ik}}\), Einstein then showed that the first equation of the field equations:

*L*later was named the

*strong*field equations.

### 7.3 Einstein-Straus 1946 and the weak field equations

*L*

_{i}= 0, could not be derived within the formalism given in the previous paper ([147]). Together with his assistant Ernst Straus

^{101}, Einstein wrote a follow-up in which the metric field did not need to be complex [179]. Equation (199) now is introduced by a Lagrangian multiplier

*Â*

^{i}. The new Lagrangian is given by:

*P*

_{ik}is the same quantity as \({\overset {\rm{Her}} K _{ik}}\) of [147]; cf. also Eq. (74) of Section 2.3.2.

^{102}The variables to be varied independently are

*ĝ*

^{ik}, \({L_{ik}}^l\), and the multipliers

*Â*

^{i},

*b*

_{k}. After some calculation, the following field equations arose:

*P*

_{[ik ]}= 0; therefore this system of equations is named the

*weak*field equations of UFT. However, cf. Section 9.2.2 for a change in Einstein’s wording. From the calculations involved, it can be seen that (206) is equivalent to (30), and that

*Â*

^{i}vanishes. The second multiplier satisfies:

*P*

_{ik}might be related to the electromagnetic field tensor. In the paper, homothetic curvature

*V*

_{ik}is introduced but not included in the Lagrangian. It will vanish as a consequence of the field equations given

*g*

_{ij}=

*η*

_{ij}+

*γ*

_{ij}is used with γ

_{(ij)}related to the gravitational and

*γ*

_{[ij ]}to the electromagnetic field. For the skew-symmetric part

*γ*

_{[ij ]}of the metric, the field equations reduce to

*rigorous*solutions which are regular in the entire space.” Only such solutions are acceptable but: “Whether such (non-trivial) solutions exist is as yet unknown” ([179], p. 737).

Einstein and Straus then discussed whether (207) and (208) could be replaced by *P*_{ik} = 0. By again looking at the linear approximation, they “get a dependence of the electric from the gravitational field which cannot be brought in accord with our physical knowledge […]” ([179], p. 737).

*g*

_{ik}in order that the Eqs. (30) or (206) determine the connection (in terms of the metric) “uniquely and without singularities”. If we set \({I_1}: = {\rm{det(}}{h_{ik}}{\rm{);}}\,{I_2}: = {1 \over 4}{\epsilon ^{ijkl}}{\epsilon ^{abcd}}{h_{ia}}{h_{jb}}{k_{kc}}{k_{kd}}\), and

*I*

_{3}:= det(

*k*

_{ik}), then they are given by

^{103}:

“really does not yet know, whether this new system of equations has anything to do with physics. What justly can be claimed only is that it represents a consequent generalization of the gravitational equations for empty space.”

^{104}

“As long as the Γ cannot be expressed by the

g_{ik,l}in the simplest way, one cannot hope to solve exact problems. Due to the diligence and inventiveness of my assistant Straus, we will have reached this goal, soon.”^{105}

“Schrödinger told me something about you. But I do not know whether you still keep to the field equations which you investigated with Straus at the time of my departure from Princeton (end of February). My personal conviction remains — not the least because of the negative results of your own numerous tries — that classical field theory in whatever form is a completely sucked out lemon from which in no way can spring something new. But I myself do not yet see a path, which leads us further in the principal questions.” ([489], p. 384)

“I labour very hard with my Herr Straus at the verification (or falsification) of my equations. However, we are far from overcoming the mathematical difficulties. It is hard work for which a true mathematician would not at all muster the courage.” ([160], p. 84)

^{106}

And, as may be added, for which a genuine true mathematician possibly would not muster enough interest. After all, the task is the resolution of a system of linear equations, well-known in principle, but hard to control for 64 equations. Nevertheless, Einstein’s assistant in Princeton, E. Straus, in dealing with the weak field equations, continued to work at the problem of solving (206) for the connection. He worked with tensor algebra and presented a formal solution (cf. Eq. (1.9), p. 416 of [592]). However, it was not only unwieldy but useless in practice. Yet, the mathematical difficulty Einstein blamed for the slow progress made, was “the integration of malicious non-linear equations” (letter to H. Zangger of 28 July 1947 in [560], p. 579).

^{107}and with absence of algebraic inconsistencies [101, 102]. On the other hand, the authors showed that the following Lagrangian, closely related to an expansion in powers of

*k*

_{ij}=

*g*

_{[ij ]}of the Einstein-Straus Lagrangian, would be acceptable:

*H*

_{rst}:=

*∂*

_{r}

*k*

_{st}+

*d*

_{t}

*k*

_{rs}+

*∂*

_{s}

*k*

_{tr}. Indices are moved with the symmetric part of the asymmetric metric [100].

Another link from Einstein’s Hermitian theory to modern research leads to “massive gravity” theories, i.e., speculative theories describing an empirically unknown spin-2 particle (graviton) with mass [76, 255]. However, it is not clear whether these theories are free of ghosts.

## 8 Schrödinger II: Arbitrary Affine Connection

“I am sending them to nobody else, because you are the only person known to me who is not wearing blinkers in regard to the fundamental questions in our science. The attempt depends on […] the introduction of a non-symmetric tensor as the only relevant field quantity […]. Pauli stuck out his tongue at me when I told him about it.” (quoted from [446], p. 424.)

In his subsequent letter of 3 March 1946, Einstein pointed to a technical weakness of his theory: “the non-symmetric tensor is not the most simple structure that is covariant with respect to the group, but decomposes into the independently transforming parts *g*_{(ik)} and *g*_{[ik ]}; the consequence of this is that one can obtain a nondescript number of systems of second-order equations.” ([446], p. 424.)^{108} In both of the preceding papers ([147, 179]), Einstein had not given a single reference to any other publication. Due to the the difficulties concerning transatlantic communication during the war years 1943 and 1944, Einstein possibly might not have seen Schrödinger’s six papers from 1943 and 1944.

“One thing I do know is that my first work [P.R.I.A. 1943] was so imbecilic that it now is repellent to everyone, including you […]. This first work was no advance over ‘Einstein 1923’, but pretended to be.” ([446], p. 426.)

*W*, and

*Y*are varied independently. That \({W_{ik}}^l\) is tracefree is taken into account by help of a multiplier term in the variational principle:

*ĝ*

^{ik}, \({\hat f^{ik}}\),

*γ*

_{ik}and

*ϕ*

_{ik}are introduced as they were in Section 6.1.1 by (154) and (159). A decomposition of (215) then leads to:

*W*are similar to (189):

^{109}\({\hat s^{ik}}: = {{\partial {\mathcal L}} \over {\partial {V_{ik}}}}\). The variation with respect to

*Y*

^{k}, after some calculation, led to the simple relation between the current densities:

“Because the Lagrangian is left undetermined for the time being, each of the three fields will be represented by

two“conjugate” tensorial entities in the field equations, gravitation byĝandγ; the skew fields by \(\hat f\) andϕand byŝandVrespectively.”([551], 44.)

*′ŝ, V*are claimed to then be “kept entirely aloof from the rest by the remarkable fact that the

*Y*-vector drops out rigorously from all the other equations except the last eqn. (216)”. The fields \(\hat f\),

*′ϕ*with the current density \(\hat j\) are related to the

*meson*field.

*ĝ*

^{ik}. Schrödinger then calculated the expression for the symmetric part of the connection as in (191) but now only

*in first approximation*in \(\hat f\),

*W*:

*g*

_{ik}. Schrödinger did interpret (228) as Proca equation

^{110}for the meson, “except for the term which contains

*explicitly*second derivatives”. According to him, the additional term was taking into account a slight

*direct*influence of gravitation on the meson field ([551], 47).

In the same approximation, Schrödinger also wrote down gravitational field equations looking like Einstein’s except for the fact that on the side of the matter tensor a number of geometrical objects do appear. They are said to describe the interaction of gravitational and electromagnetic fields as well as of gravitational and mesonic fields. A cosmological term could also be present.

“This encourages one to regard an affine connection of space-time as

thecompetent geometrical interpretation (from the classical point of view) of the three physical tensor fields we know.” ([551], p. 50)

He questioned, however, that the classical field laws would “be of much help in guessing the true quantum laws of the meson” if they were violently non-linear.

“We have squandered a lot of time on this thing, and the result looks like a gift from the devil’s grandmother.” ([446], p. 426.)

“I personally am completely convinced — contrary to you as it seems — that for

physicsnothing reasonable follows from the affine connection without metric. Palatini’s theorem again slams the door. I also believe that each tensor, e.g., the contracted curvature tensor, immediately must be split into a symmetric and a skew part* (* In general: tensors into theirirreduciblesymmetry classes), and to avoid every adding sign between them. What God did separate, humans must not join.) ([489], p. 401)”^{111}

### 8.1 Schrödinger’s debacle

“Today I can report on a real advance. […] In brief, the situation is this. If in the affine theory, which I have developed in general form in recent years, one takes the special, the only reasonable Lagrange function, namely the square root of the determinant of the Einstein tensor, then one obtains something fabulously good.” ([446], p. 430.)

“The nearer one approaches truth, the simpler things become. I have the honour of laying before you today the keystone of the Affine Field Theory and thereby the solution of a 30 year old problem: the competent generalization of Einstein’s great theory of 1915. The solution was$$\begin{array}{*{20}c} {\quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \delta \int {\mathcal L} = 0} \\ {{\rm{with}}\;{\mathcal L} = \sqrt {- \det ({R_{rs}})} \,,} \\ \end{array}$$(229)where Γ is the general affinity of 64 components. That is all. From these three lines my friends would reconstruct the theory, supposing the paper I am handing in got hopelessly lost, and I died on my way home.” ([446], p. 430–432.)$${R_{ik}} \equiv - \underset - K {\,_{ik}} = {{\partial \Gamma _{il}^{l}} \over {\partial {x_k}}} - {{\partial \Gamma _{ik}^{l}} \over {\partial {x_l}}} + \Gamma _{mk}^{l}\Gamma _{il}^{m} - \Gamma _{ml}^{l}\Gamma _{ik}^{m}\,.$$(230)

In the paper submitted together with his presentation, the Lagrangian (229) was given a factor \({2 \over \lambda}\) with a real constant *λ* ≠ 0 playing an important role ([552], p. 164). Schrödinger first played its occurrence down, unconvincingly though, by saying that it could be transformed to ±1, but in his final field equations, the constant stood for an additional “cosmological” term. In his own words (in a note “added in proof”), his field equations “[…] include ‘the cosmological term’ without containing a cosmological constant.” ([552], p. 171.)

^{112}

*S*

_{i}is used. Equation (233) expresses nothing but the vanishing of the ±-derivative of \(R_{ik}^* + {{\mathcal F}_{ik}} \equiv - \underset - K\ _{ik}^* + {{\mathcal F}_{ik}} \cdot \,R_{ik}^*(\underset - K\ _{ik}^*)\) is formed with the “star”-connection. The (asymmetric) metric again was defined as a variational derivative with respect to

*R*

_{ik}. By some manipulation of the formalism, Schrödinger was able to show that (233) is equivalent to the slightly generalized

*weak*field equations of Einstein & Straus (206)–(208) (cf. below, Section 7.3):

“

We now have to endorse the remarkable fact, that the actual content of equations [(236)–(237) …] differs from the theory presented in Einstein’s two papers, quoted above, (i.e., [147, 179]) only by formalλ-terms.^{113}His theory amounts to puttingλ= 0 in (236)–(237). There is aformaldifference in that he, from the outset, regards all skew tensors as purely imaginary. […]” ([552], p. 167.)

*g*

_{ik}. According to Schrödinger: “The surplus of 2 equations is vindicated by two trivial identities, one between the first members of (237), and one between those of (236).” (236) is not a definition, such as it was used by Eddington (cf. Section 4.3.1 of Part I) but derived from the Lagrangian (229), the definition in (157) and:

Schrödinger also confessed that “it may turn out that I have overrated the practical advantage of (233) over (235)–(237).”

*Irish Press*caught the bait: “Twenty persons heard and saw history being made in the world of physics yesterday as they sat in the lecture hall of the Royal Irish Academy, Dublin, and heard Dr. Erwin Schrödinger. […] It was later told me that the theory should express everything in field physics.” ([446], p. 432.) The news spread quickly; the science editor of

*The New York Times*sent Schrödinger’s statement and a copy of his paper to Einstein, and asked him for a comment. In the text supplied by Einstein which became also widely distributed, he said:

“Schrödinger’s latest effort […] can be judged only on the basis of mathematical-formal qualities, but not from the point of view of ‘truth’ (i.e., agreement with the facts of experience). Even from this point of view I can see no special advantages over the theoretical possibilities known before, rather the opposite. […] It seems undesirable to me to present such preliminary attempts to the public in any form.” ([446], p. 432–433.)

and stopped writing to Schrödinger for the next three years. Pauli seemingly had followed the events from Switzerland and wrote to Schrödinger calmly on 9 February 1947:“I was not correct in my objection to your Hamilton-function. But your theory does not really differ from mine, only in the presentation and in the ‘cosmological term’ which mine lacks. […] Not your starting-point but your equations permit a transition to vanishing cosmological constant, then the content of your theory becomes identical with mine” ([446], p. 434),

“Many thanks for your interesting letter of 26. Jan. I would have liked to only respond to it after your first enthusiasm about the new field equations will have given place to a more sober judgment (perhaps the letter is written still too early). Of course, progress is made by your decision to take a specific Lagrangian; also, the mathematical side of your thoughts to me seems extraordinarily clear. Nevertheless, my reservations with regard to a non-irreducible object as a basis continue unabatedly. […]” ([489], p. 415).

^{114}

He then expressed in more detail, why for him, only irreducible tensors are the variables to be used. He emphasized that he was not against the “logical possibility” of Schrödinger’s field equations, but could not accept their “necessity and naturalness”. According to Pauli, already before “the next few years”, it would become clear whether these field equations “have something to do with physics, or not.” In a letter to Sommerfeld of 31 October 1947, Pauli agreed with Sommerfeld’s “negative opinion concerning Einstein’s present physics” and supported them with much the same arguments as those given to Schrödinger ([489], p. 475).

*ĝ*

^{[ik ]},

*Ƒ*

_{ik}. as contravariant density and covariant field tensor, so that (234), and (233), or (235) amount to (modified) Maxwell equations. The quantities \(g[ik],\,\sqrt {- g} {g^{ir}}{g^{ks}}\,{{\mathcal F}_{rs}},\,\,\sqrt {- g} {g^{ri}}{g^{sk}}{{\mathcal F}_{rs}},\,{1 \over 2}\sqrt {- g} ({g^{ri}}{g^{ks}} - {g^{rk}}{g^{is}}){{\mathcal F}_{rs}})\) were assumed to be linked to “electric charge, mesonic charge and matter”.

“We must not forget, that we are here faced with a truly unitary theory, in which we have to expect all fields to coalesce into an inseparable union, almost as close as that of the electric and magnetic field entailed by Restricted Relativity.” ([552], p. 169.)

The episode differs from Einstein’s repeated claims to have found the final unified field theory, in the 1920s and 30s, in that Einstein did not have to call in the press, and in fact was clever enough not do so. However, his friends in the press were covering his work to the extent, that for each new publication he received the same public attention as Schrödinger in this single case — staged by himself. By his public reaction to Schrödinger, Einstein solidified his position as the opinion leader in research concerning UFT.

### 8.2 Recovery

“I have found the unitary field equations. They are based on primitive affine geometry, […] Albert did the main job in 1923, but missed the goal by a hair’s breadth. The result is fascinatingly beautiful. I could not sleep a fortnight without dreaming of it.” ([256], p. 168)

^{115}

The report of L. Bass that: “After a farcical debacle […], Schrödinger put away the material in a file labeled despondently ‘Die Einstein Schweinerei’ (the Einstein mess)” ([13], p. 120) describes only a momentary halt. After a pause of almost one year, Schrödinger continued his publishing in this topic, i.e., UFT. As a beginning, he surveyed the possibilities for the construction of UFT in a whole *class* of geometries descending “from the theory of gravitation in empty space by very natural and straightforward generalization without any further artifice.” ([555], p. 205.) He distinguished between the three cases: metrical, affine and mixed geometry depending on whether only *g*_{ik}, \({\Gamma _{ik}}^l\), or both can be regarded as independent variables. As a Lagrangian he took *ĝ*^{rs}*R*_{rs}, with as before \({R_{ik}} = - {\underset - K _{ik}}\). The further classification depended on additional symmetry conditions on the basic variable(s). He dismissed the case of a non-symmetric metric and symmetric connection “since there is no simple and natural clue” by which the Levi-Civita connection should be replaced. It was perhaps this remark which induced J. I. Horváth to suggest “a selection principle for the final theory in the case of the affine theories”, to wit: *the field equations must be invariant against changes of the affinities which preserve the parallelism* [284]. He derived such transformations (changes) from the weakened condition for auto-parallels (cf. Section 2.1.1, after (22)) and arrived, without noting it, at Einstein’s *λ*-transformations (52) introduced before.

*K*

_{ik}instead of its symmetric

*K*

_{(ik)}and skew symmetric

*K*

_{[ik ]}parts, separately. He then derived the “mathematically simplest scalar densities” as building elements of the Lagrangian. If a symmetric connection is used, they are given by

^{116}

*f*

_{1},

*f*

_{2},

*f*. Pauli’s conclusion was:

“Even if we try to specialize these functions by simplifying arguments, a lot of arbitrariness remains. The impression prevails that the basic geometrical concepts have nothing to do with physics. Einstein did express it like this: ‘the action function then is obtained by leering at another sheet of paper lying next to it, and on which the formulae for another theory can be seen.’” ([489], p. 541–542).

^{117}

^{118}:

“[…] an assiduous application of such methods to weak fields is bound to tell us something on the interlacing of three things, gravitational field, electromagnetic field, and electric charges, all three of which spring from one basic conception. […] One may hope that this will provide a better foundation to the quantum mechanical treatment of fields, which at present is based on a number of classical or pseudo-classical field theories of independent origin, cemented together by interaction terms’.” ([558], p. 555.)

As a result he claimed that “a pure charge-free Maxwellian field of radiation is capable of producing a gravitational field which according to the old theory could only be produced by matter other than an electromagnetic field.” By this, the non-vanishing of the trace of a correspondingly defined energy-momentum tensor is meant. He also offered three alternatives for an energy (pseudo-) tensor which all vanish for a single plane wave. As to physical interpretations, *k*_{ij} = *g*_{[ij ]} is identified with the electromagnetic field with the space-space components standing for the electrical field. The magnetic 4-current vanishes in consequence of the field equations while the electrical 4-current is added by hand and given by the expression *k*_{ij,l} + *k*_{jl,i} + *k*_{li,j}. Despite Schrödinger’s going beyond the linear approximation up to quadratic terms, the “[…] influence of both fields [i.e., gravitational and electromagnetic] on the motion of the charges and that of the gravitational field on the electromagnetic” was missing. Thus, the paper contained no new fundamental insights.

*h*

_{ij}to represent gravitation but found the direct link of the skew-symmetric part of

*g*

_{ij}with the electromagnetic field as incorrect. By an elementary calculation presented a year later also by M.-A. Tonnelat (cf. [627] or the table on p. 15 of [632]), Eq. (33) is put into the form:

^{119}

*h*

_{ij}) with a complicated r.h.s. which then is made to vanish by the additional assumptions that

*k*

_{ij}is a curl,

*J*

_{2}= 0, and

*ǩ*

^{rs}

*k*

_{rs}= 0. Likewise, an additional condition was laid on the curvature tensor (cf. his Eq. (27a), p. 749) such that the field equation reduced to the Einstein vacuum equation with cosmological constant. That de Sitter space is a solution of Ingraham’s equations with

*k*

_{ij}representing some sort of plane wave, is unsurprising. Fortunately, this naive strategy of imposing additional conditions with the aim to obtain interpretable field equations, did not have many followers.

### 8.3 First exact solutions

^{120}[475]. His ansatz contained five unknown functions of the radial coordinate \(r = {x^1}\,({x^2} = \theta, {x^3} = \phi, {x^0} = ct):\,{g_{00}}\overset * = \gamma (r),{g_{11}}\overset * = \alpha (r),{g_{22}}\overset * = \beta (r),{g_{33}}\overset * = \beta {\rm{si}}{{\rm{n}}^{\rm{2}}}\theta, {g_{01}} = - {g_{10}}\overset * = w(r),{g_{23}} = - {g_{32}}\overset * = {r^2}v(r){\rm{sin}}\theta\). In the paper, he treated the cases

*v*= 0,

*w*≠ 0 and

*v*≠ 0,

*w*= 0,

*v*real. After setting

*β*=

*r*

^{2}in the first case, integration of the field equations led to

*r*→ ∞,

*g*

_{(ik)}→

*η*

_{ik}. Thus, if

*g*

_{(ij)}=

*h*

_{ij}is interpreted as the space-time metric (gravitational field tensor),

*g*

_{[ij ]}=

*k*

_{ij}as the electromagnetic field tensor, then a deviation from the Reissner-Nordström-de Sitter-solution of general relativity with \(\gamma = {(\alpha)^{- 1}} = (1 - {{2m} \over r} + {{{e^2}} \over {{r^2}}} - {\lambda \over 3}{r^2})\) was obtained. Introducing the elementary electric charge by

*l*

^{2}=

*e*, the source term for the point charge in (243) shows the wrong radial dependence, although from (243) we must conclude that a radial electromagnetic field is present.

^{121}The solution does

*not*describe the Coulomb field. At this point, this seems no serious objection to the theory, because other static spherically symmetric (SSS) solution might exist. However, cf. Section 9.6, where the most general sss solution is given.

*v*is replaced by

*f*=

*vr*

^{2}and only a particular solution with \(\lambda = {(\alpha)^{- 1}} = (1 - {{2m} \over r} - {\lambda \over 3}{r^2}),\beta = {r^2},\,\upsilon = c\), with

*c*a constant was reached by Papapetrou. Thus, the radial electromagnetic field is constant. Moreover, this constant electric field does not influence the gravitational field. Papapetrou also discussed approximate solutions and concluded for them that

*k*

_{ij}does not describe the electromagnetic field but the electromagnetic potential. This would rule out an interpretation of the solution in terms of an electric field. All these solutions would not have been acceptable to Einstein (in the sense of describing sources of electricity), because they were not free of singularities. Unlike for the gravitational field in general relativity or the electromagnetic field, for the “total” field in UFT singularities were no longer permitted:

We shall come back to the demand that exact solutions ought to be free of singularities in Sections 9.6.2 and 10.3.2.“As I’ve said, one does’t get away without singularities in the case of Maxwell’s equations. But no reasonable person believes that Maxwell’s equations can hold rigorously. They are, in suitable cases, first approximations for weak fields. It is now my belief that, for a serious and rigorous field theory, one must insist that

the field be free of singularities everywhere.”([116], p. 93)^{122}

For static metrics, Papapetrou was able to extend a result of Einstein [145], and Einstein & W. Pauli [177] to the strong field equations of Einstein’s UFT: non-singular static metrics of the strong field equations of UFT which would represent the (gravitational) field of a non-vanishing mass do not exist [474]. Note that this result depends on the identification of the symmetric part of the metric with the gravitational field (potential). A year later, a different proof was given by E. Straus for the weak field equations. In the same paper, Straus concluded: “There exists no static centrally symmetric solution of the field equations which is asymptotically flat and regular throughout” ([592], p. 420). For A. Lichnerowicz’ contribution to the problem of Einstein & Pauli cf. Section 10.5.1.

*A*(

*r, t*),

*B*(

*r*,

*t*),

*C*(

*r*,

*t*),

*f*(

*r, t*),

*h*(

*r, t*) (and the usual coordinates

*x*

^{0}=

*t, x*

^{1}=

*r, x*

^{2}=

*θ, x*

^{3}=

*ϕ*):

*B*

^{2}≠

*h*

^{2},

*f*= 0 (type I), or

*B*

^{2}=

*h*

^{2},

*f*= 0 (type II) were distinguished. And then, immediately, the time-dependence of the free functions was dropped. Assuming in addition

*B*=

*r*

^{2},

*h*=

*kr*

^{2}, the authors derived the general solution of type II of Schrödinger’s field equations (the weak equations with cosmological constant

*λ*) to be:

*a*,

*k*,

*k*

_{1},

*m*are integration constants. The solution generalized Papapetrou’s two exact static solutions (

*k*

_{1}= 0,

*k*≠ 0 and

*k*

_{1}≠ 0,

*k*= 0) by “combining” them. Apparently, at the time the authors did not know of Wyman’s earlier paper, also containing solutions with

*k × k*

_{1}≠ 0; see Section 9.6.1. The main conclusion drawn by Takeno et al. was that the fundamental equation (30) has

*no*unique solution if

*det*(

*g*

_{ab}) = 2 det(

*g*

_{(ab)}), det(

*g*

_{[ab ]}) = 0. This condition is consistent with (364) derived by M.-A. Tonnelat; cf. Section 10.2.3.

In view of the research done since, e.g., on black holes or cosmology, the last sentence possibly would not be upheld by him, today.“One may hope that exact solutions, involving strong fields, will reveal the nature of the ultimate particles. I do not believe this, mainly because I do not believe the ultimate particles to be identifiable individuals that could be described in this fashion. Moreover, in the symmetric theory (i.e., in Einstein’s theory of 1916) the exact solutions, involving strong fields, have disclosed the ingenuity of the mathematicians who discovered them, but nothing more. […]” ([558], p. 3)

## 9 Einstein II: From 1948 on

“Scientifically, I am still lagging because of the same mathematical difficulties which make it impossible for me to affirm or contradict my more general relativistic field theory […]. I will not be able to finish it [the work]; it will be forgotten and at a later time arguably must be re-discovered. It happened this way with so many problems.”

^{123}

“Indeed, I am not strongly convinced that this can be achieved with the theory of my continuous field although I have found for it an — until now — apparently reasonable possibility. Yet the calculatory difficulties are so great that I shall bite the dust until I myself have found an assured opinion of it. […]”

^{124}

In spite of such reservations, Einstein carried on unflagging with his research. In his next publication on UFT [148], he again took a complex (asymmetric) metric field. In order to justify this choice in comparison to Schrödinger’s who “has based his affine theory […] on real fields […]”,^{125} he presented the following argument: Just by multiplication and the use of a single complex vector *A*_{i} a Hermitian tensor *A*_{i}*Ā*_{k}. can be constructed. By adding four such terms, the Hermitian metric tensor \({g_{ik}} = \underset \kappa \Sigma \underset \kappa c {\underset \kappa A _i}{\overset {-} {\underset \kappa A} _k}\) can be obtained. “A non-symmetric real tensor cannot be constructed from vectors in such close analogy” ([148], p. 39). Nevertheless, in Einstein’s future papers, the complex metric was dropped.

*without*the multiplier terms. In order to again be able to gain the weak field equations, an additional assumption was made: the skew-symmetric part of the metric (density)

*ĝ*

^{[ik ]}be derived from a tensor “potential”

*ĝ*

^{ikl}anti-symmetric in all indices. Thus, in the Lagrangian,

*ĝ*

^{ik}is replaced by \({\hat g^{ik}} = {\hat g^{(ik)}} + {\hat g^{ikl}}_{,l}\). The motivation behind this trick is to obtain the compatibility equation (30) from \(\delta {\mathcal H}/\delta \Gamma _{ik}^m = 0\), indirectly. The skew-symmetric part of \(\delta {\mathcal H}/\delta \Gamma _{ik}^m = 0\) is formed and a trace taken in order to arrive at \({1 \over 2}\hat g_{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\,,l}^{[ik]} + {\hat g^{(ik)}}\Gamma _{[ks]}^s = 0\). Introduction of \(\hat g_{\,\,\,\,\,,l}^{il} = \hat g_{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,,ls}^{ils}\) then shows that Γ

_{i}= 0 holds. With the help of this equation, \(\delta {\mathcal H}/\delta \Gamma _{ik}^m = 0\) finally reduces to (30).

*ĝ*

^{ikl}are:

^{126}

As in [179], Einstein did not include homothetic curvature into the building of his Lagrangian with the same unconvincing argument: from his (special) field equations and (252) the vanishing of the homothetic curvature would follow.

In his paper, Einstein related mathematical objects to physical observables such that “the antisymmetric density *ĝ*^{ikl} plays the role of an electromagnetic vector potential, the tensor *ĝ*_{[jk ],l} + *ĝ*_{[kl ],i} + *ĝ*_{[li ], k} the role of current density.” More precisely, the dual object *j*^{s} ∼ *∊*^{sikl} (*ĝ*_{[ik ],l} + *ĝ*_{[kl ], i} + *ĝ*_{[li ],k}) with vanishing divergence \(j_{\,\,\,,s}^s = 0\) is the (electric) current density ([148], p. 39).

^{127}In his answer three weeks later, Pauli was soft on “whether a mathematically unified combination of the electromagnetic and gravitational fields in a classical field theory is possible […]”, but adamant on its relation to quantum theory:

“[…] that I have another opinion than you on the question, mentioned in your letter, of the physical usability of singularity-free solutions of classical field equations. To me it deems that, even if such solutions do exist in a suitably chosen field theory, it would not be possible to relate them with the atomic facts in physics in the way you wish, namely in a way that avoids the statistical interpretation, in principle.” ([489], p. 621.)

^{128}

### 9.1 A period of undecidedness (1949/50)

^{129}In a letter of 16 August 1949 to his friend Besso, who had asked him to tell him about his generalized field equations, Einstein presented these “weak” equations and commented:

“Now you will ask me: Did God tell this into your ear? Unfortunately, not. But the way of proceeding is: identities between the equations must exist such that they are compatible. […] For their compatibility, i.e., that continuation from a [time-] slice is possible, there must be 6 identities. These identities are the means to find the equations. […]” ([163], p. 410).

^{130}

“I recently found a very forceful derivation for this system; it shows that the equations follow from the generalized field as naturally as the gravitational equations from the postulate of the symmetric field

g_{(ik)}. The examination of the theory still meets with almost unsurmountable mathematical difficulties […]” ([163], p. 423).^{131}

*The Meaning of Relativity*[150], and another letter to Besso of 15 April 1950 [163]. In both, he had not yet come to a final conclusion as to which must be preferred, the “weak” or the “strong” equations. To Besso, he explained that the “weak” equations could be derived from a variational principle and thus are “compatible”.

“On the other hand, one is pushed to the stronger system by formal considerations […]. But the compatibility for this stronger system is problematic; i.e., at first one does not know whether the manifold of its solutions is sufficiently large. After many errors and efforts I have succeeded in proving this compatibility” ([163], p. 439).

^{132}

*λ*-transformations. He wrote to Besso on 6 March 1952 that he had made “very decisive progress (a couple of weeks ago).” The field equations, hitherto not uniquely determined theoretically, now were known:

“Apart from [coordinate-] transformation invariance, invariance also is assumed for the transformations of the non-symmetric ‘displacement field’ \(\Gamma _{ik}^{\,\,\,\,\,l}:\,{(\Gamma _{ik}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,l})^*} = \Gamma _{ik}^{\,\,\,\,\,l} + \delta _i^l{\lambda _k}\), where

λ_{k}is an arbitrary vector. In this extended group, the old gravitational equations are no longer covariant […].”([163], p. 465)^{133}

We will come back to his final decision in Section 9.2.3.

#### 9.1.1 Birthday celebrations

“The temptation is great to mention here some of the endeavors that have been made to utilize these more general geometries for setting up unified field theories encompassing the electromagnetic field beside the gravitational one or even including not only the photons but also the electrons, nucleons, mesons, and whatnot. I shall not succumb to that temptation.” ([693], p. 539.)

“[…] by abstract reasoning from a few general assumptions. In this he is following the heroic method that proved so successful […] in the theory of relativity. Unfortunately there are many possible approaches, and since each requires a year or more of intensive computation, progress has been heartbreakingly slow.”

That Hoffmann himself was a little outside of mainstream physics can be seen from his remark that quantum theory, now dominating physics, “has developed a stature comparable to that of the theory of relativity.” ([281], p. 54/55.) Hoffmann was also one of the contributors to the special number of *Reviews in Modern Physics* “in commemoration of the seventieth birthday of Albert Einstein” issued in September 1949. Possibly, the best remembered paper among the 38 articles is Gödel’s “new type of cosmological solutions”, with local rotation and closed timelike world lines, now just named “Gödel’s solution” [227]. Only E. Straus wrote an article about UFT: “Some results in Einstein’s unified field theory” [592]. The others, big names and lesser known contributors except for the mathematician J. A. Schouten, shunned this topic. Schouten’s contribution surveyed classical meson theories in view of their making contact with the conformal group [539]. In connection with Yukawa’s prediction of a meson and with Hoffmann’s similarity geometry (cf. Section 3.1), he boldly stated: “[…] the conformal field theory failed to ask for a meson field, but the meson field came and asked for a conformal theory!” (ibid., p. 423.) Einstein’s oldest son Hans Albert reported on “Hydrodynamic Forces on a Rough Wall” [180].

“that these equations constitute the most natural generalization of the equations of gravitation. The proof of their physical usefulness is a tremendously difficult task, inasmuch as mere approximations will not suffice. The question is: ‘What are the everywhere regular solutions of these equations?’” ([153], p. 93–94.)

^{134}

### 9.2 Einstein 1950

#### 9.2.1 Alternative derivation of the field equations

*g*

_{(ik)}and the antisymmetric part

*g*

_{[ik ]}are tensors independently” ([149], p. 120). As the fundamental tensor is no longer considered symmetrical, the symmetry of the connection (as in Riemannian geometry) must also be weakened. By help of the conjugate quantities of Section 2.2.2 (Hermitian, transposition symmetry), Einstein’s constructive principle then is to ask “that conjugates should play equivalent roles in the field-equations.” According to him, this necessitates the introduction of the particular form (30) for the compatibility condition. In fact, for the conjugate:

^{135}

^{136}

^{137}

_{ml}nor \({\underset - K _{jk}}\) are Hermitian: We have \(- {\underset - {\tilde K} _{lm}} = {\Sigma _{ml}}\). The anti-Hermitian part of \({\underset - K _{jk}}\) is given by

*weak*field equations of his previous paper [148]. No physical interpretation of the mathematical objects appearing was given by him.

#### 9.2.2 A summary for a wider circle

*The Meaning of Relativity*, Einstein gave an enlarged introduction on 30 pages into previous versions of his UFT. The book was announced with fanfare in the

*Scientific American*[151]:

“[…] Einstein will set forth what some of his friends say is the long-sought unified field theory. The scientist himself has given no public hint of any such extraordinary development, but he is said to have told close associates at the Institute for Advanced Studies that he regards the new theory as his greatest achievement” ([564], p. 26).

*The New York Times*under the heading ‘New Einstein Theory Gives a Master Key to the Universe’.” ([469], p. 350.) Einstein’s comment to his friend M. Solovine, on 25 January 1950, was:

“Soon I will also send you the new edition of my little book with the appendix. A few weeks ago, it has caused a loud rustling noise in the newspaper sheets although nobody except the translator had really seen the thing. It’s really drole: laurels in advance” ([160], p. 96).

^{138}

^{139}(30), (201), and (202):

**I**”) “is therefore the natural generalization of the gravitational equation” ([150], p. 144). A little later in the Appendix he qualified his statement as holding “from a formal mathematical point of view […]” ([150], p. 150) because the manifold of solutions of “System

**I**” might be too small for physical purposes. Moreover, “System

**I**” could not be derived from a variational principle. He then set up such a variational principle

^{140}

*P*

_{ik}. As Einstein wanted to again get (267), he introduced another connection Γ* by \(\Gamma _{ij}^{\,\,\,\,\,k} = \Gamma _{ij}^{*\,\,k} - {2 \over 3}\Gamma _{\left[ i \right.}^*\delta _{\left. j \right]}^k\) which does

*not*satisfy \(\Gamma _j^* = \Gamma _{\left[ {im} \right]}^{*\,\,m} = 0\), such that just

*independent*components could be varied. The result is his “System

**Ia**”:

^{141}

*l*

_{i}, he introduced the term \({l_i}\,{\hat g^{[ir]}}_{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\,,r}\) into the Lagrangian and arrived at ‘System

**Ib**’, i.e., the weak field equations:

- (1)
(269) shows that there is no magnetic current density present (no magnetic monopoles),

- (2)
the electric current density (or its dual vector density) is represented by the tensor

*g*_{[ik ],l}+*g*_{[kl ],i}+*g*_{[li ], k}).

*g*

_{(ik)}describes the gravito-inertial, and

*g*

_{[ik ]}the electromagnetic fields.

^{142}

The “eminent author” himself confessed in a letter to Max Born of 12 December 1951:“Nevertheless, what has been written here shows how much of the subsequent formulation appears to be entirely arbitrary and how little of it has received physical interpretation. It is clear that a tremendous amount of investigation is required before others than the eminent author himself are enabled to form an opinion of the significance of this work” ([420], p. 129).

“Unfortunaletly, the examination of the theory is much too difficult for me. After all, a human being is only a poor wretch!” ([168], p. 258).

^{143}

Einstein’s former assistant and co-author Leopold Infeld sounded quite skeptical as well when he put the focus on equations of motion of charges to follow from “the new Einstein theory”. By referring to the 3rd Princeton edition of“Regarding Einstein’s ‘unified’ field theory I am extremely skeptical. It seems not only arbitrary to add a symmetrical and an anti-symmetrical tensor together but there is also no reason why Einstein’s system of equations should be compatible (the counting of identities between these equations given in the appendix of the new edition turned out to be incorrect). Certainly no work on similar lines will be done in Zürich.” ([490], p. 137–138)

*The Meaning of Relativity*he claimed that, in 1st approximation, “the equations of motion remain Newtonian and are uninfluenced by the electromagnetic field.” But he offered immediate comfort by the possibility “that this negative result is no fault of Einstein’s theory, but of the conventional interpretation by which it was derived” [303].

#### 9.2.3 Compatibility defined more precisely

In a long paragraph (§7) of Appendix II, of this 3rd Princeton edition, Einstein then asked about the definition of what he had termed “compatibility”. This meant that “the manifold of solutions” of the different systems of field equations “is extensive enough to satisfy the requirements of a physical theory” ([150], p. 150), or put differently, the field equations should not be overdetermined. In view of the “System **I**”’s containing four more equations, i.e., 84, than the 80 unknowns, this might become a difficulty. Starting from the Cauchy problem, i.e., the time development of a solution off an initial hypersurface, he counted differential equations and the variables to be determined from them.^{144} To give an example for his method, he first dealt with general relativity and obtained the result that the general solution contains four free functions of three (spacelike) coordinates — “apart from the functions necessary for the determination of the coordinate system” ([150], p. 155). The corresponding results for “Systems **Ia, (I)**” according to him turned out to be: 16, (6) arbitrary functions of three variables, respectively. In case “System **I**” should turn out to be too restrictive to be acceptable as a physical theory, Einstein then would opt for the “weak field equations” (“System **Ib**”). “However, it must be admitted that in this case the theory would be much less convincing than if system (**I**) can be preserved” ([150], p. 160).

This discussion calls back into memory the intensive correspondence Einstein had carried on between 1929 and 1932 with the French mathematician E. Cartan on an equivalent problem within the theory of teleparallelism, cf. Section 6.4.3 of Part I. At the time, he had asked whether his partial differential equations (PDEs) had a large enough set of solutions. Cartan had suggested an “index of generality” *s*_{0} for first-order systems in involution which, essentially, gave the number of arbitrarily describable free data (functions of 3 spacelike variables) on an initial hypersurface (*t* = *t*_{0}). He calculated such indices, for Maxwell’s equations with currents to be *s*_{0} = 8, and without *s*_{0} = 4, for Einstein’s vacuum field equations *s*_{0} = 4, (in this case 4 free functions of 4 variables exist^{145}), and of course, for Einstein’s field equations in teleparallelism theory. Note that Maxwell’s and Einstein’s vacuum field equations according to Cartan exhibit the same degree of generality. It had taken Cartan a considerable effort of convincing Einstein of the meaningfulness of his calculations also for physics ([116], pp. 114, 147, 174). Already in the 3rd Princeton edition of *The Meaning of Relativity*, in Appendix II [150], Einstein tried to get to a conclusion concerning the compatibility of his equations by counting the independent degrees of freedom but made a mistake. As mentioned above, W. Pauli had noticed this and combined it with another statement of his rejection of the theory. Compatibility was shown later by A. Lichnerowicz [369] (cf. Section 10.5).

*The Meaning of Relativity*, Appendix II [156] Cartan’s name is not mentioned. In the meantime, Mme. Choquet-Bruhat, during her stay at Princeton in 1951 and 1952, had discussed the Cauch-problem with Einstein such that he might have received a new impulse from her. To make the newly introduced concept of “strength” of a system of PDE’s more precise, he set out to count the number of free coefficients of each degree in a Taylor expansion of the field variables; if all these numbers are non-negative, he called the system of PDE’s “absolutely compatible”. He then carried out a calculation of the number of coefficients Ω

_{n}remaining “free for arbitrary choice” for the free wave equation, Maxwell’s vacuum equations, the Einstein vacuum equations, and particular field equations of UFT. Let us postpone the details and just list his results.

^{146}For the wave equation \({\Omega _n} = \left({\mathop {n + 3}\limits_n} \right)\,{6 \over n}\). According to him “the factor \({6 \over n}\) gives the fraction of the number of coefficients (for the degree

*n*≫ 1), which remain undetermined by the differential equation” ([156], p. 152). Similarly, he found for the Maxwell vacuum equations, \({\Omega _n} = \left({\mathop {n + 3}\limits_n} \right)\,{{12} \over n}\). Einstein noted that by introducing the vector potential

*A*

_{i}, and taking into account the Lorentz gauge, i.e., by dealing with

*The Meaning of Relativity*, Appendix II [158],

^{147}he again defined a system of PDE’s as “absolutely compatible” if, in a Taylor expansion of the field variable Φ, the number of

**free**

*n*-th order coefficients \({{{\partial _n}} \over {\partial {x^1}\partial {x^2} \cdots \partial {x^n}}}\Phi {\vert_P}\), at a point

*P*does not become negative. He then gave a name to the number of free coefficients calculated before: he called it “coefficient of freedom”. The larger this coefficient is, the less acceptable to him is the system of PDE’s. Let

*p*denote the number of field variables,

*s*the number of field equations of order

*q*, and

*w*the number of identities among the field equations in the form of PDE’s of order

*q′*. Then, writing

*z*in place of the previous Ω

_{n}, his formulas could be condensed into:

*z*

_{1}= 3(

*qs*−

*q*′

*w*) is the “coefficient of freedom.”

^{148}Again, Einstein calculated

*z*

_{1}for several examples, among them Maxwell’s vacuum field equations in flat space-time:

*p*= 6,

*s*= 8,

*q*= 1,

*q′*= 2,

*w*= 2. In agreement with the result from the previous edition, the calculation led him to

*a*= 0,

*z*

_{1}= 12. In contrast, it turned out that the “coefficient of freedom” for the gravitational vacuum field equations in general relativity, in the 2nd calculation became smaller, i.e.,

*z*

_{1}= 12 ([158], p. 139). Fortunately, now both equations have the same “index of generality” (Cartan) and the same “coefficient of freedom” (Einstein). Likewise, Einstein found

*z*

_{1}= 42 instead of the previous

*z*

_{1}= 45 for the “weak”, and

*z*

_{1}= 48 for a concurring system with transposition invariance such that he again adopted the “weak” one as before. (280) with its values for

*a, z*

_{1}is not yet the correct formula. Such a formula was derived for involutive, quasi-linear systems of PDEs by a group of relativists around F. Hehl at the University of Cologne at the end of the 1980s ([595], Eqs. (2.9), (2.10), [596]). By their work, also the relation between the Cartan coefficient of generality and Einstein’s coefficient of freedom has now been provided. According to M. Sué ([595], p. 398), it seems that Einstein’s coefficient of freedom is better suited for a comparison of the systems investigated than Cartan’s degré d’arbitraire. In mathematics, a whole subdiscipline has evolved dealing with the Cartan-Kähler theorem and the Cartan-Characters for systems of PDE’s. Cf. [57].

The fact that Einstein had to correct himself in his calculations of the “coefficient of freedom” already may raise a feeling that there exists a considerable leeway in re-defining field variables, number and order of equations etc. Moreover, he did not prove the independence of the *relative* order of “strength” for two PDE’s from mathematical manipulations affecting the form of the equations but not their physical content: remember (279), (282), (283). Regrettably, it is to be noted that Einstein’s last attempt to gain a reliable mathematical criterion for singling out one among the many possible choices for the field equations in UFT remained unconvincing.^{149}

#### 9.2.4 An account for a general public

*Scientific American*to report on his recent research, Einstein made it clear that he would not give

“[…] a detailed account of it before a group of readers interested in science. That should be done only with theories which have been adequately confirmed by experiment.” ([152], p. 14.)

^{150}

*E*

_{3}(System I), and

*E*

_{1},

*E*

_{2}(Systems Ia, Ib). He again stressed that

*E*

_{3}(System I) “is the only really natural generalization of the equations of gravitation”. However, it was not a

*compatible*system as were the other two.

“The skeptic will say: ‘It may well be true that this system of equations is reasonable from a logical standpoint. But this does not prove that it corresponds to nature.’ You are right, dear skeptic. Experience alone can decide the truth. Yet we have achieved something if we have succeeded in formulating a meaningful and precise question.” ([152], p. 17.)

Painstaking efforts and probably new mathematics would be required before the theory could be confronted with experiment. The article is illustrated by a drawing of Einstein’s head by the American artist Ben Shahn ([152], p. 17).

There were not only skeptics but people like Dr. C. P. Johnson in the Chemistry Department of Harvard University who outrightly criticized “Dr. Albert Einstein’s recent unified field theory” [311]. He pointed out that the theory permits a class of similarity solutions, i.e., with *g*_{ik} (*x*^{l}) also *′g*_{ik} (*kx*^{l}) solves the field equations. For a system of two charged and one uncharged massive bodies he qualitatively constructed a contradiction with Coulomb’s law. Einstein replied with a letter printed right after Johnson’s by stating that if solutions depending upon a continuous parameter exist, “then the field equations must prevent the coexistence within one system of such elementary solutions pertaining to arbitrary values of their parameters.” The underlying reason was that “for a system of field equations to be acceptable from a physical point of view, it has to account for the atomic structure of reality.” This would entail that regions of space corresponding to a ‘particle’ have discrete masses and charges. The coexistence of similar solutions “in one and the same world” would make the theory unacceptable [161]. As we shall see, the situation of Einstein’s UFT was worse: it did not lead to Coulomb’s law — at least not in the lowest approximations. See Sections 9.3.3, 9.6, and Section 10.3.2.

His Italian colleague Bruno Finzi was convinced that the final aim had been reached:“At long last, the generalization of gravitation from a formal point of view now is fully convincing and unambiguous — unless the Lord has chosen a totally different way which no one can imagine.”

^{151}

“[…] all physical laws laws of the macrocosm reduce to two geometrical identities […]. Therefore, the game is over, and the geometric model of the macrocosm has been constructed.”([200], p. 83)

^{152}

However, at the end of his article, Finzi pointed out that it might be difficult to experimentally verify the theory, and thought it necessary to warn that even if such an empirical base had been established, this theory would have to be abandoned after new effects not covered by it were observed.

### 9.3 Einstein 1953

*fourth*edition of Einstein’s

*The Meaning of Relativity*, invariance with regard to

*λ*-transformations was introduced as a new symmetry principle (cf. (52) of Section 2.2.3). Also transposition invariance is now claimed to be connected to the “indifference of the theory” (UFT) with respect “to the sign of electricity” ([156], p. 144). This interpretation rests on Einstein’s identification of the electric current density with

*g*

_{[ik], l}+

*g*

_{[kl], i}+

*g*

_{[li], k}. Einstein still grappled with the problem of how to set up a convincing system of field equations. As in the previous edition, he included (269) as an “a priori condition” in his variational principle by help of a (1-form)-multiplier

*σ*

_{i}. However, he renounced using Γ

_{i}= 0. Without specification of the Lagrangian \({\mathcal H}\), from \(\delta \int {{\mathcal H}d\tau} = \int {(\hat V_{\,\,\,\,\,\,l}^{ik}\delta \Gamma _{ik}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,l} + {W_{ik}}\,\delta {{\hat g}^{ik}})d\tau} = 0\) the field equations follow —

*without*use of the multiplier-term — to be:

*with*use of the multiplier-term —

*σ*

_{i}led to the equations (named “System II” by Einstein)

*weak*field equations. The road to the weak field equations (287)–(290) followed here still did not satisfy Einstein, because in it the skew-symmetric parts of both the metric and the connection could also be taken to be purely imaginary. In order to exclude this possibility and work with a

*real*connection, he introduced

*λ*-transformations and presented a further derivation of the field equations. He set up a variational principle invariant under the

*λ*-transformation and arrived at the same system of field equations as before. The prize payed is the exclusion of a physical interpretation of the torsion tensor.

In a discussion covering twelve pages, Einstein again took up the question of “compatibility” from the previous edition and introduced the concept of the “strength” of a system of differential equations in order to bolster up his choice of field equation. A new principle applying to physical theories in general is put forward: “The system of equations is to be chosen so that the field quantities are determined *as strongly as possible* ” ([156], p. 149). In Section 9.2.3, a detailed discussion of this new principle has been given such that we need not dwell on it. The paucity of physical input into Einstein’s approach to UFT becomes obvious here. May it suffice to say that according to the new principle the weak field equations (277), (278) are called “stronger” than the strong field equations (268). However, this has lead to the misleading labeling of the system II as the “strong system” [704]. The relation of geometrical objects to physical observables remained unchanged when compared to the 3rd edition ([150]). Einstein saw a close relationship to Maxwell’s theory only in the linear approximation where “the system decomposes into two sets of equations, one for the symmetric components of the field, and the other for the antisymmetric components.[…] In the rigorous theory this independence no longer holds.” ([156], p. 147.)

*Meaning of Relativity*he explained himself in this way:

“[…] I see in the present situation no possible way other than a pure field theory, which then however has before it the gigantic task of deriving the atomic character of energy. […] We are […] separated by an as yet insurmountable barrier from the possibility of confronting the theory with experiment. Nevertheless, I consider it unjustified to assert, a priori, that such a theory is unable to cope with the atomic character of energy.” ([156], p. 165.)

*Scientific American*. He claimed “that there is an official and generally accepted theory of elementary particles, known as the ‘quantum field theory’.” According to him, while there still was disagreement about the finer details of the theory and its applications:

“The minority who reject the theory, although led by the great names of Albert Einstein and P. A. M. Dirac, do not yet have any workable alternative to put in its place.” ([137], p. 57.)

Such kind of sober judgment did not bother *The New York Times* which carried an almost predictable headline: “Einstein Offers New Theory to Unify Law of the Cosmos.” ([469], p. 350.)

Privately, in a letter to M. Solovine of 28 May 1953, Einstein seemed less assured. Referring to the appendix of this 4th edition of “*The Meaning of Relativity* ”, he said: “[…] Of course, it is the attempt at a theory of the total field; but I did not wish to give the thing such a demanding name. Because I do not know, whether there is physical truth in it. From the viewpoint of a deductive theory, it may be perfect (economy of independent concepts and hypotheses).” ([160], p. 96).^{153}

#### 9.3.1 Joint publications with B. Kaufman

^{154}[172]. In a separate note, as kind of a preface he presented his views on quantum theory, i.e., why he still was trying “[…] to solve the quantum riddle on another path or, to at least help for preparing such a solution.” ([155], p. 4.)

^{155}He expressed his well-known epistemological position that something like a “real state” of a physical system exists objectively, independent of any observation or measurement. A list of objections to the majority interpretation of quantum theory was given. At the end of the note, a link to UFT was provided:

“My endeavours to complete general relativity by a generalization of the gravitational equations owe their origin partially to the following conjecture: A reasonable general relativistic field theory could perhaps provide the key to a more perfect quantum theory. This is a modest hope, but in no way a creed.” ([155], p. 14.)

^{156}

*weak*field equations of UFT given before was presented. At first, it looked weird, but in referring to a result of the “researches of E. Schrödinger” (without giving a reference, though) Einstein & Kaufman took over Schrödinger’s “star”-connection:

_{k}= 0 holds which leads to simplifications. Under a

*λ*-transformation the Ricci curvature is not invariant [cf. (87)]. In order to make the variational principle invariant, due to

*a priori*-) condition is needed:

*weak*field equations:

Here, the covariant derivative refers to the connection *Γ and \({\underset * K _{(ik)}} \equiv {\underset - K _{ik}}(*\Gamma)\).

*strong*field equations. It rests partially on their failure to guarantee the possibility to superpose weak fields. The method used is a weak-field expansion of the metric and the affine connection in a small parameter

*∊*:

^{157}

In an appendix to the paper with title “Extension of the Relativistic Group” [172], Einstein combined the “group” of coordinate transformations with the *λ*-transformations to form a larger transformation group *U*. (cf. the letter to Besso mentioned in Section 9.1.) He then discussed the occurring geometric objects as representations of this larger group and concluded: “The importance of the extension of the transformation group to *U* consists in a practically unique determination of the field equation.”([172], p. 341.)^{158}

The next paper with Bruria Kaufman may be described as applied mathematics [173]. Einstein returned to the problem, already attacked in the paper with E. Straus, of solving (30) for the connection in terms of the metric and its derivatives. The authors first addressed the question: “What are necessary and sufficient conditions for constant signature of the asymmetric metric-field to hold everywhere in space-time?” At first, it was to be shown “that the symmetric part *g*_{(ik)} of the tensor *g*_{ik} is a Riemannian metric with constant signature”. For a proof, the conditions det(*g*_{(ik)}) ≠ 0 and a further algebraic inequality were needed. In addition, the connection Γ, calculated from \({\hat g_{\mathop + \limits^i \mathop - \limits^k \left\| l \right.}} = 0\), had to be finite at any point and “algebraically determined”. This is meant in the sense of interpreting \({\hat g_{\mathop + \limits^i \mathop - \limits^k \left\| l \right.}} = 0\) as an inhomogeneous linear equation for the components of Γ. The situation was complicated by the existence of the algebraic invariants of the non-symmetric *g*_{ik} as well as by the difficulty to solve for the connection as a functional of the metric tensor. Although not necessary for a solution of the field equations, according to the authors it is “of interest to give a closed expression for the Γ as a function of the *g*_{ik} and its first derivatives.” This problem had been addressed before and partial results achieved by V. Hlavatý [258, 260], and S. N. Bose [52].^{159} The papers by M.-A. Tonnelat published earlier and presenting a solution were not referred to at all [622, 623, 630, 629].

*g*

_{(ik)}is given a Lorentz signature. By using special coordinates in which \(g_{\,\,\,i}^k = {\rho _i}\delta _{\,\,\,i}^k\) (no summation on the index i), it can be seen that “\({\rho _1} = {1 \over {{\rho ^2}}}\) is on the unit circle from which the point −1 has been excluded”; the other two roots \({\rho _3} = {1 \over {{\rho ^4}}}\) are positive. It is shown in the paper that among the three algebraic invariants to be built from \(g_{\,\,\,i}^k = {g^{ks}}{g_{si}}\) only two are independent:

^{”}the authors derive ([173], p. 237):

#### 9.3.2 Einstein’s 74th birthday (1953)

*The New York Times*carried an article about Einstein’s unified field theory on the front page [471]. It announced the appearance of the 4th Princeton edition of

*The Meaning of Relativity*with its Appendix II, and reported Einstein as having stated that the previous version of 1950 of the theory had still contained one important difficulty. According to him: “[…] This last problem of the theory now finally has been solved in the past months.”

^{160}Probably, this refers to Einstein’s new way of calculating his “coefficient of freedom” introduced for mirroring the “strength” of partial differential equations. In a letter to Carl Seelig of 14 September 1953, Einstein tried to explain the differences between the 3rd and the 4th edition of

*The Meaning of Relativity*:

“A new theory often only gradually assumes a stable, definite form when later findings allow the making of a specific choice among the possibilities given a priori. This development is closed now in the sense that the form of the field laws is completely fixed. — The theory’s mathematical consistence cannot be denied. Yet, the question about its physical foundation still is completely unsettled. This follows from the fact that comparison with experience is bound to the discovery of exact solutions of the field equations which seems impossible at the time being.”

^{161}([570], p. 401–402)

#### 9.3.3 Critical views: variant field equation

Already in 1950, Infeld had pointed to the fact that the equations of motion for particles following from Einstein’s UFT (weak field equations), calculated in the same way as in general relativity, did not lead to the Lorentz equations of motion [304]. This result was confirmed by Callaway in 1953. Callaway identified the skew part of the fundamental tensor with the electromagnetic field and applied a quasistatic approximation built after the methods of Einstein and Infeld for deriving equations of motion for point singularities. He started from Einstein’s weak field equations and showed that (208) could not influence the equations of motion. His conclusion was that he could reduce “Einstein’s new unified field theory to something like Maxwell’s equations in a sufficiently low approximation”, but could not obtain the Lorentz equation for charged particles treated as singularities in an electromagnetic field [69].

*g*

_{ij}=

*a*

_{ij}+

*ik*

_{ij}and its 1st derivatives only [342, 343]:

^{162}

*p*real or imaginary, and

^{163}

*b*

_{ij}is the inverse of

*b*

^{ij}.

*I*

_{ikl}:=

*k*

_{[ik ],l}+

*k*

_{[kl ],i}+

*k*

_{[li ],k}is connected with the electrical 4-current density

*J*

^{r}through

*I*

_{ikl}:=

*∊*

_{iklr}

*J*

^{r}.

In fact, as Bonnor then showed in the lowest approximation (linear in the gravitational, quadratic in the electromagnetic field), the static spherically symmetric solution contains only two arbitrary constants *e, m* besides *p*^{2} which can be identified with elementary charge and mass; they are separately selectable [33]. However, in place of the charge appearing in the solutions of the Einstein-Maxwell theory, now for *e*^{2} the expression *e*^{2}*p*^{2}, and for \(e,\,{{me} \over {{p^2}}}\) occurred in the same solution. The definition of mass seemed to be open, now. For vanishing electromagnetic field, the solution reduced to the solution for the gravitational field of general relativity.

In a discussion concerning the relation of matter and geometry, viz. matter as a “source” of geometry or as an intrinsic part of it, exemplified by the question of the validity of Mach’s principle, J. Callaway tried to mediate between the point of view of A. Einstein with his unified field theory already incorporating matter, geometrically, and the standpoint of J. A. Wheeler who hoped for additional relations between matter and space-time fixing the matter tensor as in the case of the Einstein-Maxwell theory ([70], p. 779). Callaway concluded that “if the approach of field theory is accepted, it is necessary to construct a theory in which space-time and matter enter as equals.” But he would not accept UFT as an alternative to quantum theory.

### 9.4 Einstein 1954/55

*λ*-transformations became the crucial factor. In the first approach (§1), instead of the previously used connection Γ, Einstein and Kaufman introduced another one, Γ*, containing four new variables (a 1-form) Λ

_{k}“supernumerary to the description of the field”, and defined by:

_{k}were treated as independent variables; after the variation could be fixed arbitrarily (“normed”). This trick allowed that four variational field equations could replace four equations put in by hand as had been the equation Γ

_{k}= 0 in earlier approaches. The following relation resulted:

_{k}the choice \({\Lambda _k} = {2 \over 3}{\Gamma _k}\) was made leading to \(\Gamma _k^* = 0\). Although the wanted transposition-invariant field equations did come out, the authors were unhappy about the trick introduced. “The reason for our difficulties is that we require the field equations to be transposition-invariant, but we start out from a variational function which does not have that property. The question arises naturally whether we cannot find a form of the variational function which will itself be transposition-invariant, […].” ([174], p. 131.) In order to obtain such a Lagrangian, they replaced the connection by a quantity \(U_{ik}^{\,\,\,\,l}\) called “pseudo-tensor”. It is transforming like a tensor only under

*linear*coordinate transformations (§2–§3):

*λ*-transformation (52) the “pseudo-tensor”

*U*transforms as:

*λ*-transformations into (310), five identities called “Bianchi-identities” result. Modulo the field equations,

*The Meaning of Relativity*, Appendix II [158].

^{164}In “A note on the fifth edition” dated December 1954, Einstein wrote:

“For I have succeeded — in part in collaboration with my assistant B. Kaufman — in simplifying the derivations as well as the form of the field equations. The whole theory becomes thereby more transparent, without changing its content” ([158], page before p. 1).

^{165}

From a letter to his friend Solovine in Paris of 27 February 1955, we note that Einstein was glad: “At least, yet another significant improvement of the general theory of the gravitational field (non-symmetric field theory) has been found. However, the thus simplified equations also cannot be examined by the facts because of mathematical difficulties”. ([160], p. 138)^{166} In this edition of *The Meaning of Relativity’*, he made a “remark on the physical interpretation”. It amounted to assign \(\hat g_{\,\,\,\,\,,s}^{[is]}\) to the (vanishing) magnetic current density and \({1 \over 2}{\eta ^{iklm}}{g_{[ik],l}}\) to the electric current density.

*ĝ*

^{ik}must satisfy the 16 + 64 field equations (311), (312). The argument is put forward that due to

*λ*-invariance (identification of connections with different

*λ*) the 64 Γ-variables were reduced to 63 plus an additional identity.

However, it is to be noted that in the 5th Princeton edition the“In a system with no

λ-invariance, there are 64 Γ and no counterbalancing identity. This is the deeper reason for the relative weakness of systems which lackλ-invariance. We hold to the principle that the stronger system has to be preferred to any weaker system, as long as there are no special reasons to the contrary.” ([174], p. 137.)

*λ*-transformation is reduced to

*λ*

_{k}=

*∂*

_{k}

*λ*(Eq. (5) on p. 148). In a footnote, Appendix II of the 4th Princeton edition of

*The Meaning of Relativity*is given as a reference for the concept of “strength” of a system of differential equations (cf. Section 9.2.3). W. Pauli must have raised some critical questions with regard to the construction of the paper’s Lagrangian from irreducible quantities. In her answer of 28 February 1956, B. Kaufman defended the joint work with Einstein by discussing an expression (

*α*

_{1}

*g*

^{ik}+

*α*

_{2}

*g*

^{ki})

*R*

_{ik}=

*γ*

^{ik}

*R*

_{ik}: “Now the point is here that

*g*

^{ik}was introduced in our paper merely as a multiplying function such as to make, together with

*R*

_{ik}, a scalar. Hence

*g*

^{ik}can just as well be this multiplier. The field equations we would get from this Lagrangian would be identical with the equations in our paper, except that they would be expressed in terms of

*g*

^{ik}.” As to scalars quadratic in curvature she wrote: “ […] our paper does not claim that the system we give is 100% unique. In order to do that one would have to survey all possible additional tensors which could be used in the Lagrangian. We only considered the most ‘reasonable’ ones.” ([492], pp. 526–527.)

Until 1955, more than a dozen people had joined the research on UFT and had published papers. Nevertheless, apart from a mentioning of H. Weyl’s name (in connection with the derivation of the “Bianchi”-identities) no other author is referred to in the paper. B. Kaufman was well aware of this and would try to mend this lacuna in the same year, after Einstein had passed away.

At the “Jubilee Conference” in Bern in July 1955,^{167} based on her recent work with A. Einstein [174], B. Kaufman gave an account “[…] of the logical steps through which one goes when trying to set up this generalization”, i.e., of general relativity to the “theory of the non-symmetric field” ([322], p. 227). After she presented essential parts of the joint paper with Einstein, Kaufman discussed its physical interpretation and some of the consequences of the theory. As in [148, 150], and [156], the electric current density is taken to be proportional to *g*_{[ik ],l} + *g*_{[kl ],i} + *g*_{[li ],k}. From this identification, transposition invariance receives its physical meaning as showing that “all equations of the theory shall be invariant under a change of the sign of electric charge” ([322], p. 229). With (252), i.e., \({\hat g^{[ik]}}_{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,,k} = 0\), holding again in the theory, *ĝ*^{i}^{4} (with *i* = 1, 2, 3) is identified with the components of the *magnetic* field. In the linear approximation, the field equations decompose into the linear approximation of the gravitational field equations of general relativity and into the weaker form of Maxwell’s equations already shown in (210), (211) of Section 7.3.

*positive*mass) are locally Euclidean, could not be carried over to UFT. This was due to the complications caused by the field equations (311), (312). While (311) could be solved, in principle, for the \(U_{ik}^{\,\,\,l}\), as functions of \({{\hat g}^{ik}},\hat g_{\,\,\,\,\,,l}^{ik}\), its subsequent substitution into (312) led to equations too complicated to be solved — except in very special cases. In his summary of the conference, Pauli mocked Kaufman’s report:

“We have seen how Einstein and Mrs. Kaufman struggled heroically […], and how this fight has been led with the particular weapon of the

λ-transformation. Certainly, all this is formally very correct; however, I was unable to make sense of theλ-transformations, either physically or geometrically.”[486]^{168}

The search for solutions of the weak field equations had begun already with exact spherically symmetric, static solution derived by a number of authors (cf. [475, 31, 32]; see Sections 8.3, and 9.6).

*λ*plays the role of cosmological constant. At first, in the affine theory,

*g*

_{ik}is

*defined*by the l.h.s. of (315), but then this equations is read like an Einstein equation for the metric.

“[…] as anything like a well-established theory. It must be confessed that we have as yet no glimpse of how to represent electrodynamic interaction, say Coulomb’s law. This is a serious desideratum. On the other hand we ought not to be disheartened by proofs, offered recently by L. Infeld, M. Ikeda and others, to the effect, that this theory cannot possibly account for the known facts about electrodynamic interaction. Some of these attempts are ingenious, but none of them is really conclusive.” ([557], reprint 1954, p. 119.)

### 9.5 Reactions to Einstein-Kaufman

*X*

_{i}.

^{169}Besides obtaining, in first approximation, Einstein’s vacuum field equations of general relativity and one set of Maxwell’s equations, he gave as the second set:

_{i}” (his notation for

*X*

_{i}). Here, \({g_{ik}} = {\eta _{ik}} + {\underset 1 g _{ik}} + {\underset 2 g _{ik}} + \ldots.\).

In 2nd order, the charge-current tensor was defined by \({\underset 2 s}\;_{ijk} = {\underset 2 g}\;_{[ij],k} + {\underset 2 g}\;_{[jk],i} + {\underset 2 g}\;_{[ki],j}\), and the wave equation then \({\eta ^{rs}}{\partial _r}{\partial _s}{\underset 2 g}\;_{[ik]} = {\underset 2 s}\;_{ijk} + {\eta ^{rm}}{\eta ^{sn}}{\underset 1 g}\; _{[rs]}{\underset 1 B}\;_{nmik}\). \({\underset 2 B}\;_{nmik}\) is a linear combination of the 2nd derivatives of \({\underset 1 g _{ik}}\). However, Schrödinger rejected this equation: “it is not invariant” ([559], p. 19). Since 1952, Cornelius Lanczos had come to Dublin, first as a visiting, then as a senior professor, and, ultimately, as director at the Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies. In his paper, Schrödinger acknowledged “discussions with my friend professor Cornel Lanczos” ([559], p. 20).

“[…] in the future, no reason exists for connecting the metric more closely to the electromagnetic field, and perhaps also to the meson field.” ([680], p. 141.)

^{170}

One year later, consistent with this, and with Einstein’s death “in April 1955, Schrödinger became quite depressed, for he was now convinced that his unified field theory was no longer tenable” ([446], p. 326). In any case, there is no further published research on UFT by him.

*S*

_{m}(Γ) the torsion vector. Mishra then linearized the metric and showed the result to be equivalent to the linearized Einstein-Straus equations (cf. Section 7.3) In the same paper, Mishra suggested another set of field equations by starting from the transposed Ricci tensor and making it transposition invariant in the same manner as Einstein and Kaufman did in their case.

In a joint paper with M. L. Abrol, also directed to the Einstein-Kaufman version of Einstein’s theory, Mishra claimed: “It is shown […] that Infeld’s method [cf. [304]] of approximation, to find the equations of motion of charged particles from the system of field equations, fails in this particular theory” [437]. This was due to some unknown terms in the 2nd and 3rd order of the approximation. After a modification of the field equations according to the method of Bonnor [cf. [34]], the Coulomb force appeared in 4th order.

### 9.6 More exact solutions

#### 9.6.1 Spherically symmetric solutions

*v*≠ 0,

*w*≠ 0 by Wyman [709] which means that both, electric and magnetic fields, are now present. Wyman’s three different solutions of the weak field equations contain one arbitrary function of the radial coordinate

*r*, each. Wyman questioned the physical interpretation of

*g*

_{(ij)}=

*h*

_{ij}and

*g*

_{[ij ]}=

*k*

_{ij}as standing for the gravitational field and the electromagnetic field, respectively. He built another expression:

*a*

_{ij}is chosen as a metric, then the unique solution of general relativity in this sss case, e.i., the Schwarzschild solution, results. Although Wyman’s construction was very artificial, it clearly exemplified the unsurmountable impediment to UFT: the “embarras de richesses” in mathematical objects.

Wyman also questioned the boundary condition used at spacelike infinity: *limes*_{r→ ∞}*g*_{ab} = *η*_{ab}, where *η*_{ab} is the Minkowski metric. By looking at his (or Papapetrou’s) sss solutions, he showed that different boundary condition could be set up leading to different solutions: *vr*^{2} → 0 for *r* → ∞ or *v* → 0 for *r* → ∞.

*λ*), we must distinguish the solutions suggested. In the case of sss fields, only one additional field equation, e.g.,

*R*

_{[23]}= 0, separates the strong from the weak equations. For the

*strong*equations with

*λ*= 0, Bonnor [31] obtained the general exact solution in the cases for which either a magnetic or an electric field is present. He also generalized Papapetrou’s solution for the

*weak*equations to the case where the function

*v*is real or imaginary. The solutions describe spread out charges while the masses are banned into singularities. All solutions display an infinite set of “singular” surfaces between the radial coordinate

*r*= 2

*m*and

*r*= ∞.

^{171}For some time, after a note by Bandyopadhyay [8], who claimed that for the

*strong*equations

*m e*= 0 where

*m, e*are the parameters for mass and charge,

^{172}a discussion took place whether isolated massless magnetic monopoles could exist. Since 1948, Papapetrou and Schrödinger had changed the assignment of components of

*k*

_{ij}to the electric and magnetic fields; now

*g*

_{[23]},

*g*

_{[31]},

*g*

_{[12]}stood for the electric field [479]. Ikeda, in a paper of 1955, claimed to have shown “that a single magnetic pole cannot exist in the Einstein new theory, as in the Maxwell theory” ([298], p. 272).

^{173}This result depended on Ikeda’s identification of the electromagnetic field with

*h*= det(−

*h*

_{ab}). In 1960, Bandyopadhyay came back to the question and claimed that “the ‘stronger’ equations will not allow isolated magnetic poles with mass whereas the ‘weaker’ equations will allow the existence of such entities” ([10], p. 427). Bonnor’s second paper of 1952 dealt with the

*strong*equations in the case

*vw*≠ 0. Again, the exact solutions described spread out charges of both signs with an infinity of singular surfaces. They were unphysical because they contained no parameter for the mass of the sources [32].

In her book, M.-A. Tonnelat discussed these solutions; her new contribution consisted in the calculation of the components of her connection Δ — Schrödinger’s star connection (27) — and the Ricci *W* (Δ)-tensor formed from it for the more general case of *time-dependent* spherically symmetric fields [629], ([632], p. 71, 73). By help of this calculation, her collaborator Stamatia Mavridès could present a general result: for *g*_{[23]} = 0, *g*_{[10]} ≠ 0 (as the non-vanishing components of *k*_{ij}) only *static* exact spherically symmetric solutions do exist [402]. Later in Italy, F. De Simoni published another generalization of Wyman’s and Bonnor’s solutions for the *weak* field equations; he used the Ricci tensor of Einstein and Straus (73) made Hermitian, i.e., \({P_{ij}} + {\tilde P_{ij}}\). His paper is not referred to in Tonnelat’s book [114]. J. R. Vanstone mistakenly believed he had found time-dependent spherically symmetric solutions, but the time dependency can be easily removed by a coordinate transformation [668]. Also B. R. Rao had calculated some, but not all components of the connection for the case of a time-dependent spherically symmetric field but had failed to find a time-dependent solution [502].

Unfortunately, all this work did not bring further insight into the physical nature of the sss solutions. The only physically “usable” solution remained Papapetrou’s. He also proved the following theorem: “Spherically-symmetric solutions periodical in time of the “weak” field equations satisfying the boundary conditions *ĝ*^{ik} → *η*^{ik} for *r* → ∞ are, in 1st approximation, identical to solutions of the “strong”field equations” [478].

#### 9.6.2 Other solutions

^{174}and his German colleague Hans Zassenhaus

^{175}cast doubt on any hope for a better understanding of the physical contents of UFT by a study of exact solutions. They investigated solutions of Einstein’s non-symmetrical UFT with

*vanishing*curvature tensor: in this case weak and strong field equations coincide. Unlike for flat space-time in general relativity, a large class of solutions resulted; a situation which, according to the authors, “[…] merely adds to the confusion and indicates that the form of the theory is far from complete”. They went on: “However, as far as a satisfactory physical interpretation of such a theory goes, almost complete chaos seems to result.” ([710], p. 228.) Strong words, indeed, but not without reason:

“[…] for a theory based on a non-symmetric tensor an infinity of tensors of all orders exist. The only hope to extract from this maze the proper mathematical expressions to use for physical quantities would thus have to be physical in nature. So far no such physical assumptions have been put forward” ([710], p. 229).

*F*

_{ij}=

*k*

_{ij}electromagnetic field,

*h*

_{ij}gravitational potential) “would attribute the electromagnetic field to a distribution of charge along the infinite planes

*y*=

*±x*or along any of the equipotential

*x*

^{2}−

*y*

^{2}=

*constant*.” For a weak gravitational field, the Newtonian potential would be \(V = {1 \over 8}({x^2} + {y^2})\) “corresponding to a distribution of mass of density \({1 \over 2}\) inside an infinite cylinder”. This is due to the approximated Newtonian equations of motion following from the geodesic equation for

*h*

_{ij}. Hence, for this solution, mass and charge are unrelated.

This result casts into doubt much of the work on exact solutions independently of any specific assignment of mathematical objects to physical variables. It vindicated Schrödinger’s opinion that exact solutions were of useless for a better understanding of the particle-aspect of the theory; cf. the quotation at the end of Section 8.2. Nevertheless, the work of assembling a treasure of exact solutions continued. In 1954, it had still been supported by Kilmister & Stephenson in this way: “The true test of this theory [i.e., Einstein’s weak field equations] as an adequate description of the physical world must await exact solutions of the field equations” [331].

“The big difficulty [of UFT] lies in the lack of a method for deriving singularity-free exact solutions which alone are physically interesting. Yet the bit we have been able to calculate has strengthened my trust in this theory.” (Einstein to Pauli, April 1, 1948 quoted from [489])

^{176}

How would he have dealt with the fact, unearthed in 1958, that such non-singular solutions not always offered a convincing physical interpretation, or even were unphysical?

The symmetry of so-called “1-dimensional” gravitational fields of general relativity, i.e., those for which the metric components depend on only a single coordinate, is high enough to try and solve for them field equations of UFT. In fact, already in 1951, Bandyopadhyay had found such a solution of the *weak* equations with *g*_{[10]} ≠ 0, *g*_{[23]} = 0, *g*_{22} = *g*_{33} and had taken it as describing an infinite charged plate [7]. In 1953, E. Clauser presented another such 1-dimensional field as a solution of the *weak* equations with *g*_{22} ≠ *g*_{33} and saw it as representing a magnetostatic field [79]. B. R. Rao in 1959 generalized Bandyopadhyay’s solution to the case *g*_{[10]} × *g*_{[23]} ≠ 0 without attempting to provide a physical interpretation [503].

*σ*,

*ρ*functions of

*x*

^{1},

*x*

^{2},

*x*

^{3}−

*x*

^{0}have been given by Takeno [601].

### 9.7 Interpretative problems

Already up to here, diverse assignments of geometrical objects to physical quantities (observables) were encountered. We now assemble the most common selections.

#### 9.7.1 a) Gravitational Field

*not*coincide asymptotically, or far from the assumed location of the point source at

*r*= 0, i.e., for

*r*→ ∞, with the corresponding solution of the Einstein-Maxwell equations (Reissner-Nordström) [475], a discussion of the relation between geometrical objects and physical observables arose. Perhaps the metric chosen to describe the gravitational potential ought not to be identified with

*h*

_{ik}! Let the inverse of

*g*

_{ik}be given by

*l*

_{ik}=

*l*

_{(ik)}≠

*h*

_{ik}of

*l*

^{ik}as the genuine metric ([371], p. 288). Schrödinger had already worked with it. A related suggestion made by several doctoral students of M.-A. Tonnelat (J. Hély, Pham Tan Hoang, M. Lenoir) was to use

*a*

_{ij}with \({a_{is}}{a^{ks}} = \delta _i^k\) and \({a^{ij}} = \sqrt {{h \over g}} {h^{ij}}\) as metric [250, 271, 272], ([359], p. 92). In Section 9.6.1 we have seen that by another, if only very contrived definition of the metric, complete separation of the gravitational and electromagnetic fields could be achieved: the Schwarzschild solution could be made part of an exact solution of unified field theory [709]. The torsion tensor appeared in the definition of this metric.

#### 9.7.2 b) Electromagnetic Field and Charge Currents

*k*

_{ij}=

*g*

_{[ij ]}was taken over by the majority ([147], p. 583). For dimensional reasons, this interpretation implies that a constant of dimension “length” will appear in the theory. In her discussion of two possibilities, St. Mavridès suggested \({a_{ij}} = \sqrt {{g \over h}} {h_{ij}}\) for the metric and \({S_{ij}} = \sqrt {{g \over h}{k_{ij}}}\) for the electromagnetic field [403, 400, 401, 404]. The first choice was supported by Pham Tan Hoang [271, 272]. Although making the electrical field regular at

*r*= 0:

^{177}[42], cf. also Section 5. The fundamental invariants of the electromagnetic field now are given by

*h*

_{pq}

*h*

_{rs}

*m*

^{pr}

*m*

^{qs}and \({{\sqrt {- 1}} \over {\sqrt m}}\) with

*l*= det(

*l*

_{ij}),

*m*= det(m

^{ij}) ([641], p. 345); cf. Section 5. Mme. Tonnelat, in her books, also discussed in detail how to relate observables as the gravitational and electromagnetic fields, the electric current density, or the energy-momentum tensor of matter to the geometric objects available in the theory ([632], Chapter VI; [636, 382]; cf. also Section 10.2.1). For the electromagnetic field tensor, four possibilities were claimed by her to be preferable:

^{178}

*m*

_{,ik};

*m*

^{ik};

*K*

_{[ik ]}; ϵ

^{ijkl}

*m*

_{kl}. Tonnelat opted for

*m*

_{ik}, and also for the electric current density vector \({J^i} = {1 \over {6\sqrt {- h}}}{\epsilon ^{ijkl}}({m_{[ij],k}} + {m_{[ki],j}} + {m_{[jk],i}})\). The field induction is defined via: \({\hat P^{ik}} = {{\partial {\mathcal L}} \over {\partial {m_{ik}}}}\). Schrödinger had identified the electromagnetic field with the anti-symmetrical part

*K*

_{[ik ]}of the Ricci tensor [545, 549]; this suggestion was also made in [138, 141, 5, 93]. On the other hand, Eq. (235) can be satisfied by \({\hat g^{[ij]}} = {1 \over 2}{\epsilon ^{ijkl}}({\partial _k}{A_l} - {\partial _l}{A_k})\) such that

*F*

_{ij}:=

*ϵ*

_{ijkl}

*ĝ*

^{[kl ]}=

*∂*

_{i}

*A*

_{j}−

*∂*

_{j}

*A*

_{i}would naturally constitute the relationship to the electromagnetic field tensor

*F*

_{ij}[203]. In this context, the electromagnetic induction would be \({H^{ij}} \sim {1 \over 2}{\epsilon ^{ijkl}}{k_{kl}}\), and alternatively, ∼

*ϵ*

^{ljkl}

*K*

_{kl}([650], p. 370). We learned above in (323) of Section 9.6.1 that M. Ikeda used yet another definition of the electromagnetic field tensor.

^{179}Finzi proposed yet another expression: \({j^k} = {1 \over 2}{\epsilon ^{kpqr}}{\overset 0 \nabla _p}{K_{qr}}\) ([473], p. 288). Late in his life, Einstein gave \(\hat g_{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\,,s}^{[is]}\) the interpretation of magnetic current density [158].

An ambiguity always present is the assignment of the electric and magnetic fields to the components *k*_{i0} or *k*_{ab}, *a,b* =1, 2, 3, or vice versa in order to arrive at the correct Maxwell’s equations.

Another object lending itself to identification with the electromagnetic field would be homoth-etic curvature encountered in Section 2.3.1, i.e., \({\underset + V _{kl}} = {\underset + K ^j}_{jkl} = {\partial _k}L_{li}^{\,\,\,\,\,j} - {\partial _l}L_{kj}^{\,\,\,\,\,i}:L_{lj}^{\,\,\,\,i}\) could then play the role of the vector potential. This choice has been made by Sciama, but with a complex curvature tensor \({\overset s K ^j}_{jkl}\) [565]. In this case \({\overset s K ^j}_{jkl} = {\partial _k}L_{[lj]}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,i} - {\partial _l}L_{[kj]}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\,j} = 2{S_{[j,k]}}\) The vector potential thus is identified with the torsion vector.

^{180}suggested to also geometrize spinorial degrees of freedom by including them in the asymmetric metric; it took the form [651, 67]:

_{α}a 2-component Weyl-spinor,

*C*a constant (with dimension) and \(\gamma _{ij}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,\alpha \beta} = {\sigma _i}^\alpha {}_{\dot \mu}\sigma _j^\beta {}_{\dot v}{\gamma ^{\dot \mu \dot v}}.\sigma _i^{\,\,\alpha}{}_{\dot \mu}\) are Pauli-matrices, \({\gamma ^{\dot \mu \dot v}}\) corresponds to the antisymmetric 2 × 2 symbol

*ϵ*

^{αβ}.

It is obvious that the assumed mapping of geometrical objects to physical variables had to remain highly ambiguous because the only arguments available were the consistency of the interpretation within unified field theory and the limit to the previous theories (Einstein-Maxwell theory, general relativity), thought to be necessarily encased in UFT. As we have seen, the hope of an eventual help from exact solutions had to be abandoned.

#### 9.7.3 c) Matter tensor

“Thus it is as yet undecided what interpretation of the various tensors and densities is most likely to let the theory meet observed facts” ([557], reprinted 1963, p. 115).

### 9.8 The role of additional symmetries

*λ*-transformations, played a major role in versions of UFT, but not in physics, in general. There are only a few papers with these symmetries as their topic. J. Winogradzki investigated the relationship of the results in Einstein’s final approach to UFT (made together with B. Kaufman) to the theorems by Emmy Noether [704, 703]. She called invariance with regard to the group

*U*composed of coordinate- and

*λ*-transformations which had been named the “extended” group by Einstein,

*U*- or

*J*-invariance:

*g*

_{ij}. As a necessary condition for the field equations following from a variational principle to be J-invariant, she derived \(\Omega _{ik}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,k} = \delta _i^k{\lambda _j}\). Thus, with the help of four axioms postulated by her, she arrived at the

*λ*-transformations (52).

*λ*-invariance leads to four identities which were written out by Winogradzki for a Lagrangian density

*Â*(her “Hamiltonian”):

*λ*-transformations.

P. G. Bergmann also discussed Einstein’s λ-transformations, but just in the special form used in the 5th edition of *The Meaning of Relativity*, i.e., with *λ*_{k} = *∂*_{k}*λ*. No wonder that he then concluded: “[…] the *λ* transformation appears to be closely related in its conception to Weyl’s original gauge transformation” ([23], p. 780).

## 10 Einstein-Schrödinger Theory in Paris

Research on unified field theory in Paris centered around the mathematician A. Lichnerowicz, a student of Georges Darmois, and the theoretical physicist Marie-Antoinette Tonnelat. It followed two main lines: the affine or metric-affine approaches of Einstein and Schrödinger, and the 5-dimensional unification originating with G. Nordström and Th. Kaluza. The latter theme was first studied in Paris by Y. Thiry, a former student of A. Lichnerowicz (“Jordan-Thiry-theory”), and by students of M.-A. Tonnelat; the first topic, “Einstein-Schrödinger theory”, mainly by Tonnelat and her coworkers but no strict divide did exist. Between 1950 and the mid 1960s at least two dozen doctoral theses on topics in unitary field theory were advised by Lichnerowicz and/or by Tonnelat. Whereas the work of Tonnelat’s students could be classified as applied mathematics, Lichnerowicz’s interest, outside of pure mathematics, was directed to mathematical physics with its rigid proofs. This joined attack on unsolved questions and problematic features of classical unified field theory has made clear that (1) the theories under scrutiny were mathematically consistent, but (2) they could not be transformed into an acceptable part of physics.

### 10.1 Marie-Antoinette Tonnelat and Einstein’s Unified Field Theory

^{181}and her research group in the Institut Henri Poincaré. She had studied with Louis de Broglie. During the German occupation of Paris she continued to work with de Broglie and on her own in the field of (relativistic) “spin-particles”, also under the influence of a

*gravitational*field. She applied de Broglie’s “méthode de fusion” to massive spin 1 particles (called photons) in order to arrive at particles with maximal spin 2: spin 2 corresponded to the graviton. The theory contained the graviton, three photons and two scalar particles (spin 0) all with non-vanishing mass. Each relevant field component satisfied the Klein Gordon equation. From there, she arrived at Maxwell’s equations and the linearized version of the equation for Einstein spaces

*R*

_{ij}=

*λg*

_{ij}. She carefully looked at the theory for a particle with spin 2 as a “unitary theory” and preferred to call it “a unitary formalism” ([616], p. 163, 164):

“[…] the theory of maximal spin 2 allows to show how a unitary theory presents itself, approximately, but in the framework of wave mechanics.”

^{182}

In this paper and in others in the early 1940s she also wrote down the standard commutation relations for the quantized spin-2 field [611, 616].

^{183}[613, 612, 614, 610, 611, 615, 616, 617]. The Academy’s sessions had been interrupted for a mere three weeks due to the German occupation. According to its president:

“Despite the ordeal which oppresses the country, the

Comptes Rendusattest that scientific research has not bent, and that the Academy of Sciences remains a focus of ardent and fruitful work. […] Let us work.”^{184}

“Einstein’s efforts in this direction, ever characterized by the salient originality of his thought, will not be examined here. Despite their indisputable interest, they have not, to the best of our knowledge, attained any decisive success […]. Moreover, the nature of the electromagnetic field is so intimately bound to the existence of quantum phenomena that any non-quantum unified theory is necessarily incomplete. These are problems of redoubtable complexity whose solution is still ‘in the lap of the gods’ ” ([113], p. 121).

At the 8th Solvay Congress in 1948 in Brussels, Mme. Tonnelat presented a paper by L. de Broglie on the photon as composed of two neutrinos. Schröodinger asked a question afterwards about a tiny mass of the photon ([446], p. 444). During her work on unified field theory Tonnelat continued to study spin-particles, e.g., to regard a spin-1-particle as composed of two spin-1/2-particles [625].

### 10.2 Tonnelat’s research on UFT in 1946–1952

*Mathematical Reviews*[0017205]:

By her, the torsion tensor \(\Lambda _{ij}^{\,\,\,\,\,k}\) is defined through“The author states without proof some formal consequences of a variational principle in which the action function is an unspecified function of a symmetric second order tensor and three (of which two are independent) anti-symmetric second order tensors. These four tensors are defined in terms of a general affine connection in a four dimensional space, and its derivatives. The connection is not assumed to be symmetric. The paper does not explain how the invariant element of volume entering into the action principle is defined.”

*S*

_{k}. She introduced four tensors of rank two

*K*

_{μν},

*S*

_{μν},

*T*

_{μν},

*F*

_{μν}corresponding in our notation (in the same order) to:

*S*

_{i}.

*T*

_{μν}corresponds to homothetic curvature \({\underset - V _{kl}} = {\underset - K ^j}_{jkl}\) defined by (66) in Section 2.3.1. In the spirit of Schrödinger, a metric density is introduced by:

*G*

_{μν}instead of

*K*

_{μν},

*F*

_{μν}∼

*S*

_{μν},

*S*

_{μν}∼

*T*

_{μν}, and

*H*

_{μν}∼

*F*

_{μν}. Again, the Lagrangian is a functional of these four tensors and, possibly, the torsion vector. After dual (conjugate) field tensor densities were defined through:

*L*′.

*r*

^{ik}is related to \({\overset - R ^{ik}}\) by \({\overset - R ^{ik}} = \sqrt r {r^{ik}}\) with

*r*:= det(r

_{jk}) and r

_{ik}the inverse of

*r*

^{ik}.

^{185}The decomposition

*r*

_{ik}=

*γ*

_{ik}−

*ϕ*

_{ik}two further tensors and their inverses are introduced, i.e.,

*γ*

_{ik}=

*γ*

_{(ik)},

*γ*

^{ik}and

*ϕ*

_{ik}. =

*ϕ*

_{[ik ]},

*ϕ*

^{ik}. Now

^{186}

*I*

_{jk}:=

*4S*

_{j}

*S*

_{k}with 2

*S*

_{k}corresponding to her \({\Lambda _{ks}}^s\). Having read the 2nd edition of Einstein’s

*The Meaning of Relativity*— as she claimed,

^{187}she accepted Einstein’s suggestion that only Hermitian quantities should be used as fundamental quantities in a Lagrangian. The following objects were introduced by her:

^{188}

^{189}Eventually, Eq. (341) is obtained again, where the connection

*L*′ now is derived by beginning with \(\overset * L\). The new Eq. (341) remains unchanged if the connection \({{L\prime}_{ij}}^{\,\,\,k}\) and

*r*

_{ik}. are replaced by the transposed objects. Up to here, a general formalism has been developed. In order to proceed, M.-A. Tonnelat then picked the same Lagrangian \({\mathcal L}\) as Schrödinger had in Eq. (229), i.e., \({\mathcal L} = {2 \over \lambda}\sqrt {- {\rm{det(}}{R_{rs}}{\rm{)}}}\), yet based on her vector-torsion-free connection \(\overset * L\). The field equations derived by her decompose into the fundamental ones (variation with regard to

*U*

_{(ik)}) and such of a “Maxwellian” type (variation with regard to

*H*

_{ik}.). With the decomposition

*r*

_{ik}=

*γ*

_{ik}−

*ϕ*

_{ik}of the previous paper and the additional

*r*

^{ik}=

*g*

^{ik}−

*f*

^{ik}together with the inverses of these four tensors, eight basic fields float around in the theory waiting for physical interpretation. Although still in a purely affine theory, the particular interpretation relating

*r*

^{ik}or

*r*

_{ik}with a metric could make the transition to mixed geometry [cf. Section 2.1 and Eqs. (3), (4)]).

^{190}The field equations look very complicated such that an approximative handling seemed appropriate. For weak fields

*ϕ*

_{ik}., i.e., up to 2nd order, a Proca-type equation was obtained. For the approximated Ricci tensor, field equations of the form of Einstein’s equations with cosmological constant and including the “metric”

*r*

_{(ik)}=

*γ*

_{ik}were reached. The matter tensor is a complicated functional of the connections

*L*and

*L*′. Thus, formally, “matter” has been geometrized. Tonnelat did not give physical interpretations to the tensors appearing except for identifying \({\bar I^l} = {\epsilon ^{ijkl}}{I_{ijk}},{I_{ijk}}: = {\partial _{i\phi jk}} + {\partial _{j\phi ki}} + {\partial _{k\phi ij}}\), or its dual \({J^k} = {1 \over 6}{\epsilon ^{klrs}}{I_{lrs}}\) with the electric current density.

*λ*appearing in the Proca equation obtained from her unified field theory in an approximation up to 2nd order in

*k*

_{ij}:

*μ*in a space of constant curvature derived by her [615]:

“[…] the possibility remains of finding, thanks to the exact solution to the equation \(0{= _{g\,\underset + i \,\underset - k \Vert l}}\), a solution valid even in the case of strong fields, an explanation of the nature of the elementary particles. However, as Schrödinger very strongly emphasized, the realization of this hope remains quite problematical despite all efforts.” ([626], p. 832)

^{191}

^{192}Two connections were used, both free of vector torsion: \({}^{(1)}\Delta _{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}: = L_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k} + {2 \over 3}\delta _{\left[ i \right.}^k{L_{\left. j \right]}}\) and \({}^{(2)}\Delta _{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}: = L_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k} + {2 \over 3}\delta _i^k{L_j}\,({L_j} = {S_j})\).

^{(1)}Δ is the same as Schrödinger’s “star”-connection; cf. Eq. (232) in Section 8.1

^{193}She then discussed at length which Ricci-tensor to take as basic variable, and listed four possible expressions: \(R_{\mu v}^{(0)} \simeq - \underset - K {(L)_{jk}},R_{\mu v}^{(1)} \simeq \underset - K {({}^{(1)}\Delta)_{jk}},R_{\mu v}^{(2)} \simeq \underset - K {({}^{(2)}\Delta)_{(jk)}}\) and the Hermitian \(R_{\mu v}^{(3)} \simeq {1 \over 2}(\underset - K {({}^{(2)}\Delta)_{(jk)}} + \underset - K ({}^{(2)}{(\tilde \Delta)_{(jk)}})\). The formalism then is carried out with all \(R_{\mu v}^{(A)},A = 0,1,2,3\). For the first time,

*r*

_{ik}=

*γ*

_{ik}+

*ϕ*

_{ik}is identified as the metric tensor.

^{194}As before, it ensued from \({\hat R^{ik}} = {{\partial {\mathcal L}} \over {\partial {R_{ik}}}} = \sqrt {- {r_{st}}} {r^{ik}}\) and its reciprocal. The field equations following from variation with regard to the \(R_{\mu v}^{(A)}\) looked like:

^{(1)}Δ,

*r*

_{ik},

*γ*

^{ik},

*ϕ*

_{lm}, and \({\partial _l}{\hat F^{lk}}\) The same Lagrangian as before is used such that the field equations simply are:

*k*

_{ik}of

*r*

_{ik}to be small of the order

*ϵ*, expand in

*ϵ*and neglect all terms of the order

*ϵ*

^{3}. The relation between the cosmological constant

*λ*expressed by the curvature radius of de Sitter space \({\mathcal R}\), i.e., \(\lambda = - {3 \over {\mathcal R}}\) now is alternatively, \({\mu ^2} = - {{2\lambda} \over 3}\), or \({\mu ^2} = - {\lambda \over 2}\).

A comparison of M.-A. Tonnelat’s research with respect to Einstein’s and Schroödinger’s shows that, though first generalizing the class of possible Lagrangians enormously by including four tensor fields, in the end she went back to only one: she used Schrödinger’s Lagrangian corresponding to Einstein’s Lagrangian for general relativity. She avoided the additional equation within the field equations which demands that the torsion vector vanish by directly starting with a connection with zero torsion vector. Although this approach was new,^{195} most characteristic and important for her research seems to be that she directed her attention to “metric compatibility” in the sense of (200) of Section 7.2 and succeeded to “solve” it for the connection; cf. Section 10.2.3. She also showed that out of a purely affine theory, by proper definitions and interpretations, a theory within mixed geometry could be made. It was such a theory that she finally adopted.

#### 10.2.1 Summaries by Tonnelat of her work

*Comptes Rendus*and in papers in other journals, in a monograph in 1955 [632]; it eventually became translated into English [642]. Unassumingly, she assessed the book as “[…] a collection of works with the sole aim of facilitating research on the subject” ([632], p. IX.)

^{196}In the

*Mathematical Reviews*[MR0076499], A. H. Taub not only gave a detailed description of its contents but also put the book into a larger perspective:

“In this book the author summarizes and discusses a great body of material on the Einstein and Schrödinger unified field theories. […] The previous work of the author is collected and presented in a logical coherent fashion. The results obtained by other workers are also presented and compared. Thus, in this single volume containing an introduction and seven chapters one can obtain a well written complete and succinct account of the recent work in the field.”

Tonnelat’s associate J. Winogradzki, in her report on the book, gave a condensed list of the contents and found “that the major part of the work is devoted to the mathematical study of the field equations. The two last chapters deal with some physical content of the theory” [705]. Tonnelat clearly drew the line with regard to work by Lichnerowicz, e.g., the initial value problem. For her, the balance between the remaining problems of UFT and the results obtained was positive: “[…] Einstein’s theory binds together the realization of a satisfying synthesis, originating from a very general principle, and the possibility of new provisions.” ([632], p. 11) ^{197} For her, UFT was a fruitful and important theory.

In the following, some of the main aspects of her approach to UFT will be described.“Whatever the future of the unitary theories might be, this book will have reached its objective, if it has somehow shown that the ties between electromagnetism and gravitation form a history of rebouncings the outcome of which is far from being written.” ([641], p. IX)

^{198}

#### 10.2.2 Field equations

*R*

_{ij}is one out of the list of possible Ricci-tensors. \(\hat {\mathcal L} = \hat {\mathcal L}({\hat g^{ij}},{L_{rs}}^t,{\partial _v}{L_{rs}}^t)\). Variation with respect to \({\hat g^{ij}}\) and \({L_{ij}}^k\) led her to the field equations. With \({R_{ij}}\overset ! = - {\underset - K _{ij}}\) she arrived at:

*with m*

^{ik}being the skew-symmetric part of the inverse metric, and \({S_i}: = L_{[ij]}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,j}\).

^{199}. After going over to the connection previously named

^{(2)}\({}^{(1)}\Delta _{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}\), i.e., Schrödinger’s “star”-connection, Einstein’s weak field equations followed from the variational principle in the form:

*D*

_{l}stands for the covariant derivative with respect to the new connection; \({\underset - K _{ij}}\) is the Ricci tensor \(\underset - K {({}^{(2)}\Delta)_{ij}}\) formed with

^{(2)}Δ and named

*W*

_{ij}by Tonnelat (cf. [632], Eq. II, p. 31). If

*Si*= 0 is added to Eqs. (355) and (356) Einstein’s strong field equations obtain; they no longer follow from the variational principle. M. Lenoir used the fiber bundle of affine reference frames and the transformation groups implied by it to arrive at Tonnelat’s field equations [358].

#### 10.2.3 Removal of affine connection

A first objective was to use the equation \({\hat g^{\overset i + \overset k -}}_{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\Vert l} = 0\) or, equivalently, (30) to express the affine connection \(L_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,\,k} = L_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,\,k}({g_{rs}};{\partial _k}{g_{rs}})\) as a functional of the asymmetric metric *g*_{ij} and its first derivatives in the same way as the Christoffel symbol had been expressed by the metric and its first derivatives. Now, the system comprises 64 linear equations for 64 variables \(L_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,\,k}\). As an already solved algebraic problem this might not create much interest for “pure” mathematicians: an inverse matrix must be found, if only a large one with functions as its elements. V. Hlavatý called for an “elementary algebraic device” to be invented. As a problem in applied mathematics, even in the computer age, it takes quite an effort to do this by computer algebra. The wish to obtain the solution in tensorial form aggravates matters. According to Hlavatý: “Finding such a device is by no means an easy task” ([269], p. 50).

*symmetric*metric and arbitrary linear connection, we obtain:

^{200}but no longer for (30).

*gμν*into its irreducible parts. If \(u_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}\) is defined similarly as in (39) but with a different \(u_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}\) by

^{201}\(\tilde S_{kj}^{\,\,\,\,l}\) is the torsion tensor of the connection \(\tilde L_{ij}^k\), and

*f*

_{ijk}=

*∂*

_{i}

*k*

_{jl}+

*∂*

_{j}

*k*

_{li}+

*∂*

_{l}

*k*

_{ij}. We have met (361), (362) in principle already in Section 2.1.2. A. H. Taub had reviewed one of her papers on the subject from 1950 [MR0037634]: “These systems are then solved explicitly. Straus [592] has also solved this problem by another method after remarking that the method used in this paper is feasible.” The main conclusion is that the

*symmetric*part of the affine connection may be expressed by its

*antisymmetric*part from (361), while (362) then determines the antisymmetric part, in terms of “the fields” \({\{_{ij}^k\} _h},{h_{ik}},{k_{ik}}\). In the next step thus \(u_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}\) is removed from (362). By a lengthy calculation, torsion is expressed by “the fields”. Thus, the connection

^{202}The procedure works if

*g, h, k*are the determinants of

*g*

_{ik},

*h*

_{ik},

*k*

_{ik}, respectively.

*a*and

*b*turn up during the elimination process in which

*g*≠ 0 and

*h*≠ 0 is always assumed.

*g*= 2h,

*k*= 0 obviously leads to

*a*=

*b*= 0 and thus leaves the solution indeterminate; this is a result also obtained in an independent calculation by H. Takeno and coworkers [602]. They acknowledged Tonnelat’s solution in a note added in proof but found her condition

*k*≠ 0 “too stringent”. M.-A. Tonnelat dealt with the case

*k*= 0 in another paper and confirmed her general result, i.e., the condition \({g \over h} \ne 2\) for a solution to exist [630]. Further careful investigations of possible subcases were made later by Hlavatý [269] and Mishra [434]; cf. Section 13.3.

A reproduction of Tonnelat’s calculations would not bring further insight, the more so as lots of auxiliary symbols were introduced by her including indices with one and two strokes. M.-A. Tonnelat has presented the method in detail not only in her books but also in an article [633], and in a talk given at the outstanding Relativity Jubilee Conference in 1955 in Bern ([631], p. 192–197). She was keen on securing priority, i.e., for having found the solution already in 1949–1950. This seemed imperative to her because in the meantime V. Hlavatý [257, 259], and N. S. Bose [52, 50] had also published solutions of \({g_{\underset - i \underset + k \Vert l}} = 0\) by other methods (for Hlavatý cf. Section 12.2). In fact, Hlavatý had reviewed Tonnelat’s paper in *Mathematical Reviews* [MR0066128], in which she had shown that det(*k*_{ij}) = 0 did not affect her solution [630], and he added that “for the solution in the exceptional cases \({g \over h} = 0,2\) ” one should consult a forthcoming paper of his [265]. While the limit *k*_{ij} → 0 leads back to the well known results in general relativity, the other limit *h*_{ij} → *η*_{ij} seemingly has not been discussed intensively by Tonnelat.

Indeed, the whole procedure is drastically shortened and becomes very transparent if *h*_{ij} = η_{ij} is assumed. In this context, apparently, no one did look at this particular case. N. N. Ghosh began with another simplified metric built like the general spherically symmetric metric, i.e., with only *h*_{00}, *h*_{11}, *h*_{22}, *h*_{33} ≠ 0 and *k*_{10},*k*_{23} ≠ 0, but with all components being functions of the four coordinates *x*^{0}, …, *x*^{3} However, he managed to solve (30) for the connection only by adding 4 conditions for the first derivatives of *h*_{ij} and *k*_{ij} in an ad hoc manner [222]. S. N. Bose^{203} rewrote (30) into an inhomogeneous linear equation for tensorial objects *Ti*_{[jk ]}, *U*_{i[jk]}, i.e., *lh* (*T*_{i[jk]}) = *U*_{i[jk]} where *lh* (*T*) is homogeneous and linear in *T* [50]. Considered as matrix equation, its solution is *T* = *BU*. The matrix \(\check C_i^{\,j}: = {h^{js}}{k_{si}}\), its eigenvalues and eigenvectors play an important role. Although the method is more transparent than Tonnelat’s, the solution is just as implicitly given as hers.

*h*

_{ij},

*k*

_{ij}, and their first derivatives depended on the choice of the object used as the (symmetric) metric and raised a question of compatibility: “Mr. A. Einstein has directed my attention to this difficulty.” ([624], p. 24 07).

^{204}In the paper, M.-A. Tonnelat could disperse Einstein’s reservations. In a letter to A. Einstein of 21 June 1951, L. de Broglie wrote:

“I am glad to learn that one of my former pupils, Mme. Tonnelat, who really is a remarkable person, has had contact with you with regard to her papers on the unitary theories, and that you have shown an interest in her results”.

^{205}

P. G. Bergmann’s report on the Jubilee Conference was noncommittal: “A. Tonnelat of the Sorbonne reported on some mathematical results she had obtained on this theory independently of Einstein and Kaufman.” And a little later: “The papers by Kaufman and Tonnelat are too technical to be reported here.”([22], p. 493.)

In a later approach by M.-A. Tonnelat [636], the affine connection is expressed by the metric as above but without a decomposition of *g*_{μν} — in a similar but very much more complicated way as in the case of the Levi-Civita connection (the Christoffel symbol). This second method does not work if 4*h* + 12*k* = 3*g*. An improvement of it was given by Dautcourt [110] who also showed that 4*h* + 12*k*; ≠ 3*g* does not guarantee a solution. V. Hlavatý used still another method to express the affine connection as a functional of the metric; cf. Section 12.2.

St. Mavridès applied Tonnelat’s method in the case of *l*_{ij} and *m*_{ij}, i.e., the inverses of *l*^{ij},*m*^{ij} in *g*^{ij} being used as metric and electromagnetic field.^{206} As an existence-condition (364) appeared as well [406]. A plenitude of further work concerning this problem of how to express the affine connection by the asymmetric metric, its derivatives and torsion was done, with the uniqueness proof by Hlavatý & Saenz among them [270]. It amounted to a mathematical discussion of all logically possible cases and subcases without furthering UFT as a physical theory; cf. Sections 12.2 and 13.3.

As a functional of the metric, its first and second derivatives, the Ricci tensor becomes a rather complicated expression. To then find exact solutions of the remaining field equation in (340) is a difficult task. In a paper dealing with approximations of the field equations, M.-A. Tonnelat tried to show the superiority of her method by applying a scheme of approximations to her (weak) field equations [634]. However, the resulting equations of 4th order for weak electromagnetic fields *k*_{ij} and of 1st order for weak gravitational fields *h*_{ij} are still as complicated as to not allow a physical interpretation. In fact, the solution of the problem to remove the connection from the field equations neither helped the search for exact solutions nor contributed to a convincing physical interpretation of the theory. Nonetheless, it was of crucial importance for the proofs given by A. Lichnerowicz that the initial value problem could be well posed in UFT.

*A*

_{ikl}in (365) is a linear function of the first derivatives of the metric and an additional vector field with 2 free parameters; cf. Section 10.3.3, particularly Eq. (383). The simple expression J. Lévy [361] used, by starting from \({\hat g^{\overset i + \overset k -}}_{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\Vert l}\), was:

*g*

_{ij}and the connection; cf. [475].

*Remark*:

*k*

_{ik}. are small, the components of the

*tensor*[torsion] are small of the same order. Hence, from (368) the symmetric affinity differs from the Christoffel-brackets only by quantities of the second order. Thus, using in (369) the Christoffel-brackets for \(L_{(ij)}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,k}\) etc., one gets the tensor, with an error of the third order; and if this is used in (368), one gets with an error of the fourth order.” From this, “a series of ascending powers of the

*k*

_{ik}” can be developed. Such an approximation up to a certain order, then can be inserted into the remaining field equations.

^{207}

### 10.3 Some further developments

From the mathematical point of view, the results of Tonnelat and Hlavatý may be interpreted as having simplified the study of the weak field equations to some degree. For physics, no new insights were gained. In order to make progress, topics like exact solutions, equations of motion of test particles, or the problem how to express continuously distributed “matter” had to be investigated. It is here that the conflict between the “dualistic” approach to UFT separating the fields and their sources, and the “purely geometric” one showed up clearly. In the latter, the (total) field itself defines its own sources.

#### 10.3.1 Identities, or matter and geometry

_{j}

*G*

^{ij}= 0. An implication of the field equations

*G*

^{ij}= −

_{κ}

*T*

^{ij}then is the vanishing of the divergence of the so-called “matter” tensor or energy-momentum-stress tensor of “external” matter, a quantity without geometric significance. In general relativity,

*T*

^{ij}is a functional of the metric, the matter variables, and eventually the connection through covariant derivatives according to the principle of minimal coupling. ∇

_{j}

*T*

^{ij}= 0 is used to derive equations of motion for point particles or field equations for matter fields. In UFT, according to Einstein, no external matter is allowed to occur; matter variables are to be defined from within the geometry.

^{208}Hence, a distinction between

*external*and

*internal*regions as exemplified by the corresponding Schwarzschild solutions in general relativity would be unnecessary. In the words of M.-A. Tonnelat:

An example for an electromagnetic energy-momentum tensor built from geometric quantities is given in (422) of Section 10.5.4.“The immediate advantage of a unitary theory is that from the theory itself the form of the electromagnetic energy-momentum tensor and, perhaps, of the matter tensor can be extracted. The expression of this tensor then would be imposed by the very geometric principles, and not by conclusions from an alien theory as interesting as it might be.” ([635], p. 6)

^{209}

*p*is a constant defined in Section 9.3.3. Using the notations of Kursunŏglu, Clauser derived what he named contracted Bianchi-Einstein identity, i.e., (370):\({\partial _j}\hat T_k^j = 0\) with \(\hat T_k^j = - 2({\underset - K _{(lk)}}{\hat g^{(lj)}}) + {\underset - K _{[lk]}}{\hat g^{[lj]}}) + \delta _k^{\,\,j}({\mathcal B} + {\underset - K _{lm}}{\hat g^{lm}}) - {\mathcal B}_{lm}^j{\hat g^{lm}}_{\,\,\,\,\,,k}\) It is called a “strong” conservation law, because only Eqs. (250) and (251) of the weak field equation have been used, while for a“weak” conservation law

*all*of the weak field equations would be needed [81]. \(\hat T_i^{\,\,\,\,j}\) is a tensor density only with regard to linear coordinate transformations.

Another approach for the introduction of the energy-momentum tensor of matter *T*_{ik} is the following. First a symmetric metric must be be chosen, e.g., *h*_{mn}. Then in the symmetrical part of the Ricci tensor *K*_{(ij)}(*L*) a term of the form of the Einstein tensor *G*_{ik} (*h*_{mn}) is separated out. The field equations of UFT are then re-written as formal field equations of the type of Einstein’s equations in general relativity plus terms left over. This remainder is identified as *T*_{ik} ∼ *G*_{ik}. The method is applicable because mixed geometry can always be re-interpreted as Riemannian geometry with many extra fields (geometric objects). Its ambiguity lies in the choice of the Riemannian metric. Taking *h*_{ij} as the metric, or the reciprocal of \(\sqrt {{l \over g}} {l^{ij}}\) or \(\sqrt {{g \over l}} {l_{ij}}\) like in [273, 390], or another of the many possible choices, makes a difference. By the formulation within a Riemannian geometry, the unifying strength of a more general geometry is given up, however. Also, according to a remark by M.-A. Tonnelat, the resulting equations ∇ _{s}*T*^{is} = 0 are satisfied *identically* if *K*_{[ij ]} (*L*) = 0 holds. Thus, the information about the gravitational field contained in the symmetric part of the field equation *K*_{(ij)}(*L*) = 0 does not influence the equations of motions of matter following from ∇ _{S}*T*^{is} = 0 [637]. Related with this is the fact that the matter tensor “seems to vanish together with the electromagnetic field *g*_{[ij ]}, or at least with a field the properties of which remind of the electromagnetic field” ([635], p. 7).^{210}

In H.-J. Treder’s access to a “matter” tensor in “the asymmetric field theory of Einstein”, the subtraction was done not on the level of the Einstein tensor, but for the Lagrangian: from the Lagrangian density of UFT the Einstein Lagrangian was subtracted. An advantage is that the variational principle ensures the existence of an identity [649]. A disadvantage is that the Lagrangian density for the matter part depends not only on the metric but also on its derivatives of 1st and 2nd order. For the metric Treder took the symmetric part *h*_{ij} of the asymmetric fundamental tensor *g*_{ij}. His references went to Infeld and to Schrödinger’s work, none to Tonnelat’s. We conclude that Tonnelat’s hope presented in the the first quotation above remained unfulfilled.

#### 10.3.2 Equations of motion

^{211}A methodological concern was how to properly derive equations of motion for matter, in particular for point-particles, possibly charged and massive. Two problems arise: In principle, for a single non-interacting particle certain types of world lines could be defined as paths like the geodesics or auto-parallels in general relativity. But, what world lines should be investigated, the geodesics of g

_{(ij)}, or of another object chosen as a representation of the gravitational potential (field)? The geodesics do not depend on

*g*

_{[ij ]}=

*k*

_{ij}; in the usual interpretation of

*k*

_{ij}as representing the electromagnetic field, its influence on such paths would be naught:

Secondly, in correspondence to the vacuum field equations of general relativity, the method of treating the motion of matter as motion of *singular* point particles as Einstein, Infeld & Hoffmann had done with their approximation scheme in general relativity (EIH-method) [171, 170], would be in conceptual conflict with the spirit of UFT. Was it possible, here, to only consider the region outside of a world-tube around the moving body where the matter tensor *T*_{ij} = 0? The alternative method of Fock with *T*_{ij} ≠ 0 included the interior of the moving bodies as well. In order to avoid infinitely many degrees of freedom for extended bodies, some limit procedure had to be introduced. In the EIH-method, *δ*-functions, i.e., distributions are used as matter sources, although Einstein’s equations do not admit distributions as exact solutions. Nonetheless, many authors applied the EIH-method also in UFT. E. Clauser showed in great detail that the method is applicable there for charged particles [83]; cf. also Section 15. Pham Tan Hoang wrote his doctoral thesis by applying this “singularity-method” to unified field theory [273] (cf. Section 10.4.1). However, we have mentioned already in Section 9.3.3 that both, L. Infeld and J. Callaway were not even able to derive the results of Einstein-Maxwell theory.

With the singularity-method employed, it turned out to be non-trivial to reach the Lorentz-force, or even the Coulomb force in a “slow-motion-” and “weak-field-”approximation: *h*_{ij} = ^{(0)}*h*_{ij} + *ϵ*^{(1)}*h*_{ij} + *ϵ*^{2}^{(2)}*h*_{ij} + …; *k*_{ij} = *ϵ*^{(1)}*k*_{ij} + ϵ^{2}^{(2)}*k*_{ij} + …, with only terms \(\sim {v \over c}\) being retained. In first approximation, only the motion of uncharged particles was described properly by the weak field equations if *h*_{ij} is taken as the metric and *k*_{ij} as the electromagnetic field [69]. This negative result remained valid up to 4th order in *ϵ* for *l*^{ij} (*l*_{ij} ≠ *h*_{ij}) chosen as the metric and *m*^{ij} (*m*_{ij} ≠ *k*_{ij}) as the electromagnetic field [271, 272]. Better results in which the Coulomb force could be made to appear were achieved by Treder and Clauser [650, 81, 82], and later by N. P. Chau, in a slightly changed theory, [77]; cf. also Section 15.1.

*n,m,s*= 1, 2, where \(g_{[mn]}^{(2)}\) is the metric coefficient in the lowest order of an expansion. Here, the equations of motion for two electrical point-charges \(_e^1\), \(_e^2\) were following from 4th-order equations for the electrostatic potential

*ϕ*obeying

*B,D*, were argued away, the resulting equations of motion turned out to be, for the first point-charge:

*q*is the ratio of

*k*

_{ik}to the electromagnetic field strength, and

*p*a constant in an additional term in the Lagrangian. Bonnor ascribed the success due to this added term, quadratic in the skew-symmetric part of the metric

*g*

_{ik}, to the circumstance that “the corresponding terms [in the field equations] arising from the

*k*

_{ik}refer not to potentials but to the electromagnetic field strengths. For this reason it is hardly to be expected that any minor modification of the tensor

*R*

_{(ik)}will lead to the Coulomb force” ([33], p. 377). This is also obvious when Bonnor’s term in the Lagrangian \({p^2}{\hat m^{ik}}{{\rm{k}}_{{\rm{ik}}}}\) is compared with the usual

*F*

^{ik}

*F*

_{ik}. in Maxwell’s theory, because Bonnor is interpreting

*k*

_{ik}not as an electromagnetic

*potential*but as the electromagnetric

*field*cf. [35].

*λ*are considered, i.e., Eqs. (236 and (237), then from

*R*

_{{[kl],i}}−

*λg*

_{{[kl ], i}}= 0 the equation for the electrostatic potential follows [477]:

*B*,

*D*. The constant

*C*represents electric charge. A characteristic length \({1 \over \lambda}\) showed up. As Papapetrou wished to apply UFT to elementary particles like the electron, the problem was that \({1 \over \lambda}\) should be of the order of an electron radius and not be of cosmological significance. His general conclusion was:

“It appears impossible to come to a direct phenomenological use of this theory which would allow a satisfactory treatment of macroscopic problems. But this does not prove anything with regard to the applicability of the theory in the micro-physical domain.” ([477], p. 203.)

^{212}

A review by M. Lenoir [357] of progress made in the papers by Clauser [81], Treder [649] and Papapetrou [477] with regard to the Coulomb force, was reviewed itself by W. B. Bonnor in *Mathematical Reviews* [MR0119977].

For alternative field equations following from M.-A. Tonnelat’s model cf. (383)–(385) in the next Section 10.3.3.

#### 10.3.3 Tonnelat’s extension of unified field theory

“Nevertheless, we are convinced that a modification of the generalization of the theory suggested by Einstein can lead, at least partially, to the goal Einstein himself had set. […] if one wants to cling to the original form of this theory which has caused many hopes and initiated a flood of papers, he would not know how to achieve the objectives which had been proposed at first, within the strict scope of the theories’ principles.” ([302], p. 117–118)

^{213}

*Γ*

^{i}is the new 4-vector (1-form),

*Â*

^{p},

*σ*are Lagrangian multipliers, and

*K*is a constant not to be mixed up with the curvature scalar. For

*K*

_{ij}the expression is chosen:

*W*

_{ij}is the Ricci tensor formed with the connection \(L_{rs}^{\,\,\,\,\,t}\). Note the four additional constant parameters

*α, β,p,q*! In a previous paper of 1960,

*α*=

*β*= 0 had been assumed [637]. The ensuing field equations now were:

^{214}

The choice *α* = *β* = *σ*= *p* = 0;*q* = − 1 (*q ≠* 0) leads back to Einstein’s strong field equations for a connection without torsion vector. Thus, M.-A. Tonnelat always assumed \({{4{\beta ^2}} \over 3} - p - \sigma \ne 0\). The subcase *α* = *β* = 0 first has been studied by doctoral students of Tonnelat in [361], and [53, 56]. For this case, (383) leaves *Γ*_{i} undetermined.

If the Lagrangian density \(\hat {\mathcal L}\) is augmented by a phenomenological matter-Lagrangian density \({\hat {\mathcal L}_{{\rm{mat}}}}\), then through \({\Theta _{ij}}: = - {1 \over {\sqrt {- g}}}{{\delta {{\mathcal L}_{{\rm{mat}}}}} \over {\delta {g^{ij}}}} = {\theta _{ij}} - {1 \over 2}{g_{ij}}{g^{rs}}{\theta _{rs}}\) a phenomenological matter-tensor can be described.

*K*

_{ij}, a Riemannian part \({\overset {\rm{Rie}} K{} _{ij}}(a)\) relative to an arbitrarily chosen (symmetric) metric

*a*

_{kj}must be exhibited. Eq. (385) will then be replaced by

as a metric, the quantity \(\sqrt {{g \over h}} {l_{ij}}\) was chosen;

^{215}geometrically, \({\overset l \Gamma ^i}: = {l^{is}}{\Gamma _s}\) corresponds to vector torsion

*S*^{i}; physically, according to (384), it is linked to the current*ĝ*^{(ir)}Γ_{r}and proportional to the 4-velocity*u*^{k}of a particle;from the equations of motion, in linear approximation, an acceleration term ≃ Γ

^{s}*∂*_{s}Γ^{i}and the Lorentz force showed up as well as further terms characterizing other forces of unknown significance.

- 1)As admitted by Tonnelat, it is obtained only after partial neglect of the variational principle: instead of
*ω*_{[ij ]}= 0 which follows from (386)*ω*_{[ij ]}≠ 0 must be required in order to give a meaning to an equation like ([382], (108), p. 217):(387) follows from (386) after a longer calculation omitting terms ∼$${1 \over 2}\sqrt {{g \over h}} \;{g^{[rs]}}{\omega _{\{[ir],s\}}} + {\omega _{[ir]}}{\overset {\rm{Rie}} {\nabla}_s}{g^{[rs]}} = 0\,.$$(387)*∂*_{k}(*σK*^{2}). The covariant derivative is formed with regard to the Levi-Civita connection for the metric \(\sqrt {{g \over g}} {l_{ij}}\) “Hence, in the extended version of the asymmetric theory like in the initial version, the equations of motion can make sense only if at least one of the expressions*ω*_{[ij ]}or*Θ*_{[ij ]}does not vanish.”^{216} - 2)As usual, the equations of motion of charged particles were derived in linear approximation in which the electromagnetic field
*k*_{ij}is taken to be small of first order. It was expressed by a vector potential*ϕ*_{k}and an axial potential vector through \({{\mathcal X}_{ij}} = \sqrt {- l} \,{\epsilon _{ijlm}}\,{\partial ^{\left[ l \right.}}{{\mathcal X}^{\left. m \right]}}\) with \(l = {\rm{det(}}{l_{ij}}{\rm{)}}\) such that:$${k_{ij}} = {g_{[ij]}} = 2{\partial _{\left[i\right.}}{\phi _{\left.j\right]}} + \sqrt {- l} \,{\epsilon_{ijlm}}\;{\partial ^{\left[l\right.}}{\chi ^{\left.m\right]}}.$$

*χ*

_{123}=:

*χ*and

*ϕ*

_{0}=:

*ϕ*remain

^{217}and satisfy the equations Δ Δ

*χ*= 0 and \(\Delta \phi = k\Gamma\) with \(\Gamma = {\Gamma _0},k = {{p + \sigma - 4{\beta ^2}/3} \over {q + {{5\beta (1 + 2\alpha)} \over 3}}} = {\sigma \over q} \ne 0\).

#### 10.3.4 Conclusions drawn by M.-A. Tonnelat

- (1)
the dynamics of both the electromagnetic and the gravitational fields are modified such that there appears to be also an influence of the gravitational field on the electromagnetic one;

- (2)
As a nonlinear electrodynamics follows, new effects will appear — as, e.g., “a diffusion of light by light”.

- (3)
The relation between field strengths and inductions is similar as in nonlinear Born-Infeld theory ([632], p. 10.).

^{218}Four years later, after progress made had been criticized as irreconcilable with the axioms of UFT, her attitude still persisted:

The choice of words impregnated by ideology like “inveterate” and “totalitarian” speaks for itself.“Nevertheless, the discouraging results obtained from different directions never have definitely compromised the theory; it is the ambiguity of the possible interpretations (choice of metric, interpretation of the skew-symmetric fields, etc) which have set straight issues for the inveterate and totalitarian unifiers.” [382], p. 200).

^{219}

As has been remarked before, W. Pauli had criticized unified field theory approached through metric-affine geometry: he demanded that the fundamental objects must be irreducible with regard to the permutation group and also referred to Weyl ([487], Anm. 23, p. 273). In this view, an admissible Lagrangian might be \({\mathcal L} = a{\hat g^{(ik)}}{K_{(ik)}} + b{\hat g^{[ik]}}{K_{[ik]}}\) rather than \({\mathcal L} = {\hat g^{ik}}{K_{ik}}\) By an even stricter application, Pauli’s principle would also rule out this Lagrangian, cf. Section 19.1.1.

“It would be childish to think that, for Einstein, the existence of the unified fields would resolve into an ontological criss-cross of torsions and curvatures. It would be likewise improper to reduce such schemes to a pure formalism without any relation to a universe the objectivity of which they propose to present. […] The objective pursued by unitary physics presents itself not as a realization with well defined contours but as a possible direction. […]” ([645], p. 396)

^{220}

### 10.4 Further work on unified field theory around M.-A. Tonnelat

Much of the work initiated by M.-A. Tonnelat has been realized in doctoral theses, predominantly in the framework of Einstein-Schrödinger field theory. About a dozen will be discussed here. They are concerned with alternative formulations of the field equations, with the identities connected with them, with exact solutions, and with equations of motion for (charged) particles in different approximation schemes.

#### 10.4.1 Research by associates and doctoral students of M.-A. Tonnelat

As to the associates of M.-A. Tonnelat, it is unknown to me how Stamatia Mavridès got into theoretical physics and the group around M.-A. Tonnelat. She had written her doctoral dissertation in 1953 outside of physics [405]. For 5 years, since 1954, she contributed, alone and with Mme. Tonnelat, to Einstein-Schrödinger unitary field theory in many different aspects. Some of her publications have already been encountered. In Section 9.7, her assignment of physical variables to geometrical objects was noted, in Section 10.2.3 her contribution to the removal of the connection. Moreover, her contribution to spherically symmetric exact solutions mentioned in Section 9.6.1 must be kept in mind. Mme. Mavridès also took part in the research on linear field theories; cf. Section 16.1. Since the 1970s, her research interests have turned to astrophysics and cosmology [417].

^{221}was a student of L. de Broglie with a thesis on “the contribution to the theory of physical quantities attached to spin-1/2-particles” [701]. With the topic of her thesis, she easily could have come into contact also with M.-A. Tonnelat. Although she had shown an interest in affine spaces before writing her dissertation [700], the concept of spinors permeated her subsequent research even more than unitary field theory. As noted in Section 9.8, group theory and conservation laws in special relativistic field theories and general relativity were also dear to her [706]. As was mentioned, she determined the identities following from Noether’s theorems if applied to the group U (

*λ*- and coordinate transformations) and asserted Einstein’s claim that invariance under the group U is able to determine the field equations

^{222}. Also, Einstein’s

*λ*-transformations as an “extension of the relativistic group” were investigated by her [702]. In another paper, she set out to determine a “gauge”-group, named J-transformations, satisfying:

*ĝ*

^{rs}

*R*

_{rs}is considered where

*R*

_{ik}can equal \({\underset - K _{ik}}\) or \({\underset + K _{ik}}\) J. Winogradzki then proved that \(\Lambda _{ik}^{\,\,\,\,m} = \delta _i^l{\lambda _k}\), is necessary, e.g., Einstein’s

*λ*-transformations appear. The weak field equations of Einstein and Straus are the only ones admitted [703]. Since 1956, no papers on UFT by her seem to exist.

_{k}is the torsion vector of the arbitrary (asymmetric) connection \(\Gamma _{ij}^k\), and

*k*

_{i}an arbitrary one-form which can be a function of the arbitrary vector field

*X*

_{k}. The third term is introduced “in order to apply the normalization condition to an arbitrary vector

*X*

_{k}and not necessarily to the torsion vector Γ

_{i}. This is done to avoid any identification or anticipated interpretation of the fields” ([361], p. 249)

^{223}Note that in Lévy’s notation

*X*

_{i}corresponds to

*S*

_{i}. The field equations follow from variation with regard to \({\hat g^{ij}},\Gamma _{rs}^{\,\,\,\,t},{X_k}\), and the Lagrange multipliers

*Â*

^{p},

*σ*. Among the (weak) field equations, (235) is replaced by \({\hat g^{[is]}}_{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\,,s} = {3 \over 2}{\hat A^i}\) which allows the introduction of a non-vanishing electrical current if

*ĝ*

^{[is ]}is related to the electromagnetic field (induction). Furthermore, in the field equations,

*Lé*vy put either

*k*

_{i}= 0, or

*k*

_{i}=

*kX*

_{i}. In the first case the torsion vector drops out, while

*X*

_{k}comes in. Also (

*mĝ*

^{[is ]})

_{S}=

*σĝ*

^{(is)}

*X*

_{s}with

*m*≠ 0. In the second, the torsion vector stays and is normed: \({\hat g^{ij}}{\Gamma _i}{\Gamma _j} = 2{{{k^2}} \over {{k^2}}}\sqrt {- g})\); furthermore \({\hat g^{[is]}}_{\,\,\,\,\,\,\,\,,s} = {{\sigma/k} \over {m + 2k/3}}{\hat g^{(is)}}{\Gamma _s}\) with \(m \ne - {{2k} \over 3}\). Lévy then showed that both versions are mathematically and physically equivalent. The impression here and in the contributions below is that mathematical tricks were played to better the consistency of the approach without an improvement in the physical understanding of the theory.

^{224}In general relativity, in linear approximation, (392) reduces to the coordinate system introduced for obtaining the wave equation. According to Pham Tan Hoang one can set up a coordinate system in UFT such that it is also isothermal with regard to the particular Riemannian metric \({a^{ij}} = \sqrt {{g \over h}} {l^{ij}}\) if vector torsion is vanishing. This he ascribes to the relation ([272], p. 67):

Then, Pham Tan Hoang applied the EIH-method to the weak field equations. When \({a_{ij}} = \sqrt {g/l} {l_{ij}}\) with *l* = det(*l*_{rs}) is taken as the metric and \({q^{ij}} = \sqrt {l/g} \,{m^{ij}}\) as electromagnetic field, he obtained the same negative result as J. Callaway [69]: in linear approximation only uncharged particles can be described properly ([274], p. 89). No cure for this failure was found. In the end, the author could only bemoan the ambiguity inherent in the basis of the theory — implying structural richness, on the other side. We shall see that higher approximations had to be calculated in order to get the Coulomb field and the Lorentz force; cf. Section 15.3. Although dependent on the identifications made, another difficulty pointed out by Pham Tan Hoang is the vanishing of the charge current with the vanishing of *g*_{[ij ]}. Moreover, the identification of a geometric object corresponding to the energy-momentum tensor of matter could not be made unambiguously.

*L*

_{k}is the torsion-vector of the arbitrary (asymmetric) connection \(L_{ij}^k\),

*W*

_{ij}the Ricci tensor formed from this connection, and

*Â*

^{p},

*σ*are Lagrangian multipliers.

*Γ*

_{i}is a normed vector field [53, 54, 55, 56]. With regard to Tonnelat’s Lagrangian in Section 10.3.3, the terms with constants

*α*and

*β*are omitted. L. Bouche demonstrated the existence of 4 characteristic cones, three of which are the same as in (421) in Section 10.5.4 below, the 4th was not determined explicitly by her; cf. however the result of Nguyen Phong-Chau in Section 10.4. Her application of approximations (up to the second one) to the equations of motion has shown that the Lorentz-force could no longer be obtained as soon as the antisymmetric part of the field equation was satisfied. Also, her study of spherically symmetric solutions of the new field equations, due to their complexity could not be carried to a successful end.

The aim of the thesis by Marcel Bray was to study exact spherically and axially symmetric solutions of the weak field equations (417)–(419) and to compare them with exact solutions in general relativity.^{225} For a possible physical interpretation he had to make a choice among differing identifications between mathematical objects and physical observables. For the metric, interpreted as describing the inertial-gravitational potentials, he investigated two choices: the metric suggested by Maurer-Tison, cf. (412) of Section 9.7, and \({g_{ij}} = \sqrt {h/g} \,{l_{ij}}\). Unfortunately, his hope that his research “perhaps could also provide some helpful guiding principles for the choice of the metric” (p. 1) did not materialize. No solutions of physical interest beyond those already known were displayed by him [59].

*R*

_{ij},

*P*

_{ij}are the two contractions of the curvature tensor of the asymmetric, torsionless affine connection \(\Gamma _{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}\), whereas \({\tilde R_{ij}},{\tilde P_{ij}}\) belong to the transposed connection \(\tilde \Gamma _{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k} = \Gamma _{ji}^{\,\,\,\,\,\,k}\).

*Γ*

_{i}is an arbitrary vector field.

^{226}He concluded that only two cases had to be considered: version A of Einstein-Schrödinger with

*K*

_{ij}=

*W*

_{ij}+ 2

*p∂*

_{[i}Γ

_{j]}; and version B with

*K*

_{ij}=

*W*

_{ij}+

*rQ*

_{ij}. Here,

*W*

_{ij},

*Q*

_{ij}are the contractions of the curvature tensor belonging to a connection \(L_{ij}^{\,\,\,\,k}\) with zero vector torsion while

*p*≠ 0,

*r*are free constants. Thus, in version B only 76 (instead of 80) unknown components have to be determined and, for \(r = {1 \over 2}\), transposition invariance holds. Nguyen Phong-Chau succeeded in determining explicitly for arbitrary

*r*the fourth characteristic which L. Bouche had announced to exist for case B, but had not been able to specify in the case

*r*= 0 (for the other three cf. (421) below in Section 10.5.4):

It thus seems possible that further linear combinations of the 3 quantities used for the definition of the “lightcone”, i.e., *h*_{ij},*l*_{ij},*n*_{ij} may occur.

In the framework of non-linear electromagnetism which should follow from UFT, he suggested an interpretation different from Maxwell’s theory: the electromagnetic potential ought to be described by a tensor potential identified with the antisymmetric part of the metric *k*_{ij}, not just a 4-vector. In first approximation □ *k*_{ij} = 0. A consequence would be that elementary particles must be described differently; beyond mass and charge, an electron would obtain further characteristics incompatible with spherical symmetry ([456], p. 354).

Further dissertations dealing with the generalization of Kaluza-Klein theory and with linear theories of gravitation in Minkowski space are discussed in Sections 11.1.1 and 16.1, 16.2, respectively.

### 10.5 Research by and around André Lichnerowicz

Within the Institut Henri Poincaryé, a lively interaction between theoretical physicists, mathematicians and natural philosophers took place which tried to grab some of the mysteries from “the lap of the gods”. One of the Paris mathematicians sharing Mme. Tonnelat’s interest in metric affine geometry was André Lichnerowicz^{227}. He looked mainly at problems of interest for a mathematician. In gravitation — both in general relativity and the “non-symmetric theory” — questions concerning the integration of the systems of partial differential equations representing the field equations were investigated, be it identities for curvature, the Cauchy problem arising from field equations in affine spaces [368, 370], existence and uniqueness of solutions and their global properties, or the compatibility of the field equations of both general relativity and UFT. In his own words: “[…] I could attack what interested me — the global problems of relativity, the keys to a real understanding of the theory.” ([379], p. 104.) This has also been subsumed in Lichnerowicz’s contribution to the Chapel Hill Conference of 1957 on the role of gravitation re-published in 2011 ([120], 65–75). For scalar-tensor theory with its 15th scalar variable *ϕ*, it is to be noted that Lichnerowicz not only discussed *ϕ* ∼ *κ*^{−1}(*κ* the gravitational “constant”) as a possibility like Ludwig and Just [385] but accepted this relation right away ([371], p. 202).

#### 10.5.1 Existence of regular solutions?

In Section 7.1, it was pointed out that Einstein thought it imperative to banish singular solutions from his theory of the total field. Therefore it was important to get some feeling for whether general relativity theory would allow non-singular solutions or not. Einstein and Pauli set out to prove theorems in this regard [177]. Their result was that the vacuum field equation *R*_{ik}. = 0 did not admit any non-singular static solution describing a field with non-vanishing mass. For distances tending to infinity, the asymptotic values of the Schwarzschild solution were assumed. The proof held for any dimension of space and thus included the theory by Kaluza and Klein. However, prior to Einstein and Pauli, Lichnerowicz had proven a theorem almost identical to theirs; he had shown the non-existence of non-trivial regular stationary, asymptotically Euclidean vacuum solutions with^{228}*g*_{00} = 1 − *ϵ*_{00}, *ϵ*_{00} > 0 [363, 362, 364]; cf. also Section 8.3. In a letter of 4 September 1945 ([489], p. 309), a double of which he had sent to Einstein, Lichnerowicz pointed this out to Pauli.^{229} In his response of 21 September 1945, Pauli found the condition on *g*_{00} unphysical: why should *g*_{00} > 1 be impossible near infinity? After he had studied the paper of Einstein and Pauli in more detail, Lichnerowicz commented on it in a further letter to Pauli of 11 November 1945. There, he also confessed to be “a bit shocked” about the fact that Einstein and Pauli had only proven “non-existence” of regular solutions while he had shown that Euclidean space is the only regular solution ([489], p. 325–326). Pauli, in his answer of 15 November 1945, apparently had suggested a related problem. On 15 December 1945, Lichnerowicz wrote back that he had solved this problem, outlined the structure of the proof, suggested a joint publication in *Comptes Rendus*, and congratulated Pauli for receiving the Nobel prize ([489], p. 333–335). A co-authored paper did not appear but Lichnerowicz published a short note: “W. Pauli signaled me his interest in the possibility to avoid any auxiliary hypothesis: he thought that this could be reached by a synthesis of our respective methods. In fact, this has happened: an important problem in relativity theory has been solved” [367]. A further proof of the occurrence of singularities for static gravitational fields in general relativity was given by A. Lichnerowicz and Y. Fourès-Bruhat [380]. That Pauli was impressed by Lichnerowicz’s theorem is shown by his detailed discussion of it in his special lectures on relativity in 1953 as reported in ([194], p. 389–390).

As already mentioned in Section 8.3, A. Papapetrou, working at the time in Dublin with Schrödinger, extended the theorem of Einstein and Pauli to a non-symmetric metric, i.e., to UFT with the strong field equations \({R_{ik}} = 0,\,{g_{\underset + i \underset - k \Vert l}} = 0,\,\,{{\hat g}^{[is]}}{\,_{,s}} = 0\) [474].

#### 10.5.2 Initial value problem and discontinuities

*S*

_{k}is a covariant vector to be identified with the torsion vector and \(L_{ik}^j\) an “a priori arbitrary” affine connection corresponding to Schrödinger’s star-connection [cf. (291)]: \({L_{ik}}^j{\rightarrow ^\ast}{\Gamma _{ik}}^l: = {\Gamma _{ik}}^l + {2 \over 3}{\delta _i}^l{\Gamma _{k \cdot}}{P_{ik}}\) is the Ricci-tensor \(- {\underset - K_{jk}}\) formed from \(L_{ik}^j\) defined by (56). Note that from (399) follows

*∂*

_{k}

*P*

_{[ij ]}+

*∂*

_{j}

*P*

_{[ki]}+

*∂*

_{i}

*P*

_{[jk ]}= 0, but the reasoning backward holds only locally (local existence of a potential) ([369], p. 500), ([371], 267). In Section 10.3.1, the form given to the generalized Bianchi-identities by Lichnerowicz is shown.

*S*(

*x*

^{0}= 0), or

*f*(

*x*

^{k}) = 0, of the manifold (space-time) the components of the non-symmetric tensor

*g*

_{ij}of class (

*C*

^{1},

*C*

^{3}piecewise) and an affine connection of class (

*C*

^{0},

*C*

^{2}piecewise).

^{230}With (397) having been solved, i.e., the connection expressed by the metric and its 1st derivatives, the task now is: Determine in a neighborhood of

*S*(

*x*

^{0}= 0) the tensor

*g*

_{ij}and the torsion vector

*S*

_{k}such that they satisfy (398), (399). In his main results up to 1954, Lichnerowicz had shown that the local initial value problem for real and analytical data on

*S*and with

*g*

^{00}≠ 0 has a unique solution [368, 370, 371], Part II, Chap. VI), [369]. The proof included a normalization-condition for the torsion vector: \({\partial _s}({g^{st}}{S_t}\sqrt {\vert g\vert}) = 0\) which was also used when in 1955, during the Jubilee-conference in Bern, A. Lichnerowicz reviewed global problems and theorems “of the relativistic equations”. He now considered part of the field equations given above:

*P*

_{ik})

*R*

_{ab}=

*R*

_{ab}(

*L*), where \({L_{ab}}^c\) is the torsion-free connection. He could show that (400) “presents the same local mathematical coherence as the system of equations of general relativity”

^{231}([372], p. 182). The first notice in

*Comptes Rendus*[368] had been reviewed by V. Hlavatý, and then a paper by him containing the proofs announced appeared in the journal of Hlavatý’s home university [369]. For the Einstein-Maxwell field equation the requirement that the initial data be analytic had been weakened by Lichnerowicz’ student, Mme. Fourè;s-Bruhat, who also gave the first proof of existence and uniqueness of the local Cauchy problem for Einstein’s field equations [217]. Lichnerowicz conjectured that such a proof also could be achieved for unitary field theory. Between January and June 1954, a correspondence between Lichnerowicz and Einstein on this topic has taken place; on 11 May 1954 he sent Einstein his paper on the compatibility of the field equations of UFT [368].

^{232}W. Pauli was impressed by Lichnerowicz’ lecture at the conference in Bern:

“I believe, the most important else we have heard, was the report by Lichnerowicz on the Cauchy initial value problem in the nonlinear field equations of general relativity. I attach great importance to the study of such problems, because I suppose that it also will play an essential role with field quantization.”

^{233}[486].

^{i}

_{j,rs}] on a characteristic

*f*= 0 by beginning with

^{234}\([{\partial _r}{L_j}_s^i] = u_{js}^i{l_r},{l_i} = {\partial _i}f\) which led to \([{R^i}_{j,rs}] = {l_r}u_{js}^i - {l_s}u_{jr}^i\). As a consequence,

*g*

^{00}= 0, was in order.

*Comptes Rendus*[291, 293, 292, 295], S. I. Husain applied the methods of A. Lichnerowicz for an investigation of the discontinuities of the curvature and Ricci tensors in mixed geometry, first with Einstein’s “strong” and then the “weak” field equations

^{235}. Independently of the field equations, for the discontinuities the expressions of Lichnerowicz hold:

*b*

_{k}. are his discontinuity-parameters and \({R^i}_{j,rs} = {\underset - K\ ^i}_{jkl}({L_p}_q^r)\) Thus, (401) reappeared for the more general curvature tensor. For the “strong” equations, Husain derived

*l*

^{k}:=

*g*

^{kl}

*l*

_{l}[291]; the 2nd equation is non-trivial because there is no skew symmetry in the first two indices of the curvature tensor. For the “weak” system, he obtained instead [293]:

*l*

^{k}:=

*g*

^{(kl}

^{)}

*l*

_{l}=

*l*

^{kl}

*l*

_{l}and arrived at

*D*

_{S}is the covariant derivative with regard to the (Riemann) connection defined by \({l_{ij}}\) and

*P*

^{m}

_{jkl}(

*L*) the curvature tensor belonging to the connection

^{236}\({L_p}_q^r\). The congruence-sign in (407) means “up to terms in [\([{R^i}_{j,rs}]\)]”. In a further paper, Husain obtained even \({l^s}{D_s}[{P^m}_{jil}] \simeq 0\) 0 and concluded that the wave front of radiation propagates “with the fundamental speed” [295].

#### 10.5.3 Characteristic surfaces

*g*

_{ij}

*dx*

^{i}

*dx*

^{j}= 0 as the defining relation for the characteristic surface. However, from the point of view of physics, what is the “light-cone” of the gravitational field? This obviously depends on the identification of the gravitational potential (field) with a geometric object of unitary field theory. As we have seen in Section 9.7, different identifications were made. The hypersurface

*S*(

*x*

^{0}= 0) represented by

*f*(

*x*

^{0},

*x*

^{1},

*x*

^{2},

*x*

^{3}) = 0 and tangent to the cone

*g*

^{rs}

*∂*

_{r}

*f∂*

_{s}

*f*= 0 is a wave surface of the metric field

*g*

^{rs}. We already noted that Lichnerowicz preferred the inverse of

*l*

^{ij}=

*g*

^{(ij)}as the “gravitational tensor” and thus defined the light cone through

^{237}He advised the thesis of Pham Mau Quan on relativistic hydrodynamics [501], in which the various characteristic surfaces were investigated across which discontinuities of mass density, pressure, fluid velocity and heat transport vector, or of their gradients will occur. Lichnerowicz then succeeded to again solve the initial value problem for magnetohydrodynamics [377]. In Jordan-Thiry theory interpreted as a UFT, Mme. F. Hennequin and R. Guy studied fluid dynamics in more detail; cf. Section 11.1.1.

*h*

_{ij}=

*g*

_{(ij)}≠

*l*

_{ij}for the definition of the wave fronts:

*h*

^{ij}≠

*l*

^{ij}. Clauser dealt with a special case of Hlavat ý’s classification with connection:

*g, h, k*are the determinants of the corresponding tensors. Indices are moved with

*h*

_{ij}; the original spot of an index is noted by a dot. Clauser then was able to show that for the system:

*l*

_{ij}and

*n*

_{ij}with

*n*

_{ij}as a further possibility for the metric; cf. [408], ([398], p. 243–244), ([641], p. 339–344). In principle as many “light cones” as different interpretations made for the gravitational field can be found. However, in the literature studied, we will meet four different light cones being discussed; cf. also (421) and (396).

When two further approaches to the discontinuities of curvature tensors within the framework of UFT were published in 1961 in *Comptes Rendus*, the respective authors did not take notice of each other. In the first half of the year, L. Mas and A. Montserrat presented their three papers on “wave fronts” in unified field theory, while in the second half J. Vaillant published on “discontinuities” of the curvature tensor in Einstein-Schr ödinger theory. Both continued the work of Lichnerowicz and Maurer-Tison.

*l*

_{ij}named \({\Gamma _i}_j^k\). They referred to Husain’s doctoral thesis [294] and like him called \({P^m}_{jik}\). the curvature tensor belonging to \({L_i}_j^k\). (405) and the second equation of (406) were reproduced, and the equation for the discontinuities of the Ricci tensor [

*P*

_{ij}] = 0 added. For the curvature tensor \({R^m}_{jik}\) belonging to \({\Gamma _i}_j^k\), the results of Lichnerowicz (401) and the first equation of (402) as well as \([{R_{ij}}] = 0\) were shown to hold also in the case of Einstein’s weak field equations. In the second paper, the light cone was defined by

*h*

_{ij}

*l*

^{i}

*l*

^{j}= 0 with

*h*

_{ij}=

*g*

_{(ij)}and the corresponding discontinuities for curvature derived [444]. The third paper then brought an investigation including three different characteristic surfaces [445]. Let \({\overset 1 g _{ij}}: = {l_{ij}},{\overset 2 g _{ij}}: = {h_{ij}},\,{\overset 3 g _{ij}}: = {n_{ij}}\)

*n*

_{ij}where

*n*

_{ij}is defined by (412), (413). Then, on the characteristics ∑

_{(s)},

*s*= 1, 2, 3 defined by \(\overset s {{g^{ij}}} {l_i}{l_j} = 0\), or \({g^{00}} = 0,{h^{00}} = 0,{n^{00}} = 0\) respectively, for the curvature tensors \(\overset s R {\,^m}_{jik}\) belonging to the Riemannian connections calculated from \(\overset s g {\,_{ij}}\), the following discontinuities obtained:

*Comptes Rendus*, Jean Vaillant took up as well the investigation of the discontinuities of the curvature tensor for the weak field equations [663, 664].

^{238}In 1964 he finished his PhD thesis on this and related subjects.

^{239}For the discontinuities of the curvature tensor on a characteristic, J. Vaillant noted more precisely \([{P_{ijkl}}] = {1 \over 2}K{l_i}{l_j}{\eta ^{pqrs}}{l_p}{k_{rs}}({l_k}{h_{lq}} - {l_l}{h_{kq}})\). This expression satisfies \({l_i}[{P^i}_{j,rs}] = 0\) and is consistent with (401) and (405). Vaillant also looked at the characteristics defined from (412) and by

*h*

^{rs}

*l*

_{r}

*l*

_{s}= 0 of F. Maurer-Tison. For both, the discontinuities

*γ*

^{k}:=

*n*

^{kr}

*l*

_{r}, then also

_{i}

*Sj*], respectively. In his third paper [665], Vaillant concluded that the only surfaces on which discontinuities of the Ricci tensor can arise, are the characteristics

*h*

^{rs}

*l*

_{r}

*l*

_{s}= 0 The results of S. I. Husain (cf. Section 10.5.2) were not mentioned by him.

#### 10.5.4 Some further work in UFT advised by A. Lichnerowicz

The doctoral theses inspired by A. Lichnerowicz are about equally directed to Einstein-Schrödinger and Jordan-Thiry (Kaluza) theory. As interesting as the study of the Cauchy problem initiated by Lichnerowicz was, it also could not remove the ambiguities in the choice for the metric.

In her thesis “Aspects mathématiques de la théorie du champ unifié d’Einstein-Schrödinger”, Françoise Maurer-Tison first wrote an introductory part on the geometrical background of unified field theory; she developed the concept of “coaffine connection”, i.e., an infinitesimal connection on the fiber bundle of affine reference frames. In Part 2, Maurer-Tison investigated in detail the Cauchy initial value problem. The last Part 3 of her thesis is devoted to the “physical interpretation”.

^{240}

_{β}and \(L_{\rho \mu}^\sigma\) a linear connection with vanishing torsion vector ∑

_{β}(=

*S*

_{β}) = 0.

*P*

_{αβ}(

*L*) is the Ricci tensor [398].

*x*

^{0}= 0 containing \({\partial _\rho}({g^{[\rho k]}}\sqrt {- g}) = 0\), and an equation for the Ricci tensor not written down here enclosing the metric, its first derivatives and the vector field ∑

_{i}([398], p. 229). The existence of a solution is proven, and, in the case of analytic initial data, also its uniqueness. There exist three characteristic cones met before and defined by:

*γ*) is declared to be the light cone, while the interpretation of the other two (time oriented) as wave fronts remains unclear (p. 241).

*H*

_{αβ}and induction \(K_{\alpha \beta}\prime\) are identified as follows: \({H_{\alpha \beta}} = {1 \over 2}\sqrt {- g} {\epsilon _{\alpha \beta \gamma \delta}}{m^{\gamma \delta}};{K{\prime\alpha \beta}} = - {1 \over {2\sqrt {- g}}}{\epsilon ^{\alpha \beta \gamma \delta}}\underset {+ -} \Delta {k_{\gamma \delta}}\) Here, \(\underset {+ -} \Delta\) is a generalized Laplacian (cf. her Eq. (40.4) on p. 255). Mme. Maurer-Tison did not only comment in technical terms on her impressive work; she also described the whole field very much to the point with accurate words:

“The unified field theory of Einstein-Schrödinger is attractive by its apparent simplicity and repellent by the finicky calculations it requires: it is a young theory with moderate baggage as long as it is investigated with rigour, but an immense load when the efforts are taken into account which have been tried to explore its possibilities” ([398], p. 187).

^{241}

The following doctoral thesis by Marcel Lenoir constitutes a link with the next Section 11.1. In it, he gave as his aim the introduction of a geometrical structure which permits the incorporation of Bonnor’s supplementary term into the Lagrangian of UFT (cf. Section 13.1) resulting from the contraction of a suitable Ricci tensor ([359], p. 7). This is achieved by the introduction of space-time as a hypersurface of a 5-dimensional space *V*_{5} with metric tensor and asymmetric linear connection. The wanted supplementary terms follow from the curvature of *V* 5. Lenoir’s approach to Bonnor’s field equations is an alternative to (and perhaps more convincing) than the earlier derivation, in space-time, by F. de Simoni (cf. Section 15.1).

*∂*

_{s}

*ĝ*

^{[is]}= 0 and of type “Einstein-Tonnelat” with \({\partial _s}{{\hat g}^{[is]}} = {{\hat F}^i} \neq 0\) (cf. Section 10.3.3, Eq. (384)). From an effective Lagrangian conjured up from the curvature scalar in V

_{5}, i.e.,

In the last chapter, Lenoir investigated whether Lichnerowicz’s theorem on the non-existence of regular solutions could also be proven for his extended unitary theory but did not arrive at a conclusive result.

The doctoral thesis of another student of Lichnerowicz, Albert Crumeyrolle, contained two different topics [93]. In the larger part, research on the equations of motion of charged particles and on the energy-momentum tensor (corresponding to the “matter” tensor in UFT) was resumed in the framework of Einstein-Schrödinger theory. As to the equations of motion for charged particles, Pham Tan Hoang had simplified calculations by a more complete use of the isothermal condition (392) and by further improvements as mentioned in Section 10.4. Yet the negative result remained the same as the one already obtained by E. Clauser and H.-J. Treder, cf. Section 10.3.2. The same applies to Crumeyrolle’s approximative calculation of the equations of motions in ([94], p. 390).

Because the energy-momentum tensor he constructed had to contain a metric field, Crumeyrolle investigated which of the three possibilities for the metric, i.e., *h*_{ij},*l*_{ij}, and *γ*_{ij} emerging from the Cauchy-problem (cf. (421) of Section 10.5.4) would be best for reaching the special relativistic energy-momentum tensor of the electromagnetic field. In fact, none was good enough. In first approximation, *h*_{ij} fared best [94].

^{242}A. Crumeyrolle provided this space

*V*

_{8}with coordinates

*x*

^{i},

*x**

^{i}, (

*i*= 1, 2, 3, 4) (“natural reference systems” in comparison with his adapted coordinates

*z*

^{i}=

*x*

^{i}+

*ϵx**

^{i}; cf. Section 2.6); in

*V*

_{8}, he embedded space-time by

*x**

^{i}= 0. By use of the covariant derivative \(\overset {+} \nabla\) in

*V*

_{8}, an affine connection with parts \(\pi _i^j,\pi _{i\ast}^j,\pi _i^{j\ast},\pi _{i\ast}^{j\ast}\) followed. In the special coordinate system, named “natural diagonal reference system”, projection of the affine connection in

*V*

_{8}into a 4-dimensional space led to both a connection \(L_{ij}^k = L_{i\ast j}^{k\ast} = L_{j\ast i\ast}^k = L_{j\ast i\ast}^{k\ast} = L_{ij\ast}^{k\ast}\), and a tensor \(\Lambda _{ij}^k = L_{ij}^{k\ast} = L_{i\ast j}^k = L_{ji\ast}^k\) in space-time. Due to the increase in the number of field variables, he could derive two Ricci-tenors in this 4-dimensional space, identified with space-time:

With these tensors, modified field equations which contained the “weak” Einstein equations including additional terms in \({{\mathcal P}_{jk}}\) then could be introduced ([96], p. 103–128). But a number of extra field equations had to be joined such as, still among others, \(\Lambda _{\left[ {s\left. j \right]} \right.}^s = 0,\,d{\overline {\mathcal P} _{[jk]}} = 0,\,{\overline {\mathcal P} _{(jk)}} = 0\) cf. ([96], p. 126). Another approach by Crumeyrolle using a field of numbers different from the real numbers will be discussed in Section 11.2.2. In its Section XV ([97], pp. 126–130), it contains a new attempt at a unified field theory with a slightly changed formalism. As Crumeyrolle’s aim was to regain the old Einstein-Schrödinger theory from a theory with additional field variables and field equations, his approach could not bring progress for an eventual physical interpretation of UFT.

## 11 Higher-Dimensional Theories Generalizing Kaluza’s

### 11.1 5-dimensional theories: Jordan-Thiry theory

^{243}submitted a thesis to the faculty of science of Paris University with the title “Mathematical study of the equations of a unitary theory with fifteen field variables”. He exuberantly thanked his “master and friend Lichnerowicz” who obviously had initiated the work. Unfortunately, “Jordan and his school” had “obtained almost at the same time like us the equations which we will give in Chapter II. We had no knowledge about this except at a very late stage, and it is only recently that we could correspond with Jordan. He was so friendly as to send us his publications which we could not have procured otherwise.”

^{244}([606], p. 6) In fact, it was A. Lichnerowicz, then at the university of Strasbourg, who had written to W. Pauli and asked for “Jordan’s original paper” (cf. letter of W. Pauli to P. Jordan of 23. 3. 1948 in [489], p. 516). According to Pauli:

“Lichnerowicz is a pure mathematician who is occupied with the integration of Einstein’s field equations. One of his students, Ives Thiry now has looked into the (not mutilated) Kaluza-theory (with

g_{55}) and, so I believe, has simplified very much the calculational technique.”^{245}

*Comptes Rendus*[381, 604, 605]. On 19 January 1948,

^{246}he sent one of his notes in

*Comptes Rendus*to Albert Einstein [604]. In his publication preceding Lichnerowicz’ letter to Pauli, Thiry had not yet given a physical interpretation of the scalar field [604]. Around that time, the interest in five dimensional relativity seems to have risen; we already have met P. G. Bergmann’s paper of 1948 [21].

^{247}C. V. Jonsson, a student of O. Klein in Stockholm, also wrote a long paper about the theory’s field equations and their linear approximation. He included the scalar field and dropped the cylinder condition.

^{248}He then quantized the free field of this linear regime. [313]. Thiry’s interest in Kaluza’s theory was of mathematical nature:

“As to unitary field theories, it seems that their mathematical study has been quite neglected […]. We thought it useful to try a systematic mathematical study of a unitary field theory, and to find out whether such a theory is able to present the same coherence like general relativity.” ([606], p. 3)

^{249}

*g*

_{αβ},

_{4}= 0 is upheld. Here, he used an argument from physics: no physical phenomena furnishes evidence for the existence of a fifth dimension ([606], p. 39). His access to 5-dimensional space made use of the fact that the equations of motion of charged particles are geodesics in Finsler geometry; for each value of \({e \over m}\) (charge over mass) another Finsler space is needed with the metric:

^{250}

In the third chapter, Thiry aimed at showing that his unitary field theory possessed the same mathematical coherence with regard to its global aspects as general relativity. By partially using methods developed by Lichnerowicz, he proved theorems on the global regularity of solutions such as: “A unitary field with normal asymptotic behavior (i.e., tending uniformly to Minkowski space at spatial infinity) cannot be regular everywhere.” Thiry compared the proofs on the existence and regularity of solutions in O. Klein’s version of Kaluza’s theory and in his generalization and found them much simpler in his theory. These results are of a different nature than what Jordan had achieved; they are new and mathematically exact.“The introduction of a fifth coordinate […] thus shall justify itself by the fact that it imparts the role of geodesics to the trajectories of charged particles which they lost in space-time […]”

^{251}

To Pauli, Thiry’s global theorems might not have been “interesting novelties”, because in his corresponding paper with Einstein on the non-regularity of solutions, the proof had been independent of the dimension of space [177]. Pauli, at first, also did not read Thiry’s thèse, but responded arrogantly:“By the way, in his thèse published in 1951, Thiry has studied systematically and extensively the theory with variable gravitational constant; […] I received it only after my book appeared and, at present, I have not read it very closely. It thus is not really clear to me whether it contains interesting novelties.” ([490], p. 799/800)

^{252}

“The Thèses by Thiry are laying on my desk; however they are so appallingly thick (do not contain a reasonable abstract) such that it is so much simpler to not open the book and reflect about what must be inside.” (W. Pauli to P. Jordan 8. 6. 1953, [491], p. 176)

^{253}

Somewhat later, Pauli corrected himself and wrote to Jordan that in the preparation for a course “he nevertheless had read around in Thiry’s Thèse” W. Pauli to P. Jordan 3 February 1954 ([491], p. 442). Note that neither of these two eminent theoretical physicists discussed Thiry’s paper as regards its valuable content.

As to the field equations corresponding to (112) to (114), Thiry had calculated them in great detail with Cartan’s repère mobile for both a Euclidean or Lorentz metric of *V*_{5}, and also with a 5-dimensional matter tensor of the form of dust *pu*^{α}*u*^{β}. From the 15th equation, he even had obtained “a new physical effect”: uncharged dust-matter could generate an electromagnetic field [[606], p. 79, footnote (1)]. He linked this effect to Blackett’s search for the magnetic field of a rotating body, described in Section 6.1.2. As to the interpretation of the fifteenth variable, the scalar field denoted by *V*: for him _{χTh}:= *V*^{2}*G*_{0} with *G*_{0} = 8*πG*_{Newton}/*c*^{2} was the gravitational coupling factor (“facteur de gravitation”) and put in front of the matter tensor [606], p. 72, 75, 77). In 1951, Y. Fourès-Bruhat proved existence and uniqueness theorems of “the unitary theory of Jordan-Thiry” [216, 218].

#### 11.1.1 Scientists working at the IHP on the Jordan-Thiry unified field theory

*V*

_{5}was introduced such that the gravitational coupling function of the theory became a constant. The first approximation of a solution was then calculated [254]. Although stating that her interpretation via the conformal metric did agree with Jordan’s view (p. 77 of her thesis), surprisingly she did not mention his book in her bibliography. Like Y. Thiry, in the general formalism F. Hennequin also considered the “interior” case with a matter tensor by postulating field equation in

*V*

_{5}

_{αβ}=

*r ν*

_{α}

*ν*

_{β},

*ν*

_{α}

*ν*

^{α}= − 1

*.r*> 0 later was called “pseudo-density”,

*ν*

^{α}is the 5-velocity. After the projection of the formalism into space-time, the electromagnetic and the scalar field, named

*ξ*appeared. The conformal metric mentioned above is

*ξds*

^{2}with

*ds*

^{2}being the metric induced in space-time from

*V*5. Electromagnetic field

*F*

_{ij}and induction

*H*

_{ij}are assumed to be related by

*H*

_{ij}=

*ξ*

^{3}

*F*

_{ij}. Hennequin differed from Thiry by giving as ratio of charge and mass the expression \({\mu \over \rho} = - {c^2}{{\beta h\sqrt \xi} \over {\sqrt {1 + {{{h^2}} \over {{\xi ^2}}}}}},\kappa \rho = {r \over \xi}(1 + {{{h^2}} \over {{\xi ^2}}})\) with

*h*=

*u*

_{0}being the timelike component of the 5-velocity and

*β*a constant ([254], p. 53), while Thiry had had \(\left({{\mu \over \rho}} \right)Thi = {{\beta h} \over {\sqrt {1 + {{{h^2}} \over {{\xi ^2}}}}}}\) ([606], p. 78). Her interpretation of the scalar field was also different from the one given by Lichnerowicz (cf. the end of Section 10.5).

^{254}who extended Lichnerowicz’s results in relativistic hydrodynamics to “the formalism of the 5-dimensional unitary theories”. His matter tensor included “pressure”: Θ

_{αβ}

*r ν*

_{α}

*ν*

_{β}−

*p γ*

_{αβ},

*γ*

_{αβ}is the 5-dimensional Lorentz metric. His study of the congruences of the fluid’s streamlines comprised those with rotation: a “tenseur de tourbillon” Ω

_{αβ}=

*∂*

_{α}(

*Fν*

_{β}) −

*∂*

_{β}(

*Fν*

_{α}) was introduced by R. Guy which after projection to

*V*

_{4}took the form:

*μ*stands for electric charge,

*ϕi*for the electromagnetic 4-potential, and \(F = - exp\int\nolimits_{{p_0}}^p {{{dp} \over {\rho + p}}}\) where

*ρ*is the mass density.

P. Pigeaud used two metrics, the “natural” one *γ* following from the projection of *R*_{5} to *R*_{4}, and another one conformal to it *ξγ*. The first is employed for the calculation of the potentials (up to 2nd approximation), the 2nd for the study of the equations of motion. The reason is that for the “natural” metric uncharged test particles do not follow geodesics, yet for the conformal metric they do. At some point, Pigeaud had to make an ad hoc change of the energy-momentum tensor of matter (perfect fluid) not justified by empirical physics [495]. In a later development, Pigeaud did interpret the scalar fifteenth field variable as the field of a massive meson [387, 496]. The investigations within Jordan-Thiry theory were carried on by Aline Surin-Parlange to the case of perfect fluid matter with an equation of state *ρ* = *f* (*p*) where *ρ,p* are mass density and pressure, f is an arbitrary function. The Cauchy problem for this case was solved, the existence of hydrodynamical waves shown, and their propagation velocity determined. A. Surin compared both, the “singularity” method and the method using the vanishing of the divergence of the matter tensor in 1st order approximation: they gave the same results. Unlike F. Hennequin who had assumed for the metric components^{255} that *γ*_{04} and *γ*_{0A} are of the same order \({1 \over {{c^2}}}\), A. Surin assumed *γ*_{04} of order \({1 \over {{c^2}}}\), and *γ*_{0A} of the order \({1 \over {{c^3}}}\). Unfortunately, as in previous work, the resulting equation of motion for charged particles still were in conflict with the classical electrodynamic equations. Surin thus had to change her choice of metric to a conformal metric in space-time; she found that the equations of motion in first approximation are independent of the conformal metric. Nevertheless, she had to admit that this did not help: “These last results, particularly those concerning the first approximation to the equations of motion seem to necessitate a modification of the field equations.”^{256} ([597], thèse, p. 126). A. Surin went on to calculate the 2nd approximation, an arduous task indeed, but which did not make the theory physically more acceptable. Moreover, in 2nd approximation, as in general relativity the results from both methods did not agree. Surin noted, that a modification of the field equations already had been suggested by H. Leutwyler [360], but did not comment on it. He had started from a variational principle mixing 5- and 4-dimensional quantities:

*R*

^{(5)}is the 5-dimensional curvature scalar expressible, due to the cylindricity condition, by quantities in space-time. He claimed to have removed the additional terms which precluded the derivation of the correct equations of motion. We will briefly present the further dissertation of R. Vallée below in Section 11.2.1. Huyen Dangvu also studied Jordan-Thiry theory and disagreed with its interpretation by Mariot & Pigeaud as a theory describing massive mesonic particles ([106], p. 4309). According to him:

“It seems preferable to us to interpret

ϕas a scalar field without mass. Jordan-Thiry theory then will be a unitary theory of three massless fields: a scalar field, a vector field, and a 2-tensor field of spin 0, 1, 2, respectively.”^{257}

#### 11.1.2 Scalar-tensor theory in the 1960s and beyond

Around Y. Thiry in Paris, the study of his theory continued with J. Hély producing static spherically symmetric solutions of the field equations [253, 252, 251]. They describe a point particle with charge and mass and include the Schwarzschild metric. Due to the different field equations, a direct comparison with the earlier solution by Heckmann et al. of Jordan’s theory (cf. Section 3.1.2) seems not appropriate. However, H. Dangvu also contributed by looking at static and non-static spherically symmetric solutions to the Jordan-Thiry field equations in space-time.^{258} The solutions carry mass and some of them also electrical charge. Dangvu could compare them with those by Heckmann, Just, and Schücking in the Hamburg group around P. Jordan [108, 108].

From the full field (particle-) content of Kaluza-Klein theory, mainstream physics became interested most in the scalar field. In spite of the investigations within the framework of the ideas of Kaluza and Klein, and of Jordan’s approach within projective relativity, attention to the scalar field evolved in complete separation from its origin in unitary field theory. Soon, scalar-tensor theories were understood strictly as alternative theories of gravitation. We comment briefly on the loss of this historical perspective the more so as current publications on scalar-tensor theory are more interested in the subsequent modern developments than in the historical record [219, 58]. In the Anglo-Saxon literature, scalar-tensor-theories run under the name of “Brans-Dicke theory”, or, at best, *Brans-Dicke-Jordan theory*, i.e., two authors being late with regard to Jordan and Thiry are given most of the credit; cf. standard references like ([242], pp. 59, 64, 71, 77, 362); ([438], pp. 1068, 1070, 1098; ([698], pp. 125, 126, 341).^{259} True, the three groups of successive authors departed from different physical or mathematical ideas; Jordan from a varying gravitational constant as a hypothetical consequence of Dirac’s large number hypothesis, Thiry from a mathematical study of Kaluza-Klein theory and its global aspects, and Brans & Dicke from an implementation of their interpretation of Mach’s principle. A fourth author, W. Scherrer, must be included who was the first of all, and who considered the scalar field as a matter field coupled to gravitation; vid. Section 3.1.2 and [230]. Yet, one should keep in mind that, together with Yang-Mills theories and, perhaps non-local field theory, scalar-tensor theories of gravitation may be also considered as one surviving offspring of unitary field theory. Hence a total loss of historical memory with regard to the origins of scalar-tensor theory appears unjustified.^{260}

### 11.2 6- and 8-dimensional theories

Since Kaluza had proposed a 5-dimensional space as a framework for a unitary field theory of the gravitational and electromagnetic fields in 1919, both experimental elementary particle physics and quantum field theory had progressed. Despite the difficulties with divergencies, since the mid 1950s renormalization procedures had been stable enough to make quantum field theory acceptable and needed as a proper formalism for dealing with the known elementary particles. Nevertheless, in some approaches to unified field theory, it still was thought useful to investigate *classical* theory. Thus, in this context theories with new degrees of freedom for the new fields (*π*- and *μ*-mesons, neutrino) had to be constructed. We noticed that both in the Einstein-Schrödinger affine field theory and in the Jordan-Thiry extension of Kaluza’s theory such attempts had been made. The increase in the dimension of space seemed to be a handy method to include additional fields. In Section 7.2.2 of Part I, papers of Rumer, Mandel, and Zaycoff concerning 6-dimensional space have been mentioned. None of them is referred to by the research described below. It involved theorists working independently in the USA, Great Britain, and France.

#### 11.2.1 6-dimensional theories

The first of these, B. Hoffmann in Princeton, wanted to describe particles with both electric charge and magnetic charge *μ*. ^{261} Because the paths of electrically charged particles could be described as geodesics of Kaluza’s 5-dimensional space, he added another space-dimension. The demand now was that his particles with both kinds of charge follow geodesics in a 6-dimensional Riemannian (Lorentzian) space *R*^{6}. [277]. The coordinates in *R*^{6} are denoted here by *A,B* = 0,1, 2, 3, 4, ∞, in *R*^{5} by *α*, *β*, … = 0,1, …, 4, and in space-time *i*, *j*, = 1, 2, 3, 4. The metric *k*_{ab} of *R*^{6} contains, besides the metric *g*_{ij} of space-time, two vector fields *k*_{k0} = *ϕ*_{k}, *k* ∞*j* = *ψ*_{k} and three scalar fields *k*_{00},*k*_{0∞},*k*_{∞,∞}. The scalar fields are disposed of immediately: *k*_{00} = 1 (cylinder condition), *k*_{0∞} = 0, *k*_{∞,∞} = −1, while *ϕ*_{k} is taken to be the electrical 4-potential:\({\phi _{ij}} = 1/2({{\partial {\phi _i}} \over {\partial {x^j}}} - {{\partial {\phi _j}} \over {\partial {x^i}}})\) and *ψ*_{k} the corresponding quantity following from the dual of the electrical field tensor \({\psi ^{ij}} = {\phi ^{\ast ij}} = 1/2{(\sqrt {- g})^{- 1}}{\epsilon ^{ijrs}}{\psi _{rs}}\)

*R*

^{6}into space-time reads as:\({{{d^2}{x^k}} \over {d{s^2}}} + \{_{rs}^k\} {{d{x^r}} \over {ds}}{{d{x^s}} \over {ds}} - {e \over m}\phi _r^k{{d{x^r}} \over {ds}} - {\psi ^k}_r{\mu \over m}{{d{x^r}} \over {ds}} = 0\) In order that the geodesics are timelike curves, the condition \({g^{mp}}{g^{nq}}({{\partial {\phi _p}} \over {\partial {x^q}}} - {{\partial {\phi _q}} \over {\partial {x^p}}}) = {1 \over {2\sqrt {- g}}}{\epsilon ^{mnpq}}({{\partial {\psi _p}} \over {\partial {x^q}}} - {{\partial {\psi _q}} \over {\partial {x^p}}})\) must be fulfilled. It does as a consequence of the field equations derived from:

*R*

^{6}is \(C = R - {\phi ^r}_s{\phi ^s}_r - {\psi ^r}_s{\psi ^s}_r\) with

*R*being the curvature scalar of space-time. With topological questions not asked by him, Hoffmann’s excursion into 6-dimensional space for describing the path of a magnetic monopole was entirely unnecessary. In fact, in his next paper he applied the method of Einstein and Mayer [175] presented in Section 6.3.2 of Part I to his particle with electric and magnetic charge and developed a theory in 4 dimensions [276].

^{262}embarked on a unified field theory in six dimensions [498]. His motivation came from Dirac’s equation, more precisely from the algebra of the 15

*γ*-matrices, interpreted as representing the algebra of rotations in a 6-dimensional Riemannian space. His manifold

*V*

_{6}is decomposed into a flat and geodesic 2-dimensional “sheet” generated by a spacelike and a timelike translation

^{263}, and a 4-dimensional Lorentz space

*V*

_{4}(identified with space-time), both normal to each other. Likewise, any 6-vector can be decomposed into a part in the 2-sheet and a 4-vector. A material point particle is assumed to follow a geodesic of

*V*

_{6}. From the connection of

*V*

_{6}, an induced connection in 4 can be obtained. Invariance with regard to the translations is called “gauge”-invariance in

*V*

_{4}. This means that gauge-invariant quantities do not depend on the sheet-coordinates. It turned out that the metric of

*V*

_{6}, besides leading to the 4-dimensional metric

*g*

_{ij}, introduced two skew-symmetric tensors named

*fields of constraint*. One of them is interpreted as the electromagnetic field. The interpretation of the second skew field is left open. The scalars in the theory (norms and inner product of the translations) are assumed constant. The field equations were derived from the curvature scalar of

*V*

_{6}and obviously lead to Einstein’s vacuum field equations in six dimensions; a matter tensor in

*V*

_{6}is inserted by hand and restricted to charged pressureless matter. After a projection into

*V*

_{4}, it turned out that the currents and energy-momentum tensors of the two skew-symmetric fields had different signs: One field has a positive, the other a negative energy content. This was not seen as unphysical by the author; he commented: “So it seems that this theory may contribute to the problem of self-energy”, an allusion to the divergence problem in quantum field theory ([498], p. 235), and to the fact that the energy density can become negative in quantum field theory. But he was disappointed that the 2nd skew field also had infinite reach: its quanta are massless. He tried to mend this by demanding that a particle follow a

*lightlike*geodesic in

*V*

_{6}, but did not really succeed. His conclusion was: “A unitary field theory does not seem possible without introducing quantum theoretical concepts. This — classical — treatment therefore can only be incomplete” ([498], p. 258). Pauli noticed this paper; in the summer term 1953, he had given a course on general relativity including Kaluza’s 5-dimensional theory. In a letter to Fierz of 3 July 1953 referring to this course we can read:

Pauli’s interest really went toward a paper of Pais who had suggested a 6-dimensional“In it, also Kaluza’s 5th dimension did occur, and per se it is quite satisfying if now, in place of it,

twoadditional dimensions with the 3-dimensional rotation group are introduced (this has already been suggested, if only formalistic, by e.g., Podolanski who has a 6-dimensional space).” ([491], p. 186–187.)^{264}

*ω*-space consisting of space-time and an internal sphere-space affixed at any point [468]. From here, a direct line leads to Pauli’s (unpublished) derivation of the non-Abelian

*SU*(2) gauge theory presented in letters to Pais. For a detailed history cf. O’Raifeartaigh’s book ([463], Chapter 7). cf. also the section “A vision of gauge field theory” in [194], pp. 476–488.

When Josette Renaudie wrote her dissertation with A. Lichnerowicz and M.-A. Tonnelat on 6-dimensional classical unitary field theory in 1956, she also used elementary particles as her motivation [505, 506], ([507], p. 3; [508]). However, unlike Podolanski [498] and Yano & Ogane [715], she worked in a 6-dimensional Lorentz space: 2 space-dimensions are added. While Yano & Ogane employed a general 2-parameter isometry group and claimed to have the most general formalism, Renaudie admitted a general *Abelian* 2-dimensional isometry group, thus keeping 3 arbitrary scalar functions. Her two Killing vectors with regard to which the projection from 6-dimensional *V*_{6} along the trajectories of one Killing vector first to to *V*_{5}, and then with the 2nd Killing vector to space-time is performed, are spacelike. Again, an Einstein field equation *S*_{ab} = *P*_{ab}, (*A, B* = 0,1, …, 5) is written down with the “matter tensor” *P*_{ab} getting its interpretation backwards from the corresponding 4- and 5-dimensional quantities. The Einstein tensor now has 21 independent components and can be split into a rank 2 symmetric tensor, two 4-vectors and 3 scalar functions. Renaudie gave two interpretations: (1) these variables stand for a hyperfield composed of gravitational, electromagnetic and mesonic fields (with the mesonic field a complex vector field), and (2) the field of a particle of maximal spin 1 in interaction with the gravitational field (p. 68/69). Note that in both interpretations the scalar fields remain unrelated to physical quantities. The terms in the field equations describing the interaction of the mesonic and electromagnetic fields are independent of the geometrical objects in space-time. The Cauchy initial value problem can be set up and solved properly. ^{265}

*Γ*

_{IJ}is the metric in 6-dimensional space

*V*

^{6}with Lorentz signature,

*W*

_{I}with

*W*

^{I}

*W*

^{J}

*Γ*

_{IJ}= 1, the 6-velocity tangent to the streamlines, and

*P*> 0, Π > 0 denote “density” and “pressure” ([666], p. 36). An equation of state

*P*+ Π =

*f*(Π) is assumed in order to get the corresponding relation in space-time. Projection into space-time (metric

*g*

_{ij}) via

*V*

_{5}(metric

*γ*

_{αβ}) led to the matter tensor of a charged fluid of the form \(\rho {u_i}{u_j} + \tau _{ij}\prime\) with the electromagnetic energy-momentum tensor: \(\tau _{ij}\prime = {1 \over 2}(H_i^r{F_{jr}} + F_i^r{H_{jr}}) - {1 \over 4}{g_{ij}}{H_{rs}}{F^{rs}}\) Electromagnetic field

*F*

_{ij}and induction field

*H*

_{ij}were assumed to be related through

*H*

_{ij}=

*ξ*

^{3}

*F*

_{ij}where

*ξ*

^{2}= −

*γ*

_{00}stands for the additional scalar field in Jordan-Thiry theory. As with Renaudie,

*V*

^{6}admits a 2-parameter Abelian group of global isometries. This is research extending the work of Renaudie to further classes of fluids; it fits to the doctoral theses described in Section 11.1.1 — in essence, they presented formal developments with restricted relevance to the envisaged physics of unitary field theory.

In 1963, Mariot & Pigeaud again took up the 6-dimensional theory in a paper^{266} [388]. After the introduction of a conformal metric in *V*_{4}, \(g_{ij}^{\ast} = \eta \xi {g_{ij}}\), *i,j* = 1, 2, 3,4 with *ξ*^{2}, *η*^{2} being the norms squared of the 2 Killing vectors from the additional dimensions, they studied the linear approximation of the theory with incoherent matter *mu*_{i}*u*_{j}. They were able to identify in *V*_{4} matter tensors belonging to the electromagnetic field, to a neutral vector meson field and to both a massive neutral and a charged scalar meson field. Yet, some remaining terms were still not amenable to a physical interpretation.

#### 11.2.2 Eight dimensions and hypercomplex geometry

As early as 1934, an eight-dimensional space with two time-dimensions was introduced in order to describe the gravitational field corresponding to an accelerated electromagnetic field. It then turned out that the two time coordinates were related by the eight geodesic equations such that, essentially, a 7-dimensional Lorentz space remained. Einstein’s vacuum field equations in 8 dimensional space were assumed to hold [421, 422]. In view of the substantial input, the results, reached by approximate calculations only, were meagre: an approximate solution of the gravitational two-body problem; only static electric and constant magnetic fields could be described.

In the 1950s, the idea of using an 8-dimensional space as the stage for UFT seemingly arose by an extension of the mapping of connections in the same 4-dimensional space to a second copy of such a space. In Section 2.1.2 we have noted F. Maurer-Tison’s interpretation of (30): The transport of a covariant vector *ν*_{i} with regard to the connection \({{\tilde L}_{ij}}^k\) corresponds to the transport of the contravariant vector \(\underset v {{\rightarrow ^k}} = {g^{ks}}{v_s}\) with regard to \({L_{ij}}^k\). This situation was turned into a geometry named semi-metric by Pierre-V. Grosjean^{267} in which two identical 4-dimensional spaces (“distinct universes”) were introduced with the connection acting in one and its Hermitian conjugated connection \({\tilde L}\) in the other [235]. Inner products of vectors were allowed only if one vector is in the one space, the other in the second. His conclusion that the semi-metric geometry would be “the key to the unitary theory, in the same way as metric geometry was the key to general relativity” is more than overbearing. All that remains is a (physically empty) mathematical formalism the only consequence of which was to eventually motivate the scheme of applied mathematics to be discussed next.

*x*+

*ϵy*with real numbers

*x, y*and

*ϵ × ϵ*= 1 can be introduced: the hypercomplex numbers. Albert Crumeyrolle

^{268}built a unitary field theory of the Einstein-Schrödinger type on this number field [96, 97, 98, 95]. In a generalization of the formalism noted in Section 10.5.4, he now introduced a 2n-dimensional

*C*

^{∞}-space

*V*

^{2n}and local charts around points by assigning n hypercomplex numbers

*z*

^{α}=

*x*

^{α}+

*ϵx*

^{α}*, \({z^\alpha} = {x^\alpha} + \epsilon {x^{\alpha \ast}},\,\bar z = {x^\alpha} - \epsilon {x^{\alpha \ast}}\),

*α*,

*α** = 1, 2, …,

*n*. In another basis, \({z^\alpha} = {1 \over 2}({\xi ^\alpha} + {\xi ^{\alpha \ast}}) + \epsilon {1 \over 2}({\xi ^a} - {\xi ^{\alpha \ast}})\) The

*x*

^{α}, (

*ξ*

^{α}),

*x*

^{α}*, (

*ξ*

^{α}*) transform among themselves. Again, a “natural adapted reference system” was introduced in which dual bases derive one from the other by the regular and diagonal 2

*n*× 2

*n*-matrix in

*V*

^{2n}:

*A, Ā*are

*n ×n*-matrices with \(A = {{\partial {z^{{\alpha \prime}}}} \over {\partial {z^\lambda}}} = {{\partial {x^{{\alpha \prime}}}} \over {\partial {x^\lambda}}} + \epsilon {{\partial {x^{{\alpha \prime}}}} \over {\partial {x^{\lambda \ast}}}},\,\bar A = {{\partial {z^{{\alpha \prime}}}} \over {\partial {{\bar z}^\lambda}}} = {{\partial {x^{{\alpha \prime}}}} \over {\partial {x^\lambda}}} - \epsilon {{\partial {x^{{\alpha \prime}}}} \over {\partial {x^{\lambda \ast}}}}.\,{\rm{In}}\,{V^{2n}}\); locally a real symmetric covariant tensor could be introduced which decomposes in the coordinate system (

*z*

^{α},

*z*

^{α}*) into parts \({\gamma _{\alpha \beta}},{\gamma _{\alpha \ast\beta \ast}},{\gamma _{\alpha \beta \ast}}\). Likewise connections and special

*unitary*connections were defined. In the end, a system generalizing the weak field equations of UFT resulted. For the physicist, and the more so for the historian of physics, the paper is a maze of mathematical structures. The author’s statement that “a new field can be introduced the physical signification of which is not examined here but which could perhaps have something to do with the hypothesis of an

*inertial effect of the spin”*, remains unfounded ([97], p. 105).

## 12 Further Contributions from the United States

### 12.1 Eisenhart in Princeton

*Non-Riemannian Geometry*in 1927 [182], and since the twenties had had a long-standing interest in teleparallelism and UFT (cf. Section 6.4 of Part I and [181]). Being three years older than Einstein he had retired in 1945. Nevertheless, in the 1950s he wrote three further papers about UFT. He first introduced a non-symmetric metric

*g*

_{ij}and a non-symmetric connection [184] in 1951. Unlike Einstein, whose papers he did not refer to, Eisenhart did not take the connection \({L_{ij}}^k\) as an

*independent*variable but built it entirely from the metric tensor and its first derivatives such as the Japanese physicist K. Hattori

^{269}had done in the 1920s [240]:

*g*

^{ρν *}[

*μλ*

_{,ρ}] ([240], Eq. (1.6), p. 540). The tensor to be added was chosen by Eisenhart to be (indices are moved with the symmetric part of the metric):

*g*

_{(ij)}which is contained already in Hattori’s paper (Eisenhart’s Eq. (26)).

^{270}Eisenhart’s paper dealt only with differential geometry; no physical motivation or interpretation were given. This applies also to a subsequent publication in which, after formal manipulations, several expressions for possible curvature tensors and Einstein’s Hermitian-symmetrized Ricci tensor (196) were derived [185]. The 3rd edition of Einstein’s

*Meaning of Relativity*[150] now was referred to.

*metric-affine*geometry [186, 187, 188], and [189]. Although in a different geometrical setting, eventually the theory formally led to the Einstein-Maxwell field equations in Riemannian geometry. The main difference to Einstein’s approach was that Eisenhart kept the metric tensor

*g*

_{ij}

*symmetric*while embedding the electromagnetic field tensor

*F*

_{ij}into the connection by an ad-hoc ansatz [186]:

*F*

_{ij}is derived from a 4-potential and supposed to satisfy \({F_i}\,_{;s}^s = 0\).

^{271}Thus, vector torsion does vanish. In the first paper, Eisenhart’s field equations were:

*L*read as:

*λ*

^{k}satisfying

*R*

_{ij}= const.

*λ*

_{i}

*λ*

_{j}. A slight generalization of (441):

*mixed*geometry [190]. Starting from Einstein’s condition (200) on the metric, he aimed at solving it for the connection as a function of the metric and its first derivatives. Unaware of the solutions given previously (cf. Section 10.2.3), he achieved this only with the help of the additional constraint for torsion:

### 12.2 Hlavatý at Indiana University

Hlavatý^{272} is the fourth of the main figures in UFT besides Einstein, Schrödinger, and Tonnelat. His research was published first in a sizeable number of articles in the *Journal of Rational Mechanics and Analysis* of Indiana University^{273} and in other journals; they were then transformed into a book [269]. According to its preface, his main intent was “to provide a detailed geometrical background for physical application of the theory”. As he was very optimistic with regard to its relation to physics, he went on: “It so happens that the detailed investigation of Einstein’s geometrical postulates opens an easy way to a physical interpretation”([269], p. X). We have noticed in Section 9.7 that this possibly could not have been the case. In the preface of his book, Hlavatý became more explicit; his program was to encompass: (1) an investigation of the structure of the curvature and torsion imposed on space-time by the field equations, equations which he claimed to be “of a purely geometrical nature” without physical interpretation being “involved in them a priori”. The two further points of his program, i.e., (2) an attempt to identify the gravitational field and the electromagnetic field by means of the field equations, and (3) an investigation of the physical consequences of his theory, were treated only in “an outline of the basic ideas” ([269], p. XVIII). In comparison with Einstein, Schrödinger and Tonnelat who followed their physical and mathematical intuition, Hlavatý’s investigations were much more systematical and directed first to what could be proven by mathematics; whether a relation to physics could be established became secondary to him. Although mostly working and publishing alone, he corresponded with about 40 scientists working on UFT. He also was a frequent reviewer for *Mathematical Reviews* (cf. Section 18.1).

*g*

_{ij}according to the non-vanishing eigenvalues of its skew-symmetric part

*k*

_{ij}(remember

*ǩ*

^{ij}=

*h*

^{is}

*h*

^{is}

*k*

_{st}). He distinguished three classes:

*g*

_{(ij)}=

*h*

_{ij}is used for raising and lowering indices. From Eq. (30) he concluded that there are metrics

*g*

_{ij}for which this “metric compatibility” equation does not admit any solution”, and cases in which (30) admits more than one solution [261]. According to him, the condition for uniqueness of the solution is det(

*g*

_{lm})

*/*det(

*h*

_{rs}) =:

*g*≠ 0 if det(

*k*

_{lm})

*/*det(

*h*

_{rs}):=

*k*≠ 0 (class 1), and

*g*(

*g*− 2)) ≠ 0 if

*k*= 0 (class 2, 3). The gravitational potential is identified with

*g*

_{(ij)}=

*h*

_{ij}while the electromagnetic field is taken to be

^{274}[261]:

*k*= −

*sgn*[

*ϵ*

^{ijrs}

*k*

_{ij}

*k*

_{rs}]. The above classification of

*k*

_{ij}is thus valid also for the electromagnetic field. For classes 2 and 3, Hlavatý’s definition of the electromagnetic field is a variant of one we have already met in Section 9.7.

*g*

_{ij},

*h*

_{ij}and the decomposition (363) met before:

*h*

_{ij},

*k*

_{ij}and its first derivatives. Thus, after about 80 pages in his book including degenerate cases, in the end Mme. Tonnelat’s calculations were only simplified a bit by Hlavatý and made more transparent, with some details added.

*X*

_{k}. For vanishing

*X*

_{k}, the strong field equations, for

*X*

_{k}≠ 0, the weak field equations are following.

According to Hlavatý, the first two classes cannot be handled simultaneously with the third class ([266], p. 421). This makes it more involved to read his papers, because the results proven by him must now be distinguished according to the special class of *k*_{ij}.

#### 12.2.1 i) Fields of third class.

*R*

_{{[ik],j}}= 0 following from (449) by four complicated looking equations:

*Ȟ*

^{ij}and

*H*are the Ricci tensor and curvature scalar calculated from the symmetric part of the metric

*h*

_{ij}(i.e., from the Levi-Civita connection).

*G*is a scalar function for which, for the 2nd class \(G = {g \over h}\) and for the third class \(G = {g \over h} = 1\) hold.

*Q*

_{ij}received its meaning from what Hlavatý called “the gravitational field equations”, i.e., Einstein’s equations with a geometrical energy-momentum tensor of matter:

*T*

_{ij}:=

*υ*

_{i}

*υ*

_{j}+

*Q*

_{ij}.

*υ*

_{i}describes both the charge density and the mass density of matter which thus are related. As charge density it is defined by: \({\upsilon ^k}\sqrt h = {\partial _s}({f^{sk}}\sqrt h)\), with

*f*

^{ij}from (446); mass density by \({\upsilon ^k}\sqrt h = \phi M\sqrt h {u^k}\) with a scalar function

*ϕ*and the unit vector

*u*

^{k};

*M*is the mass of a particle ([269], p. 175–176). In Hlavatý’s theory, Maxwell’s equations were taken to be:

*S*

_{i}= 0, we also have \({\upsilon _i} = - {\sigma \over 2}{\epsilon _{pqri}}{h^{ps}}{\overset {\{\} h} \nabla _s}\check k^{qr}\) Of course, the electromagnetic field in (446), for the third class, reduces to \({f_{ij}} = - {1 \over 2}\sqrt {\vert h\vert} {\epsilon _{ijlm}}\check k^{lm}\).

*Q*

_{ij}= 0, and from (451)\({\overset {\{\} h} \nabla _s}(M{u^s}{u^k}) = 0\). A somewhat disappointing consequence is that, in a manageable approximation, charged particles remain unaffected by the electromagnetic field: they move along geodesics in the gravitational field

*h*

_{ij}([264], p. 329; [269], p. 174, 187). Upon neglect of the cubic terms in

*f*

_{ij}, i.e., for

*U*

_{ij}≃ 0, the equation of motion coincides with the geodesic equation:

“In the unified theory the electromagnetic field is always present; hence we might look upon it as a primary field which […] creates the gravitational field. However, there is at least one known electromagnetic field which does not create a gravitational field (i.e., the field of the plane wave in the electromagnetic theory of light).” ([266], p. 420.)

#### 12.2.2 ii) Fields of class 1 and 2.

*f*=

*det*(

*f*

_{rs}), and two new quantities were introduced:

_{ij}now reads as \(\sigma {k_{ij}} = {1 \over 2}{\epsilon _{ijkl}}{F^{kl}} + {L_{ij}}\). Tangent vectors

*w*

^{k}and

*W*

^{k}were defined by

*G*. The gravitational and Maxwell equations (451) and (452) remain the same except for an exchange of

*υ*

_{i}by

*w*

_{i}and a different complicated expression for

*GQ*

_{ij}if

*R*

_{{[ik],j}}= 0 is kept as a field equation; cf. [269], p. 204, Eq. (20.3a,b), p. 203 Eqs. (20.1), (20.2b). Hlavatý did present an exact spherically symmetric solution with

*g*

_{00}= 1,

*g*

_{11}=

*B*(1 −

*Ar*

^{−4}),

*g*

_{22}=

*r*

^{2},

*g*

_{33}=

*r*

^{2}sin

^{2}

*θ, A,B*constants which is obtained from Papapetrou’s solution (cf. Section 8.3) by setting there

*m*=

*λ*= 0. The electromagnetic field in Hlavatý’s solution is \({f^{23}} = {{\sqrt A} \over {{r^4}{{\sin}^2}\theta}}\). The gravitational function replacing the gravitational constant is

*G*= (1 −

*Ar*

^{−4})

^{−1}. But in this case, according to Hlavatý “we are unable to derive the second set of Maxwell’s equations from our field equations” ([269], p. 208). Therefore, as for classes 1, 2, this field equation again is replaced by (450). In consequence, for the motion of a particle Hlavatý obtained an improved result: A (massive) charged particle moving freely in the unified field

*g*

_{ij}describes an auto-parallel of the unified connection \({L_{ij}}^k\) ([269], p. 211). Thus, two of the three effects in the planetary system were the same as in general relativity; the third (Perihelion shift) in his theory depended on the electrical field of the sun. Hlavatý did not get as far as to clearly show the experimental physicist how this electric field enters the formula for the perihelion shift.

For paths of photons Eq. (453) still holds. If gravitation is neglected, i.e., *h*_{ij} = *η*_{ij}, Hlavatý found a discrepancy with the special relativistic explanation of the Michelson-Morley experiment. Although he referred to the judgment of Shankland et al. that Miller’s result is erroneous [575], he concluded: “From the point of view of the unified field theory Miller’s result, properly interpreted, is not necessarily at variance with the assumption of the constant velocity of light.” ([266], p. 471).

Hlavatý’s research will be appealing to some by its logical guideline concerning mathematical structures. His many special cases and set up “agreements” in proving results are somewhat bemusing for a physicist. An example is given by his publications dealing with the special case *h* = 0, *g* ≠ 0 when the symmetric part *h*_{ij} of the metric *g*_{ij} is degenerated [267, 268]. It is a purely mathematical exercise meant to fill a gap, but is without physical meaning. For the cases in which the theory could be applied to physical systems, in principle, Hlavatý was also forced to alter the original field equations in order to avoid objections against the unphysical results following from them. It is not unfair to conclude that he did not succeed in making a break-through in the sense of his physical interpretations being more convincing than those suggested by others.

The investigations of his doctoral student R. Wrede^{275} were directed to the mathematical structure of the theory: He partially extended Hlavatý’s theory to an n-dimensional space by adhering to the two principles: A.) The algebraic structure of the theory is imposed on the space by a general real tensor *g*_{ab}; B.) The differential geometrical structure is imposed on the space by the tensor *g*_{ab} by means of a connection defined by (30). Hlavatý’s third principle, i.e., the existence of the constraints *R*_{ab} = *∂*_{[a}*X*_{b]}, \({R_{ab}} = {\partial _{\left[ a \right.}}{X_{\left. b \right]}},\,{S_{ar}}^r = L_{\left[ {a\left. r \right]} \right.}^r = 0\) with an arbitrary vector field *X*_{a} is left out [708]. The paper solves (30) in *n* dimensions for the various possible cases.

### 12.3 Other contributions

^{276}, tried to look at UFT from the point of view of the electromagnetic field forming a link between the description of microscopic charges by quantum field theory and macroscopic ray optics [5]. He introduced four postulates:

- (1)
Any unified field theory should reduce to Einstein-Maxwell theory in a first approximation for weak electromagnetic fields.

- (2)
First-order corrections to the Coulomb field of the electron should not become appreciable for

*r*≥ 10^{−13}cm. - (3)
The affine connection has the form \({\Gamma _{ij}}^k = {C_{ij}}^k + {\Gamma _j}\delta _i^k\), where Γ

_{j}is related to the vector potential of the Maxwell field. Also \({C_{ij}}^k = {C_{ji}}^k\) is assumed. - (4)
The Lagrangian must be invariant under the combined gauge transformation \({\Gamma _{ij}}^k \rightarrow {\Gamma _{ij}}^k + {\Lambda _{,j}}\delta _i^k\) and (for the metric) g

_{ij}→ exp[2Λ(*x*)]*g*_{ij}. The metric tensor is also symmetric.

*g*

_{ij}is supposed to “be measured by rods and clocks” and used to set up the Lagrangian; the second asymmetric one is derived from the Lagrangian: \({{\hat g}\prime}^{ij}: = \delta {\mathcal L}/\delta {R_{ij}}\). It is an auxiliary device for the introduction of the electromagnetic field. Arnowitt chose the Lagrangian:

*α*

_{1},

*α*

_{2}of dimension (

*length*)

^{2}. The theory looks similar to Buchdahl’s gauge-invariant UFT published in the same year (cf. Section 13.1) but is different. Immediately,

_{j}and

*g*

^{ij}are to be varied. From the first two variations \({{\hat g}{\prime\left[ {i\left. s \right]} \right.}}{\,_{;s}} = 0,\,{{\hat g}{\prime ij}}{\,_{;k}} = 0\) and \({C_{ij}}^k = {1 \over 2}{h{\prime (ks)}}({h\prime}_{\left({is} \right),j} + h_{\left({js} \right),i}\prime - h_{\left({ij} \right),s}\prime)\) resulted where

*h′*

^{ij}was introduced by \({{\hat g}{\prime (ij)}} = h{\prime ^{ij}}\sqrt {- h\prime}\) and interpreted to be the “gravitational” metric tensor. The first of these equations was rewritten as sourceless Maxwell equation such that

*g*

_{ij}is the “electromagnetic” metric tensor:

*a*≃ −

*κ*

^{2}

*ρ*

_{e}

*c*

^{2}with \({\rho _e}{c^2} = {{{e^2}} \over {r_1^4}},\,{r_1} \sim {{{e^2}} \over {m{c^2}}}\) the classical electron radius,

*m*the electron mass, and

*κ*the gravitational constant in Einstein’s equations.

*g*

^{ij}led to:

*g*

_{ij}=

*g*

_{(ij)}+

*h*

_{ij}with small

*h*

_{ij}, the free parameters

*α*

_{1},

*α*

_{2}were fixed to be

*α*

_{1}≃

*κρ*

_{e}

*c*

^{2}and (

*α*

_{2})

^{−1}≃ 4

*λ*with the cosmological constant

*λ*. Thus,

*α*

_{1}is the microscopic length parameter mentioned above. In linear approximation, the author also has obtained a static, spherically symmetric Schwarzschild-like solution with an event horizon and finite electrical field (and field energy) for

*r*→ 0.

^{277}

The auxiliary field *F*_{ij} satisfies the vacuum Maxwell equations.

## 13 Research in other English Speaking Countries

### 13.1 England and elsewhere

*p*

^{2}

*m*

^{ik}

*K*

_{ik}to Einstein’s Lagrangian of UFT [34]. They are:

^{278}

The assignment of *g*_{(ij)} to the gravitational potentials and of *g*_{[ij ]} to the electromagnetic field was upheld while the electric current became defined as *J*_{ijk} = *g*_{{[ij],k}}.

*g*

_{ij}=

*η*

_{ij}+

*γ*

_{ij}of Bonnor’s field equations up to the first order in

*γ*led to:

*J*

_{ijk}=

*γ*

_{{[ij],k}}such that the previous equation looked like

*∂*

^{s}

*∂*

_{s}

*J*

_{ijk}. = −4

*p*

^{2}

*J*

_{ijk}. For a spherically symmetric particle at rest with radial coordinate

*r*, Bonnor obtained

*ρ*is the charge density. For 2

*i p*=

*a*

^{2}and

*ρ*→ 0 for

*r*→

*∞*, the charge density will be restricted

^{279}to \(\rho = {\rm{const}}.{1 \over r}{e^{- {a^2}r}}\). As M.-A. Tonnelat remarked, Bonnor’s strategy was simply to add a term leading to Maxwell’s energy-momentum-stress tensor ([634], p. 919). Abrol & Mishra later re-wrote Bonnor’s field equations with help of the connections defined in (51) and (52) of Section 2.2.3 [2].

^{280}as part of his doctoral thesis. It was based on a complex metric in (real) space-time:

*g*

_{ij}:=

*s*

_{ij}+

*a*

_{ij}with real

*s*

_{ij}, imaginary

*a*

_{ij}, and \(\ast{s^{ri}}{s_{rk}} = \delta _k^i\). Correspondingly, the

*symmetrical*linear connection \({\Gamma _{ij}}^k = \ast{\Gamma _{ij}}^k + {{\hat \Gamma}_{ij}}^k\) split into a real connection part

_{*}\(_\ast{\Gamma _{ij}}^k\) and an imaginary valued tensor \({{\hat \Gamma}_{ij}}^k\)

^{281}His approach to UFT then differed considerably from Einstein’s. In place of (16) of Section 2.1.1 now

*imaginary a*

_{ij}is entering on both sides; cf. Eqs. (8)–(10), p. 624 in [439]. It seems that Moffat did know neither Einstein’s papers concerning UFT with a complex metric [147, 148] (see Section 7.2) nor Hattori’s connection. This is unsurprising in view of his thesis advisors F. Hoyle and A. Salam which were not known as specialists in UFT.

^{282}Now, \({g_{ij}}: = \ast{g_{ij}} + {{\hat g}_{ij}}\) and \(\ast{s^{ir}}\ast{g_{rk}} = \delta _i^k\). As a real Lagrangian, Moffat chose:

*G*the Newtonian gravitational constant. According to Moffat: “The real tensor

**T*

_{ij}represents the energy-momentum of matter, while \({{\hat T}_{ij}}\) is the charge-current distribution.” A weak-field-approximation

*g*

_{ij}=

*η*

_{ij}+

*h*

_{ij}+

*γ*

_{ij}with real

*h*

_{ij}and imaginary

*γ*

_{ij}is then carried through. In 1st approximation, the wave equation \(\square \gamma _{ij}\prime = 16\pi {{\hat T}_{ij}}\) resulted where \({{\gamma{\prime}}_{ij}}: = {\gamma _{ij}} - {1 \over 2}{\delta _{ij}}{\gamma _{rr}}\) and \({\eta _{ij}} \simeq - {\delta _{ij}}\). For slowly moving point particles and weak fields, Maxwell-Lorentz electrodynamics was reached. After an application of the EIH-approximation scheme up to the 6th approximation omitting cross tems between charge and mass, Moffat concluded:

^{283}“we have derived from the field equations the full Lorentz equations of motion with relativistic corrections for charged particles moving in weak and quasi-stationary electromagnetic fields.” In a note added in proof he claimed that his method of winning the equations of motion was valid also for “quickly varying fields and fast moving particle” ([440], p. 487). In place of the Reissner-Nordström metric, he obtained as a static centrally symmetric metric [441]:

*ϵ*denotes the electric charge. Upon criticism by W. H. McCrea and W. B. Bonnor, Moffat included the “dipole procedure” of Einstein and Infeld in his derivation of the equations of motion [442]. R. P. Kerr found that the field equations (477), together with the boundary conditions at spacelike infinity, are not sufficient to determine the spherically symmetric solution. This holds even when four coordinate conditions are added [324].

^{284}as a PhD student in Cambridge, UK, expressed the opinion,

“[…] that a correct and unified quantum theory of fields, without the need of the so-called renormalization of some physical constants, can be reached only through a complete classical field theory that does not exclude gravitational phenomena.” ([343], p. 1396.)

*b*= det(

*b*

_{kl}) and

*b*

_{kl}is the inverse to the symmetric part

*g*

^{(ij)}of the asymmetric metric

*g*

_{ij}=

^{a}

*ij*+

*iq*

^{−1}

*ϕ*

_{ij}.

^{285}I assume that his Ricci tensor

*R*

_{ij}is the same as the one used by Einstein in [149], i.e., \(\underset - K {\,_{jk}}\).

*g*

_{ij}= −

*δ*

_{ij}+

*h*

_{ij}+

*i ϕ*

_{ij}which neglected the squares of

*h*

_{ij}, the cubes of

*ϕ*

_{ij}, and interaction terms between

*h*

_{ij},

*ϕ*

_{ij}, Kursunŏglu obtained the following results:

*J*

_{ij}= 2∂[

_{i}

*J*

_{j}], and

*T*

_{ij}= −

*T*′

_{ij}.Both

*ϕ*

_{ij}and

*f*

_{ij}are identified with the electromagnetic field:

*h*

_{ij}with the Einstein field equations of general relativity, the relation

*p*

^{2}

*q*

^{−2}= 2

*G*/

*c*

^{4}with the gravitational constant

*G*ensued. Kursunŏglu then put the focus on the equation for the electrical current density derived from (302) after a lengthy calculation:

*w*

_{k}(…) is a function describing the interaction terms; it consists of 11 products of

*h*with

*f*or

*h*or

*J*(and up to their 2nd derivatives). The r.h.s. of (482) then was summarily replaced by

*κ*

^{−1}by having two electrons collide with an energy of the order of

*mc*

^{2}. Quantum theoretically the wavelength corresponding to this energy is \({\hbar \over {mc}}\), which is much larger than

*κ*

^{−1}.” ([343], p. 1375.)

As to the equations of motion, Kursunŏglu assumed that (30) is satisfied and, after some approximations, claimed to have obtained the Lorentz equation, in lowest order with an inertial mass \({m_0} = {1 \over {2{c^2}}}\kappa \,{e^2}\) (cf. his equations (7.8)–(7.10)); thus according to him, inertial mass is of purely electromagnetic nature: no charge — no mass! Whether this result amounted to an advance, or to a regress toward the beginning of the 20th century is left open.

*p*→

*∞*. In the note, a Lagrangian differing from (478) appeared:

*B*

_{rs}= 2∂[

_{r}

*B*

_{s}] is an auxiliary field variable [509].

G. Stephenson from the University College in London altered Einstein’s field equation as given in Appendix II of the 4th London edition of *The Meaning of Relativity*^{286} by replacing the constraint on vector torsion *S*_{j} = 0 by *S*_{r}*S*^{r} = *a* with constant *a*, and by introducing a vector-potential *A*_{j} for the electromagnetic field tensor *k*_{ij} [588]. His split of (30) for the symmetric part coincided with Tonnelat’s (363), but differed for the skew-symmetric part from her (362) of Section 10.2.3. The missing term is involved in Stephenson’s derivation of his result: Dirac’s electrodynamics \({\overset {\{_{ij}^k\}} \nabla _s}{{\check k}^{is}} = {A^i}\). Hence the validity of this result is unclear.

*Mathematical Reviews*[MR0068357]:

“The Einstein paper contains three separate sections. In the first section the author expresses the symmetric part \(\Lambda _{\lambda \mu}^v = \Gamma _{(\lambda \mu)}^v\) of the unified field connection \(\Gamma _{\lambda \mu}^v\) by means of its skew symmetric part \(S_{\lambda \mu}^v = \Gamma _{\left[ {\lambda \left. \mu \right]} \right.}^v\), and vice versa. Then he identifies the electromagnetic field withk_{λμ}=g_{[λμ ]}and imposes on it the first set of Maxwell conditionsThe second set of Maxwell conditions is equivalent to the Einstein condition \(S_{\lambda \alpha}^\alpha = 0\) However, according to the author, there appears to be no definite reason for imposing the additional condition (1). In the second part the author considers Einstein’s condition$${{{d^2}{x^\nu}} \over {d{s^2}}} + \left\{{\begin{array}{*{20}c} {\nu \;} \\ {\lambda \,\mu} \\ \end{array}} \right\}{{d{x^\lambda}} \over {ds}}{{d{x^\mu}} \over {ds}} + {F_\mu}^\nu {{d{x^\mu}} \over {ds}} = 0$$(1)coupled with$${R_{[\mu \lambda ]}} = 2{\partial _{\left[\mu\right.}}{X_{\left.\lambda \right]}}$$(2)(where$${R_{[\mu \lambda ]}} = - {D_\alpha}S_{\mu \lambda}^\alpha$$D_{α}denotes the covariant derivative with respect to \(\Lambda _{\lambda \mu}^v\)). Hencewhere \(T_{\mu \lambda}^v = T_{\left[ {\mu \left. \lambda \right]} \right.}^v\), is a solution of$$S_{\mu \lambda}^\nu = 2{X_{\left[\mu \right.}}\delta _{\left.\lambda \right]}^\nu + T_{\mu \lambda}^\nu ,$$(3)Therefore \({S_{\lambda \alpha}}^\alpha = 0\) is equivalent to$${D_\alpha}T_{\mu \lambda}^\alpha = 0.$$(4)and the field equations reduce to 16 equations (4) and$${X_\mu} = - {1 \over 3}{T_{\mu \alpha}}^\alpha$$(5)R_{(μλ)}^{=}0. In the third part the author considers all possibilities of defining \(\Gamma _{\lambda \mu}^v\) by means of the derivatives ofg_{λμ}with all possible combinations of Einstein’s signs (+ +), (+ −), (−−). He concludes that in both cases (i.e. for real or complexg_{λμ}) only the (+ −) derivation leads to a connection \(\Gamma _{\lambda \mu}^v\) without imposing severe restrictions ong_{λμ}.”

#### 13.1.1 Unified field theory and classical spin

Each of the three scientists described above introduced a new twist into UFT within the framework of — real or complex — mixed geometry in order to cure deficiencies of Einstein’s theory (weak field equations). Astonishingly, D. Sciama^{287} at first applied the full machinery of metric affine geometry in order to merely describe the gravitational field. His main motive was “the possibility that our material system has intrinsic angular momentum or spin”, and that to take this into account “can be done without using quantum theory” ([565], p. 74). The latter remark referred to the concept of a classical spin (point) particle characterized by mass and an antisymmetric “spin”-tensor *s*_{αβ}, *α*, *β* = 1,2,3. Much earlier, Mathisson (1897–1940) [392, 391, 393], Weyssenhoff (1889–1972) [695, 694] and Costa de Beauregard (1911–2007) [87], had investigated this concept. For a historical note cf. [584]. Sciama did not give a reference to C. de Beauregard, who fifteen years earlier had pointed out that both sides of Einstein’s field equations must become asymmetric if matter with spin degrees of freedom is generating the gravitational field. Thus an asymmetric Ricci tensor was needed. It also had been established that the deviation from geodesic motion of particles with charge or spin is determined by a direct coupling to curvature and the electromagnetic field \(R_{jkl}^i{{d{x^j}} \over {ds}}{F^{kl}}\) or, analogously, curvature and the classical spin tensor \(R_{jkl}^i{{d{x^j}} \over {ds}}{s^{kl}}\). The energy-momentum tensor of a spin-fluid (Cosserat continuum), discussed in materials science, is skew-symmetric. What Sciama attempted was to *geometrize* the spin-tensor considered before just as another field in space-time.

*g*

_{ij}, and space-time with metric

*l*

_{ij}where \({l_{rjg}}^{(rk)} = \delta _j^k\), an attribution which we have seen before in the work of Lichnerowicz. This implied that spinless particles moved on geodesics of the metric

*l*

_{ij}, even if the gravitational field is generated by a massive spinning source, while spinning particles move on non-geodesic orbits determined by the non-symmetric connection. Sciama’s field equations were:

Perhaps, Sciama had convinced himself that mixed geometry was too rich in geometrical objects for the description of just one, the gravitational interaction. In any case, in his next five papers in which he pursued the relation between (classical) spin and geometry, he went into UFT proper [565]. He first dealt with the electromagnetic field which he identified with an expression looking like homothetic curvature: \({V_{kl}} = \overset s K {\,^j}_{jkl}\, = \,{\partial _k}{\Gamma _l} - {\partial _l}{\Gamma _k}\). However, here \({\Gamma _k}: = {L_{\left[ {k\left. r \right]} \right.}}^r = {S_k}\) In order to reach this result he had introduced a complex tetrad field^{288} and defined a complex curvature tensor \(\overset s K {\,^i}_{jkl}\), skew-symmetric in one pair of its indices and “skew-Hermitian” in the other. In analogy to Weyl’s second attempt at gauge theory [692], he arrived at the trace of the tetrad-connection as his “gauge-potential” without naming it such. He also introduced a “principle of minimal coupling” as an equivalent to the “equivalence principle” of general relativity: matter must not directly couple to curvature in the Lagrangian of a theory. M.-A. Tonnelat and L. Bouche [646] then showed that Sciama’s non-symmetric theory of the pure gravitational field [565] “implies that the streamlines of a perfect fluid (*T*^{μν} = *ρv*^{μ}*v*^{ν}) are geodesics of the Riemannian space with metric *g*^{(ij)} These streamlines are not geodesics of the metric *g*_{(ij)}, but deviate from them by an amount which, in first approximation, agrees with a heuristic formula occurring in Costa de Beauregard’s theory of the gravitational effects of spin [89]”.^{289}

“The majority of physicists considers with some reserve unified field theory. In this article, my intention is to suggest that such a reserve is not justified. I will not explain or defend a particular theory but rather discuss the physical importance of non-Riemannian theories in general.” ([566], p. 1.)

^{290}

Sciama’s main new idea was that the holonomy group plays an important rôle with its subgroup, Weyl’s *U* (1), leading to electrodynamics, and another subgroup, the Lorentz group, leading to the spin connection. Although he gave the paper of Yang & Mills [712] as a reference, he obviously did not know Utiyama’s use of the Lorentz group as a “gauge group” for the gravitational field [661]. C. de Beauregard‘s reaction to Sciama’s paper was immediate: he agreed with him as to the importance of embedding spin into geometry but did not like the two geometries introduced in [565]. He also suggested an experiment for measuring effects of (classical) spin in space-time [88].

*ψ*like a (classical) Dirac spinor, he defined the spin-flux as \({S_A}_B^i: = {{\partial {\mathcal L}} \over {\partial {\psi _{,i}}}}{\sigma _{AB}}_\psi\) where

*σ*

_{AB}is a fitting representation of the Lorentz group. The indices

*A, B*= 0, 1, 2, 3 are tetrad-indices (

*real*tetrad \(e_i^A\)), introduced by \({g_{ij}} = {\eta _{AB}}e_i^Ae_j^B\). Seemingly, at that point Sciama had not known Cartan’s calculus with differential forms and reproduced the calculation of tetrad connection and curvature tensor in a somewhat clumsy notation. The result of interest is:

*complex*tetrad allowed him to define the electromagnetic field as before. At the time, he must have had an interaction with T. W. B. Kibble who’s paper on “Lorentz Invariance and the Gravitational Field” introduced the Poincaré group as a gauge group

^{291}[325]. Sciama’s next paper did not introduce new ideas but presented his calculations and interpretation in further detail [568]. Two years later, when the ideas of Yang & Mills and Utiyama finally had been accepted by the community as important for field theory, Sciama for the first time named his way of introducing the skew-symmetric part of the connection “the now fashionable ‘gauge trick’” ([569], p. 465, 466). His interpretation of UFT had changed entirely:

“We may note in passing that the result (7) [here Eq. (488)] suggests that unified field theories based on a non-symmetric connection have nothing to do with electromagnetism.” ([569], p. 467)

C. de Beauregard had expressed this opinion three years earlier; moreover his doubts had been directed against the “unified theory of Einstein-Schrödinger-type” in total [90]. In the 1960s, the subject of classical spin and gravitation was taken up by F. W. Hehl [245] and developed into “Poincaré gauge theory” with his collaborators [246].

### 13.2 Australia

^{292}in Tasmania, Australia, added a further definition for the electrical current, i.e., \({{\hat j}^k} = {{\hat g}^{[kl]}}{\,_{,l}}\). Then, in linear approximation, from (211), the unacceptable restriction

*∂*

_{l}

*∂*

^{l}

*j*

^{k}= 0 followed. In order to remedy this defect, Buchdahl suggested another set of field equations which, with an appropriate Lagrangian, did not imply any restriction on the thus defined electric current [64]:

*A*

_{k}an arbitrary vector. Unfortunately, from a linear approximation in which only the antisymmetric part of the metric is considered to be weak, an unacceptable result followed: “Consequently, if one wishes to maintain an unrestricted current vector is would seem that the introduction of a vector potential

*Ai*in the manner above must be abandoned.” ([65], p. 1145.) With the asymmetric metric

*g*

_{ij}having gauge weight +1 the determinant

*g*is of gauge weight +2 (\(+ {d \over 2}\) for dimension

*d*of the manifold).

*g*

_{ij}and linear connection \({L_{ij}}^k = \{_{ij}^k\} - \delta _{(i}^k{k_{j)}} + {1 \over 2}{g_{ij}}{k^k}\). The gauge transformation is given by

*g*

_{ij}→

*λg*

_{ij},

*k*

_{i}→

*k*

_{i}+

*∂*

_{i}(

*lnλ*). Tensor densities now have both a coordinate weight

*z*[cf. (21) of Section 2.1.1], and a gauge weight

*v*defined via the covariant derivative by:

*R*then is of gauge weight −1. Consequently, a gauge-invariant Lagrangian density must contain terms quadratic in curvature like \(\sqrt {- g} {R^2}\). Buchdahl used the gauge-invariant Hermitian Ricci tensor \(- \overset {\rm{Her}} {{{\underset - K}_{ik}}}\) in Eq. (73) of Section 2.3.2, and the field equations [66]:

### 13.3 India

^{293}considered an affine theory using two variational principles such as Schrödinger [553] had sugested in 1946 [9]. Besides his Ricci tensor

*R*

_{jk}corresponding to \({\underset - K _{jk}}\) of (55) he used another one \({{\tilde R}_{jk}}\) turning out to be equal to: \({\underset - K _{jk}} - 2{\overset + \nabla _j}{S_k} - {V_{kj}}\). The two Lagrangians used were \({\mathcal L} = \sqrt {\det ({R_{jk}}))}, \tilde {\mathcal L} = \sqrt {\det ({{\tilde R}_{jk}}))}\). The resulting field equations were:

^{294}refined Hlavatý’s classification of the skew-symmetric part

*k*

_{ij}by allowing all signatures (“indices of inertia”) for the symmetric part

*h*

_{ij}of the asymmetric metric and by splitting Hlavatý’s third class into two [432]:

*K*)(1 − 3

*K*) ≠ 0 for

*K*

^{2}=

*k*, no new mathematical ideas were introduced. Physics was not mentioned at all. Also, Mishra contradicted Kichenassamy’s papers in which Tonnelat’s results had been upheld contrary to criticism by Hlavatý [326, 327]. Like in Wrede’s paper, Mishra considered the generalization of “the concepts of Einstein’s unified field theory to n-dimensional space” as well and derived “some recurrence relations for different classes of

*g*

_{λμ}” [435]. In another paper with S. K. Kaul, Mishra generalized Veblen’s identities (71) of Section 2.3.1 to mixed geometry with asymmetric connection. The authors obtained 4 identities containing 8 terms each and with a mixture of ±-derivatives [323]. I have seen no further application within UFT. From my point of view as a historian of physics, R. S. Mishra’s papers are exemplary for estimable applied mathematics uncovering some of the structures of affine and/or mixed geometry without leading to further progress in the physical comprehension of unified field theory (cf. also [429, 296]).

^{295}

*H, G*and

*I*being functions of the single variable

*x*

^{1}[526]. In Hlavatý’s classification, the metric was of second class. In terms of physics, static, one-dimensional gravitational and electromagnetic fields were described. The particular set of solutions obtained consisted of metric components with algebraic functions of \(\sinh ({{\sqrt {3\lambda}} \over 2}{x^1})\) and \(\cosh ({{\sqrt {3\lambda}} \over 2}{x^1})\), and showed (coordinate?) singularities. As a physical interpretation, Sarkar offered the analogue to a Newtonian gravitating infinite plane. The limit \(\underset {\lambda \rightarrow 0} {\lim}\) in the metric components led back to Bandyopadhyay’s solution [7] referred to in Section 9.6.2 (with some printing errors removed by Sarkar):

*a, b, d, k*.

*G,H,K*are functions of

*x*

^{1}. The solutions found are static and with coordinate singularities. To give just one metrical component:

*M, C*

_{1},

*C*

_{2}constants. No physical interpretation was given.

*A, B, C*are functions of

*x*

^{3}=

*z, x*

^{0}=

*t*, and

*ρ*,

*σ*functions of

*x*

^{3}−

*x*

^{0}=

*z*−

*t*. The electromagnetic field is defined by \({F_{ij}}: = {1 \over 2}\sqrt {- g} {\epsilon _{ijrs}}{g^{rs}}\). All 64 components of the connection were calculated, exactly. However, in order to determine the components of the Ricci-tensor, second and higher powers of

*ρ*,

*σ*and their derivatives were omitted (“weak electromagnetic field”). Consequently, the solutions obtained, are only approximate. This holds also for solutions of the strong field equations (268) likewise considered.

^{296}Sometimes, exact solutions were announced but given only implicitly, pending the solution of nonlinear 1st order algebraical or/and differential equations; for wave solutions cf. [347].

## 14 Additional Contributions from Japan

We already met Japanese theoreticians with their contributions to non-local field theory in Section 3.3.2, to wave geometry as presented in Section 4.3, and to many exact solutions in Section 9.6.1. The unfortunate T. Hosokawa showed, in the paper mentioned in Section 4.3, that “a group of motions of a Finsler space has at most 10 parameters” [287]. Related to the discussion about exact solutions is a paper by M. Ikeda on boundary conditions [299]. He took up Wyman’s discussion of boundary conditions at spacelike infinity and tried to formulate such conditions covariantly. Thus, both spacelike infinity and the approach to it were to be defined properly. He expressed the (asymmetric) metric by referring it to an orthormal tetrad tetrad \({g_{ij}} \rightarrow {a_{AB}} = {g_{ij}}\xi _A^i\xi _B^j\) where \(\xi _A^i\) are the tetrad vectors, orthonormalized with regard to \({e_A}{\delta _{AB}},{e_A} = \pm 1\). The boundary condition then was \({a_{AB}} \rightarrow {e_A}{\delta _{AB}}\) for *ρ* → *∞*, where \(\rho (PQ): = \int\nolimits_P^Q {\sqrt {{\gamma _{ij}}d{u^i}d{u^j}}}\) and the integral is taken over a path from *P* to *Q* on a spacelike hypersurface *x*^{k} = *x*^{k} (*u*^{1}, *u*^{2}, *u*^{3}, *σ*) with parameters *u*^{i} and metric *γ*.

*g*

_{ab}=

*h*

_{ab}, +

*k*

_{ab}, they read as:

*h*

_{ab}. The authors derive integrability conditions for (497); it turns out that for space-time the maximal group of motions is a 6-parameter group.

^{297}

Possibly, in order to prepare a shorter way for solving (30), S. Abe and M. Ikeda engaged in a systematic study of the concomitants of a non-symmetric tensor *g*_{ab}, i.e., tensors which are functionals of *g*_{ab} [301, 300]. A not unexpected result are theorems 7 and 10 in ([301], p. 66) showing that any concomitant which is a tensor of valence 2 can be expressed by *h*_{ab}, k_{ab}, \({k_{ar}}{k^r}_b,{k_{ar}}{k^r}_s{k^s}_b\) and scalar functions of \({g \over h},{g \over k}\) as factors. In the second paper, pseudo-tensors (e.g., tensor densities) are considered.

It can be viewed as “the common tangential segment of the oriented sphere with center *ξ*^{k} and radius \(r = \int [{\phi _s}{x^k}){{d{\xi ^s}} \over {dt}} + {\phi _4}({x^k})]dt \ldots\)” ([599].

## 15 Research in Italy

### 15.1 Introduction

*The Meaning of Relativity*in an Italian translation in 1950 and 1953

^{298}seems to have given a boost to research on UFT in Italy. Bruno Finzi

^{299}went about a fresh derivation of the field equations (287) to (290). He started from the Lagrangian Einstein had used in the 4th Princeton edition of his book [156], i.e.,

*R***

_{ik}[cf. Section 2.3.2, Eq. (83)]. However, he did not proceed by varying Einstein’s Lagrangian with regard to the (asymmetric) metric but instead by varying its solenoidal and irrotational parts, separately [201]. While arriving at the correct result, his method is no less arbitrary than what Einstein had tried himself. As one of the major figures in research in the geometry of relativity and unified theories, Finzi became a favoured reviewer of UFT in Italy [473, 202, 203]. He made it very clear that the theory did not predict new empirical facts: “Until now, no prevision of verifiable new physical facts have emerged from this unified theory”,

^{300}but remained a firm believer in Einstein’s unified theory:

“The charm of this theory lies in its generality, its simplicity, and, let’s say it clearly, in its beauty, attributes which the utmost Einsteinian synthesis possesses, more than any other noted today.” ([473], p. 306)

^{301}

In this spirit, contributions of mathematicians like I. Gasparini Cattaneo (1920–2011) [75], or A. Cossu (1922–2005) [85, 86], and more or less formal mathematical manipulations by Italian researchers played an important part in the work on UFT. The other leading elder figure Maria Pastori^{302} and some of her students present a main example. Already in the 1930s, she had published on anisotropic and “conjugated” skew-symmetric tensors. Hattori’s paper sparked her interest: she intended to reduce his two assumptions concerning skew-symmetric tensors to one [480, 482, 481]. Now in the 1950s, she studied the properties of the new tensorial objects appearing within UFT [483, 484, 485]. Elisa Brinis considered parallel transports conserving the scalar product of two vectors with a non-symmetric fundamental tensor [61].

B. Todeschini arrived at an inhomogeneous d’Alembert’s equation in which the electromagnetic tensor coupled to torsion [609]. F. Graiff derived expressions for the commutation of the ±− derivatives; she also studied alternative forms for the electromagnetic tensor (*k*_{ij}, *R* [*ij* ], or its duals) in first and second approximation according to the scheme (499) given below [232, 233]. By adding a term to the Einstein-Straus Lagrangian depending only on the metric tensor, F. de Simoni showed how to trivially derive from a variational principle all the different systems of field equations of UFT including those suggested by Bonnor, or Kursunŏglu (cf. Section 13.1) [115]. Laura Gotusso generalized a theory suggested by Horváth with a Riemannian metric and the connection \({L_{ik}}^l = {L_{(i}}_{k)}^l + {F_{\left[ i \right.}}^l{j_{\left. k \right]}}\) where *j*_{k} is the electrical current vector \({j^i} = \sigma {{d{x^i}} \over {ds}}\). The torsion vector thus is proportional to the Lorenz force \({S_i} = {1 \over 2}{F_i}^s{j_s}\) and the autoparallels describe the motion of a charged point particle^{303} [285]. Gotusso generalized Horváth’s theory by adding another tensor to the connection: \(\overset {{\rm{Got}}} L {\,_{ik}}^l = {L_{(i}}_{k)}^l + {F_{\left[ i \right.}}^l{j_{\left. k \right]}} + {U_{ik}}^l\) satisfying \({U_{ik}}^l{F^{ik}} = 0\). With regard to this connection \({g_{\underset + i \underset + {k\Vert l}}} = 0\) [231]. The Ricci tensor belonging to the connection introduced was not calculated.

### 15.2 Approximative study of field equations

^{304}we owe investigations closer to physics.

^{305}In a series of papers, he followed an approximative approach to the field equations of UFT by an expansion of the fundamental tensor starting from flat space:

*b*

_{ij},

*c*

_{ij}were assumed to be small of 1st and 2nd order. In linear approximation, the connection then read [652] as:

*b*

_{(ij)}) or to the electromagnetic field

*F*

_{ij}∼

*b*

_{[ij ]}. In the identification by Udeschini, i.e.,

*e*

^{ijrs}

*b*

_{[rs]}=:

*ψF*

^{ij}, where

*ψ*is a constant, the field equations then were:

*b*

_{(ir)},

_{s}

*η*

^{rs}−

*b*

_{rs,i}

*η*

^{rs}= 0 was used. In this approximation, the current density, \({{\hat I}^k} = {1 \over 2}{\epsilon ^{klmn}}{g_{mn,l}}\) satisfies □

*Î*

^{k}= 0.

*c*

_{ij}, the field equations lead to an inhomogeneous wave equation □

*c*

_{(ij)}=

*B*

_{(ij)}with a lengthy expression for

*B*

_{ij}built up from products of

*b*

_{ij}and \(\overset 1 L {\,_{ij}}^k\) as well as squares of \(\overset 1 L {\,_{ij}}^k\). Further equations are

*c*

_{[ir ]},

_{s}

*η*

^{rs}=

*N*

_{i}and □

*ϵ*

^{klmn}

*c*

_{[mn ],l}=

*ϵ*

^{klmn}

*B*

_{[mn ],l}, with

*N*

_{i}being a sum of products of

*b*

_{rs}and

*b*

_{rs,t}. For the electrical 4-current density, in 2nd approximation [658] \(\square\overset 2 {{I^k}} = 2{\epsilon ^{klmn}}{\eta ^{rs}}{\eta ^{pq}}{b_{\left[ {r\left. m \right],p} \right.}}({b_{(sn),ql}} - {b_{(nq),sl}})\). As a result, in the 2nd approximation the field equations for the gravitational and electromagnetic fields now intertwine. From his more general approach, Udeschini then reproduced the special case Schrödinger had treated in 1951 [558], i.e.,

*b*

_{(ij)}= 0,

*c*

_{[ij ]}= 0: An electromagnetic field, small of first order, generates a gravitational field small of second order. The reciprocal case, i.e., a gravitational field small of first order cannot influence an electromagnetic field of second order [655].

*ν*of a spectral line by the unified field due to

*g*

_{(00)}=

*b*

_{00}+

*c*

_{00}with \({c_{00}} = {\psi ^2}\mu _0^2{H^2}\) and

*H*the polar magnetic field:

*U*is the Newtonian gravitational potential [656, 659, 660]. This result depends crucially on the interpretations for the gravitational and electromagnetic fields. If, in place of

*g*

_{(ij)}, the quantity

*l*

_{ij}is chosen to describe the gravitational field (potential), then the 2nd term with the magnetic field drops out of (503) ([660], p. 446). Due to this and to further ambiguities, it makes no sense to test (503); at best, the constant

*ψ*eventually needed for other experiments could be determined.

*F*

_{ij}to the quantity

*R*

_{[ij ]}[389]. In first approximation, \({F_{ij}} = {1 \over 2}\square{b_{\left[ {ij} \right]}}\), while in second approximation

*A*

_{[ij ]}again containing derivatives of products of

*b*

_{ij}and \(\overset 1 L {\,_{jk}}^k\) and of products of \(\overset 1 L {\,_{jk}}^k\). A. Zanella wrote down a formal scheme of field equations which in any order n of the approximation looked the same as in the 2nd order field equations. The r.h.s. term in, e.g., \(A\overset n c {\,_{(ij)}} = \overset n B {\,_{(ij)}}\) contains combination of quantities obtained in all previous orders. Convergence was not shown [723].

### 15.3 Equations of motion for point particles

“In the equations for the unified field, no energy-tensor has been introduced: only the external problem outside the sources of the unified field (masses and charges), assumed to be singularities, exists” ([659], p. 74).

^{306}

As mentioned in Section 10.3.2, Emilio Clauser (1917–1986) used the method of Einstein & Infeld in order to derive equations of motion for point particles. In [81], he had obtained an integral formula for a 2-dimensional surface integral surrounding the singularities. With its help, Clauser was able to show that from Einstein’s weak field equations for two or more “particles” all classical forces in gravitation and electromagnetism (Newton, Coulomb, and Lorentz) could be obtained [82]. In his interpretation, *g*_{(ik)} stood for the gravitational, *g*_{[ik ]} for the electromagnetic field.

^{307}In the

*n*-th step of approximation, the field equations are:

*λ*

^{4}contribute, in the skew-symmetric part terms from

*λ*

^{3}on. The Newtonian and Coulomb forces exerted on on a “particle” from the others, appear in the terms ∼

*λ*

^{4}together with a force independent of distance and not containing the masses of the “particles”. After laborious calculations, the Lorentz force showed up in the terms ∼

*λ*

^{6}. This result is the very least one would have expected from UFT: to reproduce the effects of general relativity and of electrodynamics.

In a subsequent paper by Clauser, Einstein’s weak system for the field equations of UFT was developed in every order into a recursive Maxwell-type system for six 3-vectors corresponding to electric and magnetic fields and intensities, and to electric and magnetic charge currents [83]. Quasi-stationarity for the fields was assumed.

C. Venini expanded the weak field equations by help of the formalism generated by Clauser and calculated the components of the fundamental tensor *g*_{ik}, or rather of \({\gamma _{ik}}: = ({g_{(ik)}} - {\eta _{ik}} - {1 \over 2}{\eta _{ik}}{\eta ^{rs}}({g_{(rs)}} - {\eta _{rs}})\), directly up to 2nd approximation: \({\overset 4 \gamma _{ik}},{\overset 4 \gamma _{00}}\), and \({\overset 5 \gamma _{0m}}\) [672]. He applied it to calculate the inertial mass in 2nd approximation and obtained the corrections of special and general relativity; unfortunately the contribution of the electrostatic field energy came with a wrong numerical factor [673]. He also calculated the field of an electrical dipole in 2nd approximation [674]. Moreover, again by use of Clauser’s equation of motion, Venini derived the perihelion precession for a charged point particle in the field of a second one. It depends on both the charges and masses of the particles. However, his formula is not developed as far as that it could have been used for an observational test [675]. In hindsight, it is astonishing how many exhausting calculations Clauser and Venini dedicated to determining the motion of point particles in UFT in view of the ambiguity in the interpretation and formulation of the theory.

## 16 The Move Away from Einstein-Schrödinger Theory and UFT

Toward the end of the 1950s, we note tendencies to simplify the Einstein-Schrödinger theory with its asymmetric metric. Moreover, publications appear which keep mixed geometry but change the interpretation in the sense of a de-unification: now the geometry is to house solely alternative theories of the gravitational field.

Examples for the first class are Israel’s and Trollope’s paper ([308] and some of Moffat’s papers [440, 441]. In a way, their approach to UFT was a backward move with its use of a geometry Einstein and Schrödinger had abandoned.

“If, then, group-theoretical considerations are accepted as a basic guiding principle in the construction of a unified field theory, it will be logically most economical and satisfactory to retain the symmetry of the fundamental tensor

g_{ik}, while admitting non-symmetrical Γ_{ij}k.” ([308], p. 778)

*g*

^{ij}=

*g*

^{(ij)}and \(\underset - K = \underset - K {\,_{ij}}{g^{ij}}\);

*a,b*,.… arbitrary constants. The electromagnetic tensor is identified with \(\underset - K {\,_{[ij]}}\), and

*L*

_{[is ]}

^{s}=

*S*

_{i}“corresponds roughly to the 4-potential”. The field equations, said to follow by varying

*g*

^{ij}and \(L_{[ij]}^k\) independently, are given by:

*M*

_{ij}with

*M*

_{ij}

*g*

^{ij}= 0 is the Maxwell energy-momentum-tensor calculated as if its argument were the electromagnetic field. For

*b*=

*c*=

*d*= 0,

*W*

_{ij}reduces to the Einstein tensor. If

*s*

_{ij}is defined by \({s_{ir}}{{\hat s}^{jr}} = \delta _i^j\sqrt {- \det ({{\hat s}^{jr}})}\), an interpretation of

*s*

_{ij}as the metric suggests itself. It corresponds to the definition of the metric by a variational derivative in the affine theories of Einstein and Schrödinger.

*a*≠ 0,

*b*= 0,

*c*= 0 is assumed, and Schrödinger’s star-connection (232) introduced, the field equations of Israel & Trollope reduce to the system:

In the lowest order of an expansion *g*_{ij} = *η*_{ij} + ϵ*γ*_{ij}, it turned out that the 3rd equation of (512) becomes one of Maxwell’s equations, i.e., *γ*^{is},_{s} = 0, and the first equation of (513) reduces to \(\underset - K {\,_{(ij)}} = 0\). In an approximation up to the 4th order, the Coulomb force and the equations of motion of charged particles in a combined gravitational and electromagnetic field were obtained.

### 16.1 Theories of gravitation and electricity in Minkowski space

“Madame Tonnelat, whose papers on the unitary theories you know well, is interested with Mr. Vigier

^{308}and myself in these aspects of the quantum problem, which of course are very difficult.”^{309}

^{310}[641]. At the same time, in 1961, when Tonnelat took up the topic again, W. Thirring investigated a theory in which gravitation is described by a tensor potential (symmetric tensor of rank 2) in Minkowski space. The allowed transformation group reduces to linear transformations, i.e., the Poincaré group. He showed that the Minkowski metric no longer is an observable and introduced a (pseudo-)Riemannian metric in order to make contact with physical measurement [603]. This was the situation Tonnelat and her coworkers had to deal with. In any case, her theory was not to be seen as a bi-metric theory like N. Rosen’s [515, 516], re-discovered independently by M. Kohler [335, 336, 337], but as a theory with a metric, the Minkowski-metric, and a tensor field (potential) describing gravitation [638]. Seemingly, without knowing these approaches, Ph. Droz-Vincent suggested a bi-metric theory and called it “Euclidean approach to a metric” in order to describe a photon with non-vanishing mass [127]. In view of the difficulties coming with linear theories of gravitation, Tonnelat was not enthusiastic about her new endeavour ([641], p. 424):

“[…] a theory of this type is much less natural and, in particular, much less convincing than general relativity. It can only arrive at a more or less efficient formalism with regard to the quantification of the gravitational field.”

^{311}

*C*with the trace of the gravitational tensor potential: \(C = \alpha {\psi _s}^s\) α a proportionality-constant ([196], p. 216).

^{312}Without the mass term, it then contained three free parameters

*α, a*

_{1},

*a*

_{3}. After fixing the constants in the Pauli-Fierz Lagrangian, Thirring considered:

*M*denotes a mass parameter.

^{313}

*ψ*

_{pq}is the gravitational potential. A more general Lagrangian than (515) written up in further papers by Tonnelat and Mavridès with constants

*a, b, c*, and the matter tensor

*M*

^{pq}[412, 640] corresponds to an alternative to the Pauli-Fierz Lagrangian which is not ghost-free:

^{314}

*lin*of its argument

*∂*

_{r}

*∂*

_{s}

*ψ*

_{mn}also containing the free parameters.

*T*

_{pq}(=

*M*

_{pq}) is the (symmetric) matter tensor for which, from the Lagrangian approach follows

*∂*

_{r}

*T*

^{kr}= 0. However, this would be unacceptable with regard to the conservation law for energy and momentum if matter and gravitational field are interacting; only the sum of the energy of matter and the energy of the tensor field

*ψ*

_{mn}must be conserved:

*canonical*energy-momentum tensor of the

*ψ*-field is defined by

*ψ*. For example, if in the general Lagrangian (516)

*a*= 1,

*b*= −1,

*c*= 0 are chosen, the canonical tensor describing the energy-momentum of the gravitational field is given by ([73], Eq. (1.3), p. 87)

^{315}:

*ψ*: =

*η*

^{rs}

*ψ*

_{rs}. As a consequence, (517) will have to be changed into

*nonlinear*equation. It is possible to find a new Lagrangian from which (521) can be derived. This process can be repeated ad infinitum. The result is Einstein’s theory of gravitation as claimed in [238]. This was confirmed in 1968 by a different approach [118] and proved — with varying assumptions and degrees of mathematical rigidity — in several papers, notably [117] and [684]. In view of this situation, the program concerning linear theories of gravitation carried through by Tonnelat, her coworker S. Mavridès, and her PhD student S. Lederer could be of only very limited importance. This program, competing more or less against other linear theories of gravitation proposed, led to thorough investigations of the Lagrangian formalism and the various energy-momentum tensors (e.g., metric versus canonical). The (asymmetrical) canonical tensor does not contain the spin-degrees of freedom of the field; their inclusion leads to a symmetrical, so-called

*metrical*energy-momentum tensor [17]. Which of the two energy-momentum-tensors was to be used in (521)? The answer arrived at was that the metrical energy-momentum-tensor tensor must be taken [647, 355, 354].

^{316}

Because (518) is used to derive the equations of motion for particles or continua, this answer is important. In the papers referred to and in further ones, equations of motion of (test-) point particle without or within (perfect-fluid-) matter were studied. Thus, a link of the theory to observations in the planetary system was established [411, 413, 414]. In a paper summing up part of her research on Minkowskian gravity, S. Lederer also presented a section on perihelion advance, but which did not go beyond the results of Mme. Mavridès ([354], pp. 279–280). M.-A. Tonnelat also pointed to a way of making the electromagnetic field influence the propagation of gravitational waves by introducing an induction field \({{\hat F}^{pq,r}}\) for gravitation [639]. In the presence of matter, she defined the Lagrangian“In an Euclidean theory of the gravitational field, the motion of a test particle can be associated to conservation of mass and energy-momentum only if the latter is defined through the metrical tensor, not the canonical one” [647], p. 373).

^{317}

*u*

^{p}is the 4-velocity of matter and

*ϵ′*,

*μ′*constants corresponding now to a gravitational dielectric constant and gravitational magnetic permeability. The gravitational induction was \({{\hat F}^{pq,r}} = 2{{\partial {{\mathcal L}_{{\rm{mat}}}}} \over {\partial {\psi _{pq,r}}}}\) and the field equations became:

“These, obviously formal, conclusions allow in principle to envisage the influence of an electromagnetic field on the propagation of the ‘gravitational rays’, i.e., a phenomenon inverse to the 2nd effect anticipated by general relativity” ([639], p. 227).

^{318}

*η*

_{ij}by a metric

*g*

_{ij}containing the gravitational field tensor ϕ

_{ij}:

*g*

_{ij}=

*η*

_{ij}+

*ϕ*

_{ij}. This led to

*m*

_{A},

*A*= 1,2,…,

*n*and 4-velocity \(u_A^i\):

*f*

_{i}is a functional of the derivatives of the retarded potential. The second term on the left hand side led to self-acceleration. In a calculation by S. Mavridès in the framework of a linear theory in Minkowski space with Lagrangian:

*χ*,

*κ*coupling constants and

*k*a numerical constant,

*M*

_{A}is connected with gravitational mass [415]. No value of

*k*can satisfy the requirements of leading to the same radiation damping as in the linear approximation of general relativity and to the correct precession of Mercury’s perihelion. By proper choice of

*k*, a loss of energy in the two-body problem can be reached. Thus, in view of the then available approximation and regularization methods, no uncontested results could be obtained; cf. also [416]; [643], pp. 154–158; [644], pp. 86–90).

### 16.2 Linear theory and quantization

*ψ*

_{ij}:

*H*

_{αβ},

*λ*

_{μ}(

*x*) simulating the properties of the curvature tensor.

^{319}In particular, the curvature tensor was assumed to describe a gravitational pure radiation field such that

*l*

_{α}is a null vector field tangent to the lightcone

*l*

_{αβ}

*dx*

^{α}

*dxβ*= 0. Indices are moved with

*l*

_{αβ}and

*l*

^{αβ}where \({l_{\alpha \rho}}{l^{\beta \rho}} = \delta _\alpha ^\beta\) cf. (4) and Section 10.5.3. Let

*K*

_{αβ, λμ}(

*l*) be the Fourier transform of

*H*

_{αβ,λμ}(

*x*) and build it up from plane waves:

**A, B**=

**1, 2**and \(n_\alpha ^A\) are spacelike orthogonal and normed vectors in the 3-space touching the lightcone along

*l*

_{α}. The amplitudes \(a(A,B,\overset \rightarrow l)\) are then replaced by creation and annihilation operators satisfying the usual commutation relations [373], ([382], pp. 127–128). Lichnerowicz’ method served as a model for his and M.-A. Tonnelat’s group in Paris. We are interested in this formalism in connection with Kaluza-Klein theory as a special kind of UFT.

**A, B**=

**0, 1, 2**and

*x*

^{0}is the 4th spacelike coordinate; the Greek indices are running from 0 to 4. In the tensor

*H*

_{αβ, λμ}(

*x*) in (1, 4)-space, through

*H*

_{α0, λμ}(

*x*) =

*β∂*

_{α}

*F*

_{λμ},

*β*a constant, also the electromagnetic field tensor

*F*

_{λμ}is contained such that both, commutation relations for curvature and the electromagnetic field, could be obtained [129]. In a later paper,

*β*

^{2}= 2

*χ*was set with

*χ*being the coupling constant in Einstein’s equations [133]. The commutation relations for the electromagnetic field

*F*

_{ij}were

^{320}:

This would have to be compared to the Gupta-Bleuler formalism in quantum electrodynamics.

*V*

^{5}and obtained the commutation relations:

*ϵ*

^{2}introduced into the Klein-Gordon equation but not following from the field equations. In space-time, from (536):

*β∂*

_{μ}

*F*

_{ij}=

*KH*

_{μ0ij}. The tensor \({H_{\alpha \beta \lambda \mu}} = - ({\partial ^2}_{\sigma \lambda}{\alpha _{\kappa \mu}} - {\partial ^2}_{\sigma \mu}{\alpha _{\kappa \lambda}} + {\partial ^2}_{\kappa \mu}{\alpha _{\sigma \lambda}} - {\partial ^2}_{\sigma \lambda}{\alpha _{\kappa \mu}})\) corresponds to

*H*

_{αβ,λμ}in (531).

*ϕ*

_{AB},

*A*,

*B*= 0, 1,…, 4 comprising massive fields of spin 0, 1, and 2 ([353], pp. 381–283). For the quantization, she started from the linearization of the 5-dimensional metric in isothermal coordinates

*γ*

_{AB}=

*η*

_{AB}+

*k*

_{AB},

*∂*

_{5}

*k*

_{AB}= 0, and the relation \({k_{AB}} = {\phi _{AB}} + {a \over {{\mu ^2}}}{\partial _{AB}}{\Phi ^{(0)}} + b{\eta _{AB}}{\Phi ^{(0)}}\), where

*a, b*are parameters with 1 +

*a*+ 3

*b*= 0, Φ

^{(0)}=

*η*

^{MN}

*ϕ*

_{MN}, and

*μ*

^{2}≠ 0 is connected to the mass of the field.

^{321}The

*Φ*

_{AB}were expressed by creation- and annihilation operators

*K*

_{AB}(

*q*),

*K*

_{CD}* (

*q*) and expanded in terms of an orthonormal tetrad \(n_S^{(r)}\) with \({\Sigma _r}n_A^{(r)}n_B^{(r)} = {1 \over {{\mu ^2}}}{q_A}{q_B} - {\eta _{AB}}\) tangential to the 4-dimensional surface \({q^R}{q_R} - {\mu ^2} = 0\),

*q*

_{5}= 0, i.e., \({K_{AB}} = {\Sigma _{rs}}C(r,s,q)n_A^{(r)}n_B^{(s)}\). The

*C*(

*r, s, q*) were assumed to be self-adjoined operators with commutation relations \([{C^{\ast}}(ij,q),C(lm,{q{\prime}})] = ({\delta _{im}}{\delta _{jl}} + {\delta _{jm}}{\delta _{il}} - \tilde b{\delta _{ij}}{\delta _{lm}})\delta ({q^R}{q_R} - {\mu ^2})\). \({\tilde b}\) is a new numerical parameter. The commutation relations for the fields then were calculated to have the form:

^{322}and among others by A. Capella [72] and Cl. Roche [511].

These papers differ in their assumptions; e.g., Droz-Vincent worked with the traceless quantity \({k_{AB}} - {1 \over 2}{\eta _{AB}}{\eta ^{MN}}{k_{MN}}\), for *a* = 0,\(\tilde b = 0\), and thus for *d* = −1 his results agree with those of S. Lederer. In his earlier paper, A. Capella had taken *η*^{MN}*k*_{MN} = 0, and *μ* = 0. Claude Roche applied the methods of Ph. Droz-Vincent to the case of mass zero fields and quantized the gravitational and the electromagnetic fields simultaneously.

### 16.3 Linear theory and spin-1/2-particles

*O*

_{2}of 2-dimensional real orthogonal matrices. For its infinitesimal generator

*A*, exp(2

*πA*) = 1 holds wherefrom he introduced the integer

*n*by

*A*

^{2}= −

*n*

^{2}. He interpreted −

*n*≤ 0 as the electric charge of a particle and brought charge conjugation (

*x*

^{5}→ −

*x*

^{5}) and antiparticles into his formalism [582]. Souriau also asked whether quantum electrodynamics could be treated in the framework of Thiry’s theory, but for obvious reasons only looked at wave equations for spin-0 and spin-1/2 particles. As a result, he claimed to have shown the existence of two neutrinos of opposite chirality and maximum violation of parity in

*β*-decay [583]. By comparing the (inhomogeneous) 5-dimensional wave equation for solutions of the form of the Fourier series \(\phi = \sum\nolimits_{n = - \infty}^{+ \infty} {{\phi _n}({x^1}, \ldots, {x^4})\exp (in{x^5})}\) with the Klein-Gordon equation in an electromagnetic field, he obtained the spectrum of eigenvalues for charge

*q*and mass

*m*:

*a*the “mass”-term of the 5-dimensional wave equation, i.e., a free parameter.

*ξ*is the scalar field:

*ξ*

^{2}= −

*g*

_{55}. For

*q*=

*e*,

*n*= 1,

*ξ*is of the order of magnitude ≃ 10

^{−32}cm. Souriau also rewrote Dirac’s equation in flat space-time of five dimensions as an equation in quaternion space for 2 two-component neutrinos. His interpretation was that the electromagnetic interaction of fermions and bosons has a geometrical origin. The charge spectrum is the same as for spin-0 particles except that the constant

*a*in (541) is replaced by −

*a*

^{2}.

O. Costa de Beauregard applied the linear approximation of Souriau’s theory for a field variable *H*_{αβ} to describe the equations for a spin-1/2 particle coupled to the photon-graviton system. He obtained the equation \({\partial _\alpha}{\partial ^\alpha}{H_{5k}} = - 2i{k_5}{{\hbar \chi} \over c}\bar \phi \gamma k\phi (\alpha, \beta = 1,2, \ldots 5;k = 1,2, \ldots 4)\), where the wave function *ϕ* again depends on the coordinate *x*^{5} via exp(*k*_{5}*x*^{5}); as before, χ is the coupling constant in Einstein’s field equations. Comparison with electrodynamics led to the identification \({k_5} = {e \over {\hbar \sqrt {2\chi}}}\) with *e* the electric charge. Costa de Beauregard also suggested an experimental test of the theory with macroscopic bodies [91].

### 16.4 Quantization of Einstein-Schrödinger theory?

^{323}Lichnerowicz determined the “commutators corresponding to vector meson and to an electromagnetic field (spin 1) on one hand and to a microscopic gravitational field (spin 2, mass 0) on the other hand […] in terms of propagators” [378]. The linearization was obtained by looking at field equations for the varied metric and connection. Let Ψ

_{ij}:=

*δg*

_{ij}be such a variation of the metric

*g*

_{ij}and \({X_{ij}}^k: = \delta {L_{ij}}^k\) a variation of the connection \({L_{ij}}^k\). It is straightforward to show that the variation of the Ricci tensor is \(\delta {R_{ij}}(L) = {\nabla _s}{X_{ij}}^s - {\nabla _j}{X_{is}}^s = (- \delta \underset - K {\,_{ij}}(L))\), where the covariant derivative is taken with regard to the connection formed from

*g*

_{ij}. Also, \(2{X_{ij}}^k = {\nabla _j}{\Psi _i}^k + {\nabla _i}{\Psi ^k}_j - {\nabla ^k}{\Psi _{ji}}\). Ph. Droz-Vincent then looked at field equations for a connection with vanishing vector torsion and with Einstein’s compatibility equation (30) varied, i.e., \(\delta {g_{\underset + i \underset - k \Vert l}} = 0\):

*λ*and arbitrary Γ

_{k}[131].

^{324}The Riemannian metric which is varied solves

*R*

_{ij}−

*λg*

_{ij}= 0 (Einstein space). Droz-Vincent showed that the variation Ψ

_{ij}must satisfy the equations:

*D*is a differential operator different from the Laplacian Δ for the Riemannian metric introduced by Lichnerowicz ([375], p. 28) such that ∇

*D*≠

*D*∇.

*k*

_{i}=

*k*

_{i}(Ψ) is defined by \({k_i}(\Psi) = {\nabla ^r}{\Psi _{ri}} - {1 \over 2}{\nabla _i}{\Psi _s}^s\) (indices moved with

*g*

_{ij}). Equation (543) follows from the vanishing of vector torsion.

“The endeavour to establish such a program is, to be sure, a bit premature in view of the missing secure physical interpretation of the objects to be quantized.”

^{325}

Ph. Droz-Vincent sketched how to write down Poisson brackets and commutation relations for the Einstein-Schrödinger theory also in the framework of the “theory of the varied field” ([130]. In general, the main obstacle for quantization is formed by the constraint equations, once the field equations are split into time-evolution equations and constraint equations. Droz-Vincent distinguished between proper and improper dynamical variables. The system \({R_{ij}} = 0,{D_k}{{\hat g}^{\underset + i \underset - j}} = 0\), where *D* signifies covariant derivation with respect to the star connection (27), led to 5 constraint equations containing only proper variables arising from general covariance and *λ*-invariance. By destroying *λ*-invariance via a term \({{\hat g}^{rs}}{\Gamma _r}{\Gamma _s}\), one of the constraints can be eliminated. The Poisson brackets formed from these constraints were well defined but did not vanish. This was incompatible with the field equations. By introducing a non-dynamical timelike vector field and its first derivatives into the Lagrangian, Ph. Droz-Vincent could circumvent this problem. The physical interpretation was left open [133, 135]. In a further paper, he succeeded in finding linear combinations of the constraints whose Poisson brackets are zero modulo the constraints themselves and thus acceptable for quantization [136].

## 17 Alternative Geometries

“[…] this theory does not pursue the hidden aim of substituting general relativity but of exploring in a rather heuristic way some specifically tough and complex domains resulting from the adoption of the principles of a non-Euclidean theory […]”. ([382], p. 327)

^{326}

We will now describe theories with a different geometrical background than affine or mixed geometry and its linearized versions.

### 17.1 Lyra geometry

*x*

^{i}→

*x*

^{i}

^{′}=

*x*

^{i′}(

*x*

^{1},

*x*

^{2}, …,

*x*

^{n}) a gauge transformation

*x*

^{0′}=

*f*

^{0}(

*x*

^{1},

*x*

^{2}, …;

*x*

^{n},

*x*

^{0}(

*x*

^{1},

*x*

^{2}…,

*x*

^{n})) with gauge function

*f*is introduced. The subgroup of coordinate transformations is given by those transformations for which

*f*

^{0}(

*x*

^{1},

*x*

^{2},…,

*x*

^{n};

*x*

^{0}) =

*x*

^{0}. A change of the reference system implies both coordinate and gauge transformations. Tangent vectors

*ξ*

^{s}under a change of coordinates and gauge transform like:

*x*

^{0}

*dx*

^{i}. The metric then is introduced by

*ds*

^{2}=

*g*

_{rs}(

*x*

^{0}

*dx*

^{r})(

*x*

^{0}

*dx*

^{s}), and the asymmetric connection \({\Gamma _{rs}}^i - {1 \over 2}\delta _r^i{\phi _s}\) is defined via

*ϕ*

_{k}appears and the demand that the length of a transported vector be conserved leads to

*g*

_{ij}. The curvature tensor is defined by

*g*

_{ij}, and \({\overset 0 \phi _i} = {1 \over {{x^0}}}{{\partial \log {{({x^0})}^2}} \over {\partial {x^i}}}\) In the thesis of D. K. Sen, begun with G. Lyra in Göttingen and finished in Paris with M.-A. Tonnelat, the field equations are derived from the Lagrangian \({\mathcal L} = {({x^0})^4}\sqrt g K\). In the gauge

*x*

^{0}= 1, they are given by [571]:

*g*

_{ij}. The problem with the non-integrability of length-transfer does not occur here. For further discussion of Lyra geometry cf. [572].

In relying on a weakened criterion for a theory to qualify as UFT suggested by Horváth (cf. Section 19.1.1), after he had added the Lagrangian for the electromagnetic field, Sen could interpret his theory as unitary. In later developments of the theory by him and his coworkers in the 1970s, it was interpreted just as an alternative theory of gravitation (scalar-tensor theory) [573, 574, 310]. In both editions of his book on scalar-tensor theory, Jordan mentioned Lyra’s “modification of Riemannian geometry which is close to Weyl’s geometry but different from it” ([319], p. 133; ([320], p. 154).

### 17.2 Finsler geometry and unified field theory

“The general feeling today is that in fact the non-symmetric theory is not the correct means for unifying the two fields.”

^{327}

*dx’s*” ([139], p. 11). Thus it was not unnatural that K. Tonooka from Japan looked at Finsler spaces with fundamental form \(^3\sqrt {{a_{\alpha \beta \gamma}}d{x^\alpha}d{x^\beta}d{x^\gamma}}\) [648], except that only \({\vert^3}\sqrt {{a_{\alpha \beta \gamma}}d{x^\alpha}d{x^\beta}d{x^\gamma}} \vert\) is an acceptable distance. With (551), Stephenson went along the route to Finsler (or even a more general) geometry which had been followed by O. Varga [669], by Horváth [283] and by Horváth & Moór, [286]. He mentioned the thesis of E. Schaffhauser-Graf [530] to be discussed below. In Finsler geometry, the line element is dependent on the direction of moving from the point with coordinates

*x*

^{i}to the point with

*x*

^{i}+

*dx*

^{i}:

*u*an arbitrary parameter. In the approach to Finsler geometry by Cartan [74], the starting point is the line element:

^{328}

*L*a homogeneous function of the velocity

*ẋ*

^{m}, and the Finsler metric defined by:

*X*

^{k}is experiencing:

*L*reformulated with the Finsler metric.

^{329}Equation (555) can also be written as

*γ*

^{kj}, the “torsion” vector \({S_i} = {1 \over 2}L{{\partial \, ln \vert\gamma \vert} \over {\partial {{\dot x}^i}}}\) With its help and its covariant derivative taken to be:

^{330}

*absolute parallelism*of the line elements. Schaffhauser-Graf used the curvature tensor 0. Varga had introduced in a “Finsler space with absolute parallelism of line elements” ([669], Eq. (37)), excluding terms from torsion. The main physical results of her approach are that a charged particle follows a “geodesic”, i.e., a worldline the tangent vectors of which are parallel. The charge experiences the Lorentz force, yet this force, locally, can be transformed away like an inertial force. Also, charge conservation is guaranteed. For vanishing electromagnetic field, Einstein’s gravitational theory follows. It seems to me that the prize paid, i.e., the introduction of Finsler geometry with its numerous geometric objects, was exorbitantly high.

*Mathematical Reviews*[MR0098611] reproduced below: The paper consists of three parts. In the first part, the author points out the difference between Einstein-Maxwell field equations of general relativity and Einstein’s latest unified field equations. The first set yields the equations of motion in the form

*δ ∫ ds*= 0 to (1) with

*F*

_{μλ}= 2

*∂*[

_{λ}

*A*

_{μ}]. However the tensor

*R*

_{μλ}does not yield any appropriate scalar term which could be taken as Lagrangian. […]

*F*

_{μλ}is of the second or third class (which is always the case in Callaway’s approximation) we could have \({F^v}_\mu (d{x^\mu}/ds) = 0\) in (1) for

*F*

_{μλ}≠ 0. 2) The clue to Callaway’s result is that four Einstein’s equations

*∂*{

_{ω}

*R*

_{μ}

*λ*} = 0 do not contribute anything to the equations of motion of the considered singularities. If one replaces these four differential equations of the third order by another set of four differential equations of the third order, then the kinematical description of the motion results in the form

Stephenson dropped his plan to calculate the curvature scalar *R* from (557) and (551), and to use it then as a Lagrangian for the field equations, because he saw no possibility to arrive at a term *R* (*g*) + *F*_{st}*F*^{st} functioning as a Finslerian Lagrangian. His negative conclusion was: “It so seems that this particular generalization of Riemannian geometry is not able to lead to a correct implementation of the electromagnetic field.”^{331}

## 18 Mutual Influence and Interaction of Research Groups

### 18.1 Sociology of science

#### 18.1.1 Princeton and UFT

Einstein’s unified field theory makes a good example for showing that the influence of a *model scientist* may be as important in driving research as *ideas* coming from physics or mathematics themselves. A realistic impression seems to be that most in the group of young workers busy with Einstein’s UFT after the second world war were enticed by Einstein’s fame and authority — perhaps mediated through the prestige of their professorial advisers. They went into the field despite its being disdained by mainstream-physicists. In view of the success of quantum field theory, it could hardly have been the methods and conceptions used in UFT that attracted them. In fact, many of those who wrote a doctoral thesis in the field dropped the subject quickly afterwards in favor of general relativity proper, or of some other field. It would be unfair to give too much importance to J. R. Oppenheimer’s reckless rating of 1935 (unpublished at the time), i.e., “Princeton is a madhouse: its solipsistic luminaries shining in separate & helpless desolation. Einstein is completely cuckoo” (Letter of J. R. Oppenheimer to his brother Frank from 11 January 1935 in [462], p. 190.) After all, much later during his time as director of the Institute for Advanced Study there, he supported people working on versions of UFT like R. L. Arnowitt who stayed at the Princeton Institute for Advanced Study from 1954 to 1956 and expressly thanked him in a paper ([5], p. 742). Nevertheless, while highly respected, Einstein and his theories lived there in splendid scientific isolation.

#### 18.1.2 Mathematics and physics

*affine connection*(G. Hessenberg, T. Levi-Civita, E. Cartan, H. Weyl). Next, the transfer of this new geometrical concept into physics led to the unified field theories of Eddington, Einstein, and Schrödinger [138, 546, 548]. It seems to me that after this third interaction mathematics (geometry) no longer did profit from physical theory: the conceptual development of metric-affine geometry took place independently

*within*mathematics (L. P. Eisenhart, O. Veblen, J. M. Thomas, T. Y. Thomas). Einstein’s approach to a connection by way of the compatibility equation (30) was of very limited interest for mathematics. This was expressed most clearly by Schouten:

“[…] in the end there is nothing but an

X_{4}[a 4-dimensional manifold] with only two fieldsg_{(ij)}andg_{[ij ]}and that […] the differential concomitants of these fields are ordinary concomitants ofg_{(ij)},g_{[ij ]}, the curvature tensor of thesymmetric connection belonging to g_{(ij)}and the covariant derivatives of these quantities with respect tothisconnection. […] It may be useful to introduce this new connection in order to get some heuristic principles […]. But nothing really new can ever arise from following this course.” ([540], p. 184.)

Unified field theory has stimulated the fantasy of mathematicians such that they investigated conformal geometry [670] and projective geometry [538], or even ventured to apply odd geometries to geometrize physics. We have met some of them (Finsler, Sphere-, Lyra geometries). Certainly, mathematicians also both helped theoretical physicists to solve their equations *and* invented new equations for UFT. Unfortunately, to the *exact* solutions of such equations found, in most cases *no* physical meaning could be given. In physics, the next step in unification would be taken only in the 1960s through the joining of the weak and electromagnetic interactions in electroweak theory with *gravitation* being left aside, however. In mathematics, important developments leading to differential topology as well as to the theory of fiber bundles originated with E. Cartan among others — not with any of the theoretical physicist connected to the unified field theories of Einstein and Schrödinger. Gauge theory, seen as a development starting from Kaluza-Klein theory, and, more recently, string-theory (M-theory) then presented further examples for a fruitful interaction between physics and mathematics.

#### 18.1.3 Organization and funding

Apart from the creative abilities of the individual scientist, knowledge production depends on the institutional organization of research and the ways of communication among researchers. Thus, within a review of the history of physics, beside the conceptional developments, questions pertaining to the sociology of science cannot easily be omitted.

During the period looked at, both, changes in the funding of scientific research, and in the institutional organization toward team work and less interaction with teaching, i.e., away from university research along Humboldt’s idea of a close link between teaching and research, still were going on. In Germany, this development had begun with the establishment of the Kaiser Wilhelm Institutes (KWI, now Max Planck Institutes) since 1911, a combination of private and state funding, together with “Helmholtz-Gesellschaft”, “Stifterverband”, and most influential, the “Notgemeinschaft der deutschen Wissenschaft” predecessor of “Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft” since 1920 [676]. In France, where state-funding was the rule, the apparently not very successful “Caisse des recherches scientifiques” (1910–1934) was replaced by CNRS (Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique) only in 1939, right after the beginning of World War II. Of particular interest for the present review is the foundation of the Institut Henri Poincaré (IHP) in 1926 [579] which was built with private money but did not provide salaries. In the United States mostly private sponsors were involved; e.g., the Carnegie Corporation (1911), the Rockefeller Foundation (1913) and Einstein’s “home” institution, the Princeton Institute for Advanced Study (PIAS) (since the 1930s). The Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies in Ireland (DIAS) was founded in 1935, but funded by the government (Department of Education).^{332} In Great Britain, after the Great War a mixture of state and private funding (University grants commission, Science Research Council) persisted, coordinated in part by the Royal Society. After the 2nd world war 35 Research Associations have sprung up.

Looking at four main figures in UFT, Einstein’s and Hlavatý’s research thus depended on private donors while Schrödinger in Dublin, Lichnerowicz, and Mme. Tonnelat in Paris were state-funded. Within this external framework, there existed micro-structures pertaining to the inner workings of the particular research groups.

### 18.2 After 1945: an international research effort

During the second world war, communications among the various scientists investigating UFT came to a halt — with the exception of the correspondence between nobel prize winners Einstein and Schrödinger. That the exchange between libraries then only slowly began to resume is clear from a letter of A. Lichnerowicz to W. Pauli of 6 October 1945: “In France, only one copy of Mathematical Review and one copy of the series Annals [of Mathematics] exist. Concerning the paper of Einstein published in 1941 at Tucuman, I know about it only through the report in Mathematical Review; it never reached France” ([489], p. 317).^{333}

From hindsight, after the second world war, research in classical unified field theory developed into a world-wide research effort. However, at the time it was no concerted action with regard to funding and organization; the only agreement among researchers consisted in the common use of scientific methods and concepts. As described in detail above in Sections 7 to 9, since the 1920s, it had been mainly Albert Einstein (1879–1955) who had pursued research on UFT if we put aside H. Weyl and A. S. Eddington. Since his separation from Berlin, most important actors of the 1930s and 1940s were Einstein himself in Princeton, and somewhat later (from 1943 on) Erwin Schrödinger (1887–1961) in Dublin. After the war, in Paris the mathematician André Lichnerowicz (1915–1998) became interested in mathematical problems related with UFT, and a student of Louis de Broglie, and later professor Marie-Antoinette Tonnelat (1912–1980), built a sizable group working in the field. From the 1950s on Vavlav Hlavatý (1894–1969) in Bloomington/Indiana and his collaborators contributed prominently to the field. The Italian groups around Bruno Finzi (1899–1974) and Maria Pastori (1895–1975) were not as influential in the 1960s, perhaps because they wrote exclusively in Italian, published mostly in Italian journals and seemingly deemed networking less important although there were connections to France and the USA (cf. Sections 10 to 15).

#### 18.2.1 The leading groups

The internal structure of the research “groups” differed greatly: in Princeton (as in Berlin), Einstein never had doctoral students but worked with post-docs like Peter Bergmann, Bannesh Hoffmann, Valentine Bargmann, Leopold Infeld, Bruria Kaufman, and Ernst Straus^{334}. At the time, further people interested in unified field theory came to the Princeton Institute for Advanced Study (PIAS), e.g., Tullio Levi-Civita (1936), Vaclav Hlavatý (1937), Luis A. Santaló (1948–49) from Argentina, M. S. Vallarta from Mexico (1952), Wolfgang Pauli (1940–1946; 1949–50), Richard Lee Ingraham (1952–53), R. L. Arnowitt (1954–55), both from the USA, and D. W. Sciama (1954–55) from Great Britain. Schrödinger also worked with scientifically advanced people, mostly independent scholars at DIAS (J. McConnell, A. Papapetrou, O. H. Hittmair, L. Bass, F. Mautner, B. Bertotti). Unlike this, A. Lichnerowicz at the Collège de France and Mme. Tonnelat at the Institut Henri Poincaré (IHP) worked with many doctoral students. M.-A. Tonnelat had also two experienced collaborators whom she had not advised for her doctoral theses: Stamatia Mavridès [1954–57] and Judith Winogradzki [1954–59]. None of these scientists in Paris have been scholars at the Princeton Institute; possibly, they did not belong to the proper network.

The following students and young scientists wrote their PhD theses in M.-A. Tonnelat’s group at the IHP or were interacting intensely with her on the Einstein-Schrödinger type of Unified Field Theories, and on linear theories of gravitation: Jacques Lévy — Thèse 1957; Pham Tan Hoang — Thèse 1957; Dipak K. Sen — Thèse, 1958; Jean Hély — Thèse 1959; Marcel Bray — Thèse 1960; Liane Bouche, née Valere — Thèse 1961; Huyen Dangvu — Thèse 1961; Mme. Aline Surin, née Parlange — Thèse 1963; Nguyên, Phong-Chau; — Thèse 1963; Philippe Droz-Vincent — Thèse 1963;^{335} Sylvie Lederer — Thèse 1964; Huyen Dangvu — Thèse 1966, Rudolphe Bkouche — Thèse 196?. S. Kichenassamy wrote his thesis with her on general relativity in 1958. That M.-A. Tonnelat advised doctoral students also on subjects outside of unified field theory is shown by the thesis of 1974 on classical renormalization by Th. Damour [99].

Scientists and PhD students closer to A. Lichnerowicz besides Yvonne Bruhat/Fourès(-Bruhat)/Choquet-Bruhat — Thèse 1951, but unlike her working on Unified Field Theories, were: Yves Thiry — Thèse 1950; Pham Mau Quan — Thèse 1954; Josette Charles, née Renaudie — Thèse 1956; Françoise Maurer, née Tison — Thèse 1957; Françoise Hennequin, née Guyon — Thèse 1958; Pierre V. Grosjean — Thèse 1958; Robert Vallée — Thèse 1961; Albert Crumeyrolle — Thèse 1961; Marcel Lenoir — Thèse 1962; Jean Vaillant — Thèse 1964;^{336} Claude Roche — Thèse 1969; Alphonse Capella — Thèse 1972?. Eliane Blancheton wrote her thesis in general relativity in 1961.

Y. Thiry also supervised doctoral students. Among them is P. Pigeaud with a thesis on the application of approximations in Jordan-Thiry theory [495]. The thesis adviser for Monique Signore-Poyet was Stamatia Mavridès (Thesis 1968).^{337}

The relationship between M.-A. Tonnelat and A. Lichnerowicz must have been friendly and cooperative; he seems to have been the more influential in the faculty: having become a professor at the prestigious Collège de France while her application had not been successful ([92], p. 330). For the examination of Tonnelat’s PhD-students, since 1960, Lichnerowicz was presiding the commission; she belonged to the two (or rarely three) examiners. Before Lichnerowicz, G. Darmois had been presiding several times. Tonnelat was backed by L. de Broglie; she became his successor as director of the “Centre de physique théorique” of Paris University (Sorbonne) in 1972.

From the Italian groups around Bruno Finzi and Maria Pastori (Milano) also a sizable number of doctoral degrees resulted. People working in UFT were: Paulo Udeschini (Pavia); Emilio Clauser (Milano); Elisa Brinis-Udeschini (Milano); Laura Gotusso (Milano); Bartolomeo Todeschini (Milano); Franco De Simoni (Pisa); Franca Graiff (Milano) [Student of M. Pastori]; Laura Martuscelli [Student of M. Pastori]; Angelo Zanella (Milano); Luigia Mistrangioli.

Of the seven doctoral students of V. Hlavatý,^{338} two were involved in work on UFT: Robert C. Wrede [PhD 1956] and Joseph Francis Schell [PhD 1957].

We notice the considerable number of female collaborators and PhD students both in France and Italy in comparison with all the other countries. In Germany, in particular, no woman scientist has worked in UFT in the period studied.

#### 18.2.2 Geographical distribution of scientists

Research on UFT was done on all continents but essentially centered in Europe and in the United States of America. The contributing scientists came from more than 20 different countries. The largest number of researchers in UFT, between 1955 and 1956, worked in Paris. To a lesser extent work on UFT was done also in Asia, notably in Japan since the 1930s and in India since the 1950s. In the 1970s and 1980s, many papers on exact solutions of the Einstein-Schrödinger theory and alternatives were published by Indian scientists. In the early 1960s, V. Hlavatý had a coworker from India (R. S. Mishra). Of the six papers on UFT published by S. N. Bose in Calcutta from 1953–1955, five appeared in French journals, perhaps due to his contacts established during his previous stay in Paris in 1924/25.

Did those involved in UFT move from one place to another one? During the period considered, the mobility of scientists in Europe was seriously hampered by the Nazi-regime, the second world war and the ensuing occupation of Eastern Europe by the USSR (“cold war”). While doing their main work, the group leaders Einstein, Schrödinger, Lichnerowicz, and Tonnelat remained at the same place, respectively. After the war had ended, Tonnelat visited Schrödinger in Dublin. Because of the political situation, Hlavatý left his native Czechoslovakia, went to Paris as a guest professor at the Sorbonne (1948). He also spent some time in Princeton following an invitation by Einstein before obtaining a position at the University of Indiana. A. Papapetrou (1907–1997) who had obtained a doctoral degree at the Polytechnical University of Stuttgart, Germany, and had been professor in Athens, Greece, during 1940–1946, was the only major contributor to UFT who changed his positions several times. He first worked in Dublin until 1948, then at the University of Manchester until 1952 when he went to Berlin. There, he headed a group in general relativity at the Academy of Sciences of the GDR until 1962. From then on he stayed in Paris at the Institut Henri Poincaré until his retirement as a “Directeur de recherche” of the CNRS. Of course, there had always been exchanges between Paris and other centers, but they were not concerned with research on UFT. In 1946/47, the French mathematician Cecile Morette-[DeWitt] (1922–) originally affiliated with the Joliot-Curie group, spent a year at the Institute for Advanced Studies in Dublin. She did not work with Schrödinger on UFT but with P. H. Peng on mesons. Another well-known French mathematician, Yvonne Choquet-Bruhat, who had written her dissertation with A. Lichnerowicz, in 1951/52 was at PIAS.

John Archibald Wheeler must have spent some time in Paris in 1949; he worked on atomic and nuclear physics, though. In 1957 the quantum field theorist Arthur Wightman was a guest scientist at the University of Paris and in 1963/64 and 1968/69 at IHES (Institut des Hautes Etudes Scientifiques) near Paris. Stanley Deser was a Guggenheim fellow and guest professor at the Sorbonne (University of Paris) in 1966/67, and in 1971/72 as a Fulbright Fellow. Tonnelat and Mavridès visited the Pontifical Catholic University of Rio de Janeiro (PUC-Rio), Brazil, as guest professors in 1971. A. Lichnerowicz visited Princeton University in 1974, i.e., outside the period considered here.

#### 18.2.3 Ways of communications

In 1923 to 1925, when research in classical unified field theory started, the only ways of communication among scientists apart from personal visits or encounters during the rare international conferences, were notes on paper in the form of personal letters by surface mail (Einstein and Pauli are famous for their postcards), and publications in scientific journals. Correspondence sometimes included manuscripts or proof sheets. Both, Einstein and Hlavatý left an enormous correspondence.^{339} The most notable change in available services during the period 1930–1960 was the introduction of air mail and wireless services (world wide telex, since the 1930s) including radio broadcasts.^{340} Radio broadcast as well as gramophone records (Einstein in Berlin!) were used mainly for educational purposes. In principle, telegrams also would have been available but they were unwieldy and too expensive for the communication of scientific content. To a lesser degree, the same may apply to the still costly telephone calls even within the same town.

Séminaire Janet (Séminaire de mécanique analytique et de mécanique céleste);

Séminaire de l’école normale supérieure;

Séminaire Théories physiques Institut Henri Poincaré [with invited talks by Einstein, Bonnor, Stephenson, Sciama, and others];

Séminaire de Physique théorique (Séminaire Louis de Broglie).

Séminaire de Physique mathématique du Collège de France (A. Lichnerowicz).

Séminaire sur la Mécanique quantique et les particules élémentaires (J. Winogradzki).

In London, a seminar on unified field theory existed at the University College (Imperial College) (ca. 1945–ca. 1955) [G. Stephenson, C. Kilmister (1924–2010)], and continued at Kings College as a seminar on general relativity and cosmology initiated by the group around H. Bondi [F. Pirani, W. Bonnor, P. Higgs] (late 1950s–1977).

##### 18.2.3.1 Publications

In total, about 150–170 scientists did take part in research on UFT between 1930 and 1965. If we distinguish three age cohorts according to year of birth, then in the group born until 1900 we find 27 people, from 1901–1920 three more (30), and after 1921 18 persons. This is a biased preliminary survey among less than 50 % of all involved, because the birth dates of the then doctoral students, of not so well known researchers, and of many scientists in India and Japan could not yet be obtained. Another grouping would be concerned with the differentiation between mathematicians and theoretical/mathematical physicists working in the field: roughly one third of the contributors to UFT were mathematicians.

Knowledge production in UFT is reflected by a yearly average of 18 papers published.^{341} The maximum of a 5-year-average in published papers per year at a peak of 40 papers occurred in the years just before and just after Einstein’s death, i.e., in 1953–1957; the minimum with 4 papers in the period 1939–1943, i.e., during the years of the second world war. Looking at the absolute number of total yearly publications in UFT which appeared in *Comptes Rendus de l’Académie des Sciences, Paris* (French groups), and their percentage relative to papers on general relativity likewise published in *Comptes Rendus*, we conclude that the number of papers on UFT at most reached 20% of the papers on general relativity.

Do preferred journals exist in which researchers in the field of UFT published their research articles? Certainly, Einstein preferred the *Annals of Mathematics*, edited by Princeton University and, since 1933, co-edited by the Institute for Advanced Study. Likewise, Schrödinger used the *Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy* and the *Communications of the Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies*, the organ of his home institution; M.-A. Tonnelat chose the *Comptes Rendus de l’Academie des Sciences*, Paris to which she had easy access through her former teacher L. de Broglie.^{342} Likewise, Lichnerowicz and the members of the French groups published first in *Comptes Rendus*. Finally, V. Hlavatý published mostly in a journal of his institution, Indiana University, i.e., in *Journal of Rational Mechanics and Analysis*. Thus, the main proponents of UFT did not have to submit their papers to an external refereeing process. However, all of the main figures did at some occasions; M.-A. Tonnelat and her coworkers also published in *Journal de Physique et le Radium, Cahiers de Physique*, and in *Nuovo Cimento*.^{343} V. Hlavatý sent his papers also to Italy (*Rendiconti del Seminario Matematico dell’Università degli Studi di Padova, Rendiconti del Seminario Matematico, Univer*